Home

Altova StyleVision User Manual

Contents

1. lt Notation Declarations gt lt NOTATION GIF PUBLIC urn mime img gif gt lt NOTATION LNK PUBLIC urn mime text plain gt Now that the entities and the notations for them have been declared the next step is to use the unparsed entities in the XML document and SPS Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Additional Editing Procedures Unparsed Entity URIs 237 Using an Unparsed Entity After having declared an unparsed entity in the DTD external or internal subset the entity must be referenced in one or more nodes in the XML document before it can be used in the SPS In this section we describe how e Anunparsed entity is referenced in a node in the XML document e Images and hyperlinks are inserted in the SPS so that XML node content is used as unparsed entities Referencing unparsed entities in the XML document content Given below is a cut down listing of the XML document UEURI Doc xm1 which shows how the unparsed entities declared in the previous section are used inside the img and 1ink elements lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt lt DOCTYPE document SYSTEM UEURIDoc dtd lt ENTITY Picture SYSTEM nanonull gif NDATA GIF gt lt ENTITY AltovaURI SYSTEM http www altova com NDATA LNK gt gt lt document gt lt header gt Example of How to Use Unparsed Entity URIs lt header gt lt para gt lt para gt lt img
2. Add XML Schema DTD Add DB Schema Add User defined Schema The new schema is created and is indicated with the parameter susER1 screenshot below 19 gt 18 gt 18 gt BB IS Schema sources HA SUSER1 User E Root elements Root T All Global Elements 2 Now expand the Root Elements item There is a single root element document element called Root 3 Double click Root and rename it to match the document element of the XML document for which you are building this schema 4 To assign a child element or an attribute to the document element click nla the Append New Element icon or the Append New Attribute icon in the toolbar of the Schema Sources entry helper Alternatively you can right click and select the required command from the context menu After the new element or attribute is added to the tree type in the desired name Note that the Append New Element icon and append New Attribute icon have dropdown menus that can be accessed by clicking the dropdown arrow in the respective icon The dropdown menus contain items that enable you to add nodes at alternative levels relative to the selected node You can also drag nodes to the desired location described in the next step In the screenshot below the article element is the document element The elements Title Para Bold and Italic and the attributes 1D and Author have been added at the child level of Art
3. _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 200 Presentation Procedures Working with CSS Styles External CSS Stylesheets To assign an external CSS stylesheet to the SPS do the following 1 InDesign View select the External item in the Style Repository window screenshot below Style Repository x o 0 mE 5 iE Global 2 Click the Add button at the top left of the Style Repository toolbar see screenshot above 3 Inthe Open dialog that pops up browse for and select the required CSS file then click Open The CSS file is added to the External item as part of its tree structure see tree listing and screenshot below 4 To add another external CSS stylesheet repeat steps 1 to 3 The new CSS stylesheet will be added to the External tree after all previously added external CSS stylesheets Viewing and modifying the tree of external CSS stylesheets The tree of external CSS stylesheets is structured as follows a so see screenshot below CSS 1 css Location of file editable in Style Repository window Media can be defined in Style Repository window Rules non editable must be edited in CSS file Selector 1 Property 1 Property N Selector N CSS N css Each CSS file location item can be edited in the Style Repository window do this by clicking the Edit button and selecting the required CSS file The media to which that particular stylesheet is applicable can al
4. Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH High Level Procedures Working with Databases 119 Modifying a DB Filter To modify a DB Filter click Edit Edit DB Filters This pops up the Edit DB Filters dialog box You can now edit the expressions in any of the listed criteria add new criteria re order criteria or delete criteria in the DB Filter After you have completed the modifications click OK The data from the DB is automatically re loaded into StyleVision so as to reflect the modifications to the DB Filter Clearing deleting a DB Filter To clear or delete a DB Filter select the element for which the DB Filter has to be cleared either in the Design Window or the Schema Tree There is one DB Filter for each top level data table element Then click Edit Clear DB Filter The filter will be cleared and the filter symbol will no longer appear alongside the name of the element in the Schema Tree _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 120 High Level Procedures Working with Databases SPS Design Features for DB You can design a DB based SPS just as you would design any other schema based SPS that is by dragging and dropping schema nodes from the schema window into the design document by inserting static content directly in the design document and by applying suitable formatting to the various design components The following points however are specific to DB based SPSs Creating a dy
5. User and Reference Manual ALTOVA stylevision 2006 Copyright 1998 2006 Altova GmbH All rights reserved Use of this software is governed by and subject to an Altova software license agreement XMLSpy MapForce StyleVision SemanticWorks SchemaAgent UModel DiffDog Authentic Altova XML and ALTOVA are trademarks and or registered trademarks of Altova GmbH Patent 5 pending XML XSL XHTML and W3C are trademarks registered in numerous countries of the World Wide web Consortium marks of the W3C are registered and held by its host institutions MIT INRIA and Keio UNICODE and the Unicode Logo are trademarks of Unicode Inc This software contains material that is 1934 1938 Dundas Software Ltd all rights reserved The Sentry Spelling Checker Engine 2000 Wintertree Software Inc STLport 1993 2000 Boris Fomitchey 1394 Hewlett Packard ALTOVA Company 1336 37 Silicon Graphics Computer Systems Inc 91397 Moscow Center for SPARC Technology Scintilla Copyright 91393 2002 by Neil Hodgson lt neilh zcintills org gt ANTLR Copyright 91989 2005 by Terence Parr lt www antlr org gt All other names or trademarks are the property of their respective owners Altova StyleVision User Manual All rights reserved No parts of this work may be reproduced in any form or by any means graphic electronic or mechanical including photocopying recording taping or information storage and retrieval systems wit
6. 1 Click either of the DB schema generation commands create new SPS from DB or add DB schema see above The following dialog is displayed Select a Source Database x Please select a source database or a stored connection and click on next Microsoft Access ADO J Microsoft SQL Server ADO C Oracle ADO MySQL ADO C IBM DB2 AD0 C Any ADO Next Cancel 2 Select the source DB type and click Next If you selected a DB type of MS Access then a dialog appears in which you can browse for the DB If you selected any other DB type option a dialog appears prompting you to build a connection string see Connect to a DB and set up the SPS for details about building a connection string After you have selected the MS Access DB or built a connection string to the DB click Next 3 The next dialog is the Select Base Table Information dialog shown below which lists Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH High Level Procedures Creating the SPS Structure 97 the data tables in the selected DB by owner Select Base Table Information a xj Database Owners Database Tables Table C Views vV Eis Categories C Se CustomerCustomerDemo Se CustomerDemographics Se Customers Bg Employees Be Employee erritories Se Order Details z Se Orders Hl Select All Deselect All Select All Deselect All r Selected
7. 10 Authentic View In StyleVision you can preview the Authentic View of an XML document that has been assigned as the Working XML File to the currently open StyleVision This preview is available when you click the Authentic Preview tab in the Main Window of StyleVision In order for the Authentic Preview to be enabled you must assign the currently open StyleVision Power Stylesheet a Working XML File File Assign Working XML File This section provides An overview of the interface A description of the toolbar icons specific to Authentic View A description of viewing modes available in the main Authentic Preview window A description of the context menus available at various points in the Authentic View of the XML document e A detailed description of how to use various Authentic View features Additional sources of Authentic View information are e An Authentic View Tutorial which shows you how to use the Authentic View interface This tutorial is available in the documentation of the Altova XMLSpy and Altova Authentic Desktop products see the Tutorials section as well as online For a detailed description of Authentic View menu commands see the User Reference section of your product documentation Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Authentic View Interface 245 10 1 Interface This section describes the Authentic View user interface It contains the following sections Overview of the GUI Authent
8. Department gt Name Person gt To expand the contracted element attribute double click the contracted tag In large markup attributes are recognized by the symbol in the start and end tags of the attribute approved Hide all markup All XML markup is hidden Since the formatting seen in Authentic View is the formatting of the printed document this viewing mode is a WYSIWYG view of the document Content display In Authentic View content is displayed in two ways e Plain text You type in the text and this text becomes the content of the element or the value of the attribute Enter the department e Data entry devices The display contains either an input field text box a multiline input field combo box check box or radio button In the case of input fields and multiline input fields the text you enter in the field becomes the XML content of the element or the value of the attribute In the case of the other data entry devices your selection produces a corresponding XML value which is specified in the StyleVision Power Stylesheet Thus the selection approved in the display example below could map to an XML value of 1 or to approved or anything else while not approved in the display could map to 0 or not approved or anything else _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 250 Authentic View Interface approved Optional nodes When an element or attribute is optional a
9. Show add Name when XML Element is missing Determines whether a prompt Add element attribute name will appear in Authentic View when the selected element or attribute is missing By default the prompt will be displayed This setting is available when the selected node is an element or an attribute User info Text entered in this text box appears as a tooltip when the mouse pointer is placed over the _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 216 Additional Editing Procedures Authentic Node Properties node It is available when the selected node is an element attribute contents or an Auto Calculation If both the element attribute node as well as the contents node has User Info then the User Info for the contents node is displayed as the tooltip when the mouse is placed over the node Maximum number of database records to be displayed This node setting applies to nodes that represent a DB table i e Row elements that are children of a top level table element The value entered here specifies the number of records in the table that will be displayed Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Additional Editing Procedures Additional Validation 217 9 2 Additional Validation The Additional Validation setting is available when the selected component is an element or attribute node contents contents placeholder a data entry device or an Auto Calculation You can set an XPath expression to de
10. contents Jl color font family checkbox common font size comboboxes details font style paragraph effects font variant bs E ba E ba font font weight IE numbering paged media text ul The Styles window is divided into two broad parts The Styles For column in which the selected component types are listed One of these component types may be selected at a time for styling In the screenshot above the 1 paragraph component is selected For detailed information about the selection of component types see Selecting SPS Components to Style The Property Definitions column in which CSS properties are defined for the component type s selected in the Styles For column The Property Definitions column can be displayed in three views see below For the details of how to set local property definitions see Setting CSS Property Values Three views of Property Definitions The Property Definitions column shows the properties of the component selected in Design View The display is available in three views listed below and can be switched between each other by clicking the respective buttons in the toolbar of the Entry Helper Grouped ial The properties are organized into groups In this view the Property Definitions column is divided into three columns Group Attribute and Value All the available property groups are displayed in the Group column When a group is selected the properties
11. help Of verbose OF v FOPBatFile lt file gt e SPS and Parameters lt stylesheet gt lt paramname gt lt value gt e XSLT file output OutXSLT lt file gt OutXSLRTF lt file gt OutXSLFO lt file gt e Input files InpXML lt file gt InpXSLT lt file gt InpXSLRTF lt file gt InpXSLFO lt file gt Displays syntax at the command line Displays processing information at runtime Sets FOP processor batch file Sets SPS sps stylesheet Assigns a value to a parameter declared in the XSLT stylesheet If the value contains a space enclose the value in double quotes For example sparamname A value Multiple parameters are separated by spaces Writes XSLT for HTML to the specified file Writes XSLT for RTF to the specified file Writes XSLT for FO to the specified file Sets input XML file Sets input XSLT for HTML file Sets input XSLT for RTF file Sets input XSLT for FO file Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH High Level Procedures Command Line Interface StyleVisionBatch 135 Output files OutHTML lt file gt Writes HTML output to the specified file OutRTF lt file gt Writes RTF output to the specified file OutFO lt file gt Writes FO output to the specified file Out PDF lt file gt Writes PDF output to the specified file DB data output OutDBXML lt file gt Writes XML generated from DB to the specified file OutDBSchema lt file gt Writes XML
12. The Options command opens a dialog in which you can specify the encoding of the HTML output file Options e ise Encoding Default Output Encoding for ISO 8859 1 Latin 1 est European Cancel Apply To set the encoding of the output HTML file open the dropdown menu of the combo box and select the desired option from the list of encoding options and click OK Every new SPS you create from this point on will set the HTML output encoding as defined in this tab In the XSLT for HTML the output encoding information is registered at the following locations e Inthe encoding attribute of the stylesheet s xs1 output element lt xsl output version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 indent no omit xml declaration no media type text html gt e Inthe charset attribute of the content type meta element in the HTML header lt meta http equiv Content Type content text html charset UTF 8 gt Note This setting is the default encoding for HTML output and will be used for new SPSs You cannot change the encoding of the currently open SPS using this dialog To change the encoding of the currently open SPS use the File Encoding command _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 370 Reference Window Menu 11 11 Window Menu The Window menu has commands to specify how StyleVision windows should be displayed in the GUI cascaded tiled or maximized To maximize a window click the maximize button of
13. have been moved to the XML Schema namespace e Some XPath 2 0 functions have the same name as XML Schema datatypes For example for the XPath functions fn string and fn boolean there exist XML Schema datatypes with the same local names xs string and xs boolean So if _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 382 Appendices XSLT Engine Information you were to use the XPath expression string Hello the expression evaluates as fn string Hello notas xs string Hello Schema awareness The Altova XSLT 2 0 Engine is schema aware Whitespace in XML document By default the Altova XSLT 2 0 Engine strips all boundary whitespace from boundary whitespace only nodes in the source XML document The removal of this whitespace affects the values that the n position fn last fn count and fn deep equal functions return For more details see Whitespace only Nodes in XML Document in the XPath 2 0 and XQuery 1 0 Functions section Note If a boundary whitespace only text node is required in the output then insert the required whitespace within one of the two adjoining child elements For example the XML fragment lt para gt This is lt b gt bold lt b gt lt i gt italic lt gt lt para gt when processed with the XSLT template lt xsl template match para gt lt xsl apply templates gt lt xsl template gt will produce This is bolditalic To get a space between bold and italic in the output
14. 7 Content Editing Procedures This section describes in detail the core procedures used to create and edit the components of an SPS The procedures are listed below and described in detail in the sub sections of this section e Inserting XML Content as Text XML data can be inserted in the design by dragging the relevant nodes into the design and creating them as contents and rest of contents e Using Data Entry Devices XML data can be input by the Authentic View user via data entry devices such as input fields and combo boxes This provides a layer of user help as well as of input constraints Individual nodes in the XML document can be created as data entry devices e Creating Lists Static lists where the list structure is entered in the SPS design and dynamic lists where an XML document sub structure is created as a list provide powerful data ordering capabilities e Working with Tables Tables can be inserted by i the SPS designer directly in the SPS design static tables or using XML document sub structures and ii the Authentic View user e Using Graphics Graphics can be inserted in the SPS design using a variety of methods to determine the target URI static dynamic a combination of both and unparsed entity URIs e Bookmarks and Hyperlinks Bookmarks mark key points in the output document which can then be targeted by hyperlinks Hyperlinks can also link to external resources using a variety of methods to determine
15. Column Cell page break after page break before 2 3 Place the cursor in the first row to format it and click the Table Properties icon Click the Row tab Table Properties Xi Table Row Column Cell center B2B2B2 middle Since the first row will be the header row set a background color to differentiate this row from the other rows Note the Row properties that have been set in the figure above Then enter the column header text Your table will now look like this Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Authentic View Editing in Authentic View 261 Name Telephone Email Notice that the alignment is centered as specified 4 Now say you want to divide the Telephone column into the sub columns Office and Home in which case you would need to join cells Place the cursor in the Telephone Lt cell and click the str Split vertically icon Your table will look like this Telephone 4b 5 Now place the cursor in the cell below the cell containing Telephone and click the Split horizontally icon Then type in the column headers Office and Home Your table will now look like this Telephone Hane Office Home Now you will have to vertically split each cell in the Telephone column You can also add and delete columns and rows and vertically align cell content using the table editing icons The XML ta
16. Condition 3 Inthe Edit XPath Expression dialog that pops up screenshot below enter the XPath expression W Edit XPath expression i x Expression count n1 Department M Select Schema Attribute or ElemerSelect Operator Select Function Selection n1 Orgchart n1 O Oper Description Function Returns Description any equal boolean any boolean argument con EE Schema sources a any not equal ceiling number number smallest integ number less concat string string concatenatior HG XML C Prograt number greater concat string string concatenatior E Z Root elements number less or equal contains strin boolean tests whether E orgchart number greater or eq count nodes number number of noc number add false boolean Boolean false CompanyLor number subtract floor number number largest integer Name number multiply idfany nodes selects eleme offi number divide lang string boolean Whether lang ag s number modulo last number contest size Name boole logical AND local namef string local part of tr MAR Rann of boole logical OR local name no string local part of tr al nodes union of nod namef string name of a cor g b namalnadgel strina name of the Absolute XPath The context node for the expression being built is highlighted in the schema tree in the pane at extreme left You can enter the XPath expression directly in the text box or you c
17. Gal Parameter i mcl Schema sources B Scripts H2 Global Templates L Page Layout At the root of the Design Tree is the location of the SPS file The next level is organized into the following categories e Namespaces which displays all the namespaces declared in the SPS e Parameters which enables the Edit Parameters dialog to be displayed In the Edit Parameters dialog you can declare and edit user defined parameters for the SPS and their default values e Schema sources which lists the schema on which the SPS is based and its location e Scripts which shows all the JavaScript functions that have been defined for the SPS using the JavaScript Editor of StyleVision e Global Templates which gives a detailed graph of all the global templates in the SPS including the main template e Layout which enables you to customize print layout items such as headers and footers Modifying the Design Tree display The display of the Design Tree can be modified via the context menu screenshot below which pops up on right clicking an item in the Design Tree Add Remove Expand All Collapse All Expand from this point Collapse to this point Expand Collapse all to this level _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 34 User Interface Design Entry Helpers A description of these commands is given in the following table Enables page layout items to be added to the Layout cat
18. Unambiguous content model A content model is considered unambiguous when it consists of a single sequence with maxOccurs 1 of child elements with no choices groups substitutions etc In such cases when the element is added the sequence of child elements is unambiguously known and they are automatically added In the screenshot example below the three child elements are all mandatory and can occur only once parent el e2 63 When the element parent is added in Authentic View its child elements are automatically inserted screenshot below Pressing the tab key takes you to the next element in the sequence Pared ED Firs EdD JED E Paren If the e2 element were optional then when the element parent is added in Authentic View the elements e1 and e3 are automatically inserted and the element e2 appears in the Elements Entry Helper so that it can be inserted if desired screenshot below Pressing the tab key in e1 takes the user to e3 parent gt leT gt First EED lt 3 lt parent Al parent alEje2 The above content model scenario is the only scenario Authentic View considers unambiguous All other cases are considered ambiguous and in order for Authentic View to disambiguate and efficiently display the desired elements the design must adhere to a few simple rules These are explained below Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Content Editing Procedures Inserting
19. for adding and removing Authentic toolbar buttons All these features are available to the Authentic View user They enable you as the SPS designer to test the SPS using features at the Authentic View users s disposal Save Authentic XML Data Yalidate XML Hide Markup Show Small Markup Show Large Markup Show Mixed Markup Append row Insert row Duplicate row Move row Up Move row Down Delete row Define DTD Entities A 1D 11 Ht Wil hy eA xe Reset Toolbar Validating and saving XML documents While editing an XML document in Authentic View you can check the validity of the Working XML File by using the Validate XML button Editing changes can be saved to the Working XML File with the Save Authentic XML Data button Markup tags in Authentic View In Authentic View the display of markup tags can be customized Markup tags can be hidden Hide Markup can be shown with node names Show Large Markup without node names Show Small Markup or with any of these three options for individual nodes Show Mixed Markup Editing of dynamic tables in Authentic View In Authentic View row operations can be performed on dynamic tables Rows can be inserted appended and duplicated as well as be moved up and down using the appropriate toolbar buttons Insert Row Append Row Duplicate Row Move Row Up and Move Row Down Defining DTD Entities Entities can be defined at any time while editing the Working XML File
20. 10 product features 13 running from the command line 133 user manual 3 StyleVision Power Stylesheet see under SPS 3 StyleVisionBatch 18 command line utility 133 examples of commands 137 syntax 134 Support for StyleVision 374 Support options 6 Sybase conversion of datatypes in XML Schema generation from DB 396 Symbols in Design View of Auto Calculations 293 of bookmarks anchors 293 of conditional templates 293 of data entry devices 293 of hyperlinks 293 of images 293 of predefined formats 293 of XML document content 293 of XML document nodes 293 T Table append column to 336 append row to 336 cell content 334 delete column from 337 delete row from 337 deleting in SPS 335 editing in Authentic View 351 headers and footers 334 insert column in 336 insert row in 336 inserting a static table 335 navigating 334 show hide borders in StyleVision 340 vertical alignment of cell content 341 Table menu 334 Tables creating dynamic tables 163 creating static tables 162 editing dynamic SPS tables 247 formatting 166 headers and footers in PDF 166 imported from HTML document 130 inserting in Authentic View 345 joining cells in 338 overview 159 Tables SPS editing of properties 290 toolbar buttons for editing 290 Tables in Authentic View icons for editing XML tables 263 usage of 257 using SPS static and dynamic tables 258 using XML tables 259 Technical Information
21. 397 Technical support for StyleVision 374 Template XML file 30 86 definition of 15 for SPS 347 Templates tree of 33 Terminology used in StyleVision 15 _ 2006 Altova GmbH 430 Index Text state icons 174 defining in SPSs 343 Toolbar buttons adding and removing 284 Toolbars 283 adding removing icons in 283 Authentic toolbar 286 customizing 317 Formatting toolbar 287 moving 20 positioning in GUI 283 resetting 283 Standard toolbar 288 switching display on and off 317 switching display on off 283 Table toolbar 290 Tools menu 359 U Undo command 311 Unicode support in Altova products 402 Unicode support in Altova products 401 403 Unparsed entities declaring 236 referencing in XML document 237 using in SPS 237 unparsed entity uri function of XSLT 235 Updating a node with an Auto Calculation result 183 Updating nodes with values of Auto Calculations 186 188 URIs holding in unparsed entities 235 Usage 85 User info 215 User Interface see GUI 20 User manual see also Onscreen Help 372 User reference 282 User defined schemas 98 V Validate XML in Authentic View 353 Validator in Altova products 399 Vertical alignment of table cell content in SPSs 341 View menu 316 W whitespace handling and XPath 2 0 functions 385 whitespace in XML document handling by Altova XSLT 2 0 Engine 381 whitespace nodes in XML document and handli
22. All This adds the string a11 to the sequence of items returned by the XPath expression 4 Check the dropdown list of the combo box in Authentic View screenshot below Total number of news items 4 Period covered by news items 4 2006 to 5 2006 Select by relevance all z NanoPower NanoNull Stockmarket NanoDiamonds All re The condition that displays the news item template has a single branch with the expression metainfo relevance presswatch selection byrelevance Now if the user selection is A11 then this value a11 is passed to the node presswatch selection byrelevance Since NO metainfo relevance node has the value a11 no news item will be displayed when a11 is selected What you have to do is create a second branch for the condition which will test for a value of a11 By creating the news item template within this branch you will be outputting the news item if the test is true Do this as follows 1 In Design View select the news item condition _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 76 Quick Start Tutorial Using Conditions 2 Right click the condition and from the context menu select Condition Copy Branch 3 Inthe Edit XPath Expression dialog that pops up enter the expression presswatch selection byrelevance All 4 Click OK to finish A second branch is created The second branch has as its contents the same template as the first branch What the second branch does
23. Any additional validation requirement that you have entered for individual nodes Authentic Node Settings is also checked The result of the validation check is displayed in a pop up message box _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 354 Reference Properties Menu 11 9 Properties Menu The Properties menu contains commands that enable you to insert lists edit DB Filters and define datatype formats for the input formatting feature The description of the commands is organized into the following sub sections e Bullets and Numbering command to insert lists e Edit DB Filters Clear DB Filter commands to edit DB filters and delete DB filters e Predefined Format Strings command to define numeric datatype formats for a given SPS Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Reference Properties Menu 355 Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering command enables you to insert a list at the cursor location Clicking the command pops up the Bullets and Numbering dialog screenshot below in which you can select the list style in the case of a numbered list the initial number can also be specified Bullets and Numbering x Plain Bullets Numbering _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 356 Reference Properties Menu Edit DB Filters Clear DB Filter The Edit DB Filters command allows you to create and edit a filter for a database table a DB
24. Do not enter quotes to delimit the entry Any quotes that you enter will be treated as part of the text string Note that entities are a good mechanism for including Unicode characters in your document do this by entering the Unicode number as the value of Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Authentic View Editing in Authentic View 277 an internal entity e f the entity type is SYSTEM enter the URI of the resource or select a resource on your local network by using the Browse button If the resource contains parsed data it must be an XML file i e it must have a xm1 extension Alternatively the resource can be a binary file such as a GIF file e f the entity type is PUBLIC you must additionally enter a system identifier in this field The NDATA entry tells the processor that this entity is not to be parsed but to be sent to the appropriate processor The NDATA field should therefore be used with unparsed entities only Dialog features You can do the following in the Define Entities dialog Append entities Insert entities Delete entities Sort entities by the alphabetical value of any column by clicking the column header clicking once sorts in ascending order twice in descending order Resize the dialog box and the width of columns Limitations of entities An entity contained within another entity is not resolved either in the dialog Authentic View or XSLT output and the ampersand charact
25. E T All Global Elements For the SPS represented in the screenshot above three templates to match each of the three document elements can now be created in the design The SPS can then be used with different XML instances that are valid according to NanonullOrg xsd some with Department as document element others with Orgchart as document element and still others with Person as document element The appropriate template will be used in the case of each instance document Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH High Level Procedures Creating the SPS Structure 95 DTDs and XML Schemas An SPS can be based on an XML Schema or DTD An XML Schema or DTD can be created as a schema source in one of the following ways e The XML Schema or DTD is is created as a schema source directly when the SPS is created File New New from XML Schema DTD e The XML Schema or DTD is added to an empty SPS in Schema Sources entry helper toolbar icon or context menu Add Schema Add XML Schema DTD The respective commands prompt you to browse for the XML Schema or DTD If the schema is valid it is created as a schema source in the Schema Sources tree of the Schema Sources entry helper _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 96 High Level Procedures Creating the SPS Structure DB Schemas An SPS can be based on a schema that is generated from a DB A DB schema can be created as a schema source in
26. Location us gt 01 00 _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 230 Additional Editing Procedures Working with Dates Formatting Dates A date in an XML document is saved in the format specific to the datatype of its node For example the value of an xs date node will have the format yyyy mMM Dp HH MM while the value of an xs dateTime node will have the format yyyy MM DDTHH MM SS HH MM These formats are said to be the lexical representations of that data By default it is the lexical representation of the data that is displayed in Authentic View and the output However in the SPS the Input Formatting feature can be used to display dates in alternative formats in Authentic View and in some cases optionally in the output Input Formatting for dates can be used to define custom formats for nodes and Auto Calculations of the following datatypes xs date xs dateTime xs gYear xs gYearMonth xs gMonth xs gMonthDay xs gDay Using Input Formatting to format date nodes To format dates alternatively to the lexical format of the date node do the following 1 Right click the content placeholder or the input field of the date node and select Input Formatting This pops up the Input Formatting dialog screenshot below Input Formatting l m Formats for type date Unformatted Standard format YYYY MM DD Cancel C Formatted E Insert Field gt Field Options Go to Err
27. Patent pending g Wintertree Software Inc STLport 1993 2000 Boris Fomitchey 1934 Hewlett Packard AUT OVA Company 913936 37 Silicon Graphics Computer Systems Inc 1397 Moscow Center for ALTOVA N stylevision 2006 XML XSL XHTML and WSC are trademarks registered in numerous countries of the World Wide Web Consortium marks of the WSC are registered and held by its host institutions MIT INRIA and Keio UNICODE and the Unicode Logo are trademarks of Unicode Inc This software contains material that is 1934 1336 Dundas Software Ltd all rights reserved The Sentry Spelling Checker Engine 9 2000 SPARC Technology Scintilla Copyright 91333 2002 by Neil Hodgson lt ncilh zcintilla org gt ANTLR Copyright 91983 2005 by Terence Parr lt www antlr org gt All other names or trade marks are the property of their respective owners _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual Chapter 2 About this Documentation 6 About this Documentation 2 About this Documentation This documentation is the user manual delivered with StyleVision It is available as the built in Help system of StyleVision can be viewed online at the Altova website and can also be downloaded from there as a PDF which you can print The user manual is organized into the following sections e An introduction which explains what an SPS is and introduces the main features and concepts of StyleVision e A description o
28. The structures of headers and footers in both static and dynamic tables can be modified by splitting and joining cells Navigating in tables Use the Tab and arrow keys to navigate the table cells Adding cell content Any type of SPS component can be inserted as the content of a cell The component should be formatted using the standard formatting tools Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Reference Table Menu 335 Insert Table Delete Table The Insert Table command H inserts an empty static table into the design tab Selecting this command opens a dialog box which allows you to define the size of the table in terms of its rows and columns You can change this structure subsequently by appending inserting and deleting rows and or columns The Delete Table command E deletes the static or dynamic table in which the cursor is To insert a dynamic table see Creating dynamic tables _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 336 Reference Table Menu Append Insert Row Column E The Append Row command appends a row to the static or dynamic table in which the cursor is coo The Insert Row command E inserts a row above the row in which the cursor is This command applies to both static and dynamic tables The Append Column command iii appends a column to the static or dynamic table in which the cursor is The Insert Column command He inserts a column to the left of the column in which
29. appropriately indented to provide a clear overview of the logical structure of the DB Filter Edit Database Filters as first character in value signifies variable State YIA City Los Angeles OF City San Diego anced Append AND i ie San Francisco iCustomerNr 25 Append OR Delete Parameters Cancel The DB Filter shown in the screenshot above may be represented in text as State CA AND City Los Angeles OR City San Diego OR City San Francisco AND CustomerNr 25 You can re order the DB Filter by moving a criterion or set of criteria up or down relative to the other criteria in the DB Filter To move a criterion or set of criteria do the following e Select the criterion by clicking on it or select an entire level by clicking on the bracket that represents that level e Click the Up or Down arrow button in the dialog The following points should be noted e If the adjacent criterion in the direction of movement is at the same level the two criteria exchange places e A set of criteria i e criterion within a bracket changes position within the same level it does not change levels e An individual criterion changes position within the same level If the adjacent criterion is further outward inward i e not on the same level then the selected criterion will move outward inward one level at a time To delete a criterion in a DB Filter select the criterion and click Delete
30. do the following 1 Click the Parameters button in the Edit DB Filters dialog This pops up the Edit Parameters dialog shown below Edit Parameters In this dialog enter parameter names without leading Parameter Name Default Value price state date 2004 06 24 Cancel 2 Type in the name and value of the parameter in the appropriate fields Alternatively you can access the Edit Parameters dialog and declare or edit a DB Parameter by selecting Edit Edit Stylesheet Parameters Note The Edit Parameters dialog contains all the parameters that have been defined for the stylesheet While it is an error to use an undeclared parameter in the SPS it is not an error to declare a parameter and not use it After a DB Filter is created for a data table element that element in the Schema Tree is displayed with the filter symbol as shown for the Addresses element in the screenshot below tS Addresses Re ordering criteria in DB Filters _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 118 High Level Procedures Working with Databases The logical structure of the DB Filter and the relationship between any two criteria or sets of criteria is indicated graphically Each level of the logical structure is indicated by a square bracket Two adjacent criteria or sets of criteria indicate the AND operator whereas if two criteria are separated by the word or then the OR operator is indicated The criteria are also
31. i by property group ii all properties sorted alphabetically iii properties with values defined sorted alphabetically The view can be changed for each style individually To change the properties view of a global style select that style and click one of the View icons in the Style Repository toolbar Grouped tal List All E and List Non Empty Es These commands are also available in the context menu under the View Mode item Toggle Important Clicking the Toggle Important icon o sets the CSS value important on or off for the selected CSS rule Reload All The Reload All icon reloads all the external CSS stylesheets Reset The Reset icon deletes the selected external stylesheet or global style Expand Collapse All All expandable items in both the External and Global trees can be expanded and collapsed with one click using the Expand All and Collapse All commands in the context menu respectively _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 38 User Interface Design Entry Helpers Editing CSS styles in the Style Repository The following editing mechanisms are provided in the Style Repository e You can replace an assigned CSS Stylesheet with another CSS stylesheet and you can specify the media to which each external CSS stylesheet applies How to do this is explained in the section External CSS Stylesheets e Global styles can have their selectors and properties directly edited in the Style Repository window How
32. insert a space character within either the lt b gt or lt i gt elements in the XML source For example lt para gt This is lt b gt bold lt b gt lt i gt italic lt gt lt para gt or lt para gt This is lt b gt bold amp x20 lt b gt lt i gt italic lt gt lt para gt or lt para gt This is lt b gt bold lt b gt lt i gt amp x20 italic lt gt lt para gt When such an XML fragment is processed with the same XSLT template given above it will produce This is bold italic XSLT 2 0 elements and functions Limitations and implementation specific behavior of XSLT 2 0 elements and functions are listed in the section XSLT 2 0 Elements and Functions XPath 2 0 functions Implementation specific behavior of XPath 2 0 functions is listed in the section XPath 2 0 and XQuery 1 0 Functions Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Appendices XSLT Engine Information 383 XSLT 2 0 Elements and Functions Limitations The xsl1 preserve space and xsl strip space elements are not supported Implementation specific behavior Given below is a description of how the Altova XSLT 2 0 Engine handles implementation specific aspects of the behavior of certain XSLT 2 0 functions format date format dateTime formatTime Presentation modifiers and formatting tokens in the variable markers of the Picture argument are not supported and if supplied are ignored The optional Language Calendar and Country arguments ar
33. is used when the absolute value is less than 0 000001 or greater than 1 000 000 Otherwise decimal or integer notation is used Precision of xs decimal The precision refers to the number of digits in the number and a minimum of 18 digits is required by the specification For division operations that produce a result of type xs decimal the precision is 19 digits after the decimal point with no rounding Implicit timezone _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 386 Appendices XSLT Engine Information When two date time or dateTime values need to be compared the timezone of the values being compared need to be known When the timezone is not explicitly given in such a value the implicit timezone is used The implicit timezone is taken from the system clock and its value can be checked with the fn implicit timezone function Collations Only the Unicode codepoint collation is supported No other collations can be used String comparisons including for the n max and fn min functions are based on this collation Namespace axis The namespace axis is deprecated in XPath 2 0 Use of the namespace axis is however supported To access namespace information with XPath 2 0 mechanisms use the fn in scope prefixes fn namespace uri and fn namespace uri for prefix functions Static typing extensions The optional static type checking feature is not supported Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Alt
34. represented in the design by a specific symbol These symbols are listed below and are organized into the following groups Nodes in the XML document XML document content Data entry devices Predefined formats XPath objects URI objects Each of these component types can e be moved using drag and drop e be cut copied pasted and deleted using i the commands in the View menu or ii the standard Windows shortcuts for these commands e have formatting applied to it e have a context menu pop up when right clicked Nodes in the XML document Element and attribute nodes in the XML document are represented in the SPS design document by tags Each node has a start tag and end tag Double clicking either the start or end tag collapses that node When a node is collapsed all its contents are hidden Double clicking a collapsed node expands it and displays its content The following types of node are represented e Document node The document node indicated with sxmL represents the XML document as a whole It is indicated with a green xm tag when the schema source is associated with an XML document and with spB when the schema source is associated with a DB The document node in the screenshot at left is expanded and contains the orgChart element which is collapsed The document node in the screenshot at right is collapsed its contents are hidden e Element node An element node is inserted together with all its ancesto
35. that window Additionally all currently open document windows are listed in this menu by document name with the active window being checked To make another window active click the name of the window you wish to make active Windows dialog At the bottom of the list of open windows is an entry for the Windows dialog Clicking this entry opens the Windows dialog which displays a list of all open windows and provides commands that can be applied to the selected window s A window is selected by clicking on its name Warning To exit the Windows dialog click OK do not click the Close Window s button The Close Window s button closes the window s currently selected in the Windows dialog Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Reference Help Menu 371 11 12 Help Menu The Help menu contains commands to access the onscreen help manual for StyleVision commands to provide information about StyleVision and links to support pages on the Altova web site The Help menu also contains the Registration dialog which lets you enter your license key code once you have purchased the product The description of the Help menu commands is organized into the following sub sections e Table of Contents Index Search e Registration Order Form e Other Commands _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 372 Reference Help Menu Table of Contents Index Search The Table of Contents command opens the onscr
36. using either the icons in the toolbar and or items in the context menu Add The Add icon adds a new external stylesheet entry to the External tree or a new global style entry to the Global tree respectively according to whether the External or Global tree was selected The new entry is appended to the list of already existing entries in the tree The Add command is also available in the context menu For more details about using external stylesheets and global styles see Working with CSS Styles Insert The Insert icon inserts a new external stylesheet entry above the selected external stylesheet in the External tree or a new global style entry above the selected global style in the Global tree The Insert command is also available in the context menu For more details about using external stylesheets and global styles see Working with CSS Styles Move Up Down The Move Up icon la and Move Down icon V move the selected external stylesheet or global style respectively up and down relative to the other entries in its tree These commands are useful for changing the priority of external stylesheets relative to each other and of global style rules relative to each other The Move Up and Move Down commands are also available in the context menu For more details about how to change the precedence of styles see Working with CSS Styles Views of global style properties The properties of a global style can be displayed in one of three views
37. 144 Elements entry helper in Authentic View 251 Encoding for output files 369 Encoding command 307 Encoding of output documents 307 End User License Agreement 405 409 _ 2006 Altova GmbH Index 423 Engine information 377 Enter key effects of using 279 Entities declaring notations of unparsed 236 declaring unparsed 236 defining in Authentic View 276 286 352 referencing unparsed 237 unparsed 235 using as URI holders 235 using unparsed in SPS 237 Entities entry helper in Authentic View 251 Entry helpers in Design View switching display on and off 318 Evaluation key for your Altova software 373 Evaluation period of Altova s software products 405 406 408 Event handlers assigning functions to 242 Exit command 309 Expressions in DB Filter criteria 115 F FAQs on StyleVision 374 Features of StyleVision 13 File menu 300 command Exit 309 File Close 302 File Encoding 307 File New 301 File Open 302 File Print 308 File Print Preview 308 File Save Authentic XML Data 304 File Save Design 303 File Save Generated Files 305 Files open recently used 309 Filters for DB clearing 314 editing 314 Find command 312 Find Next command 312 Floating fn fn fn fn fn fn fn fn fn fn fn fn fn fn fn fn fn fn fn fn fn fn fn fn fn Design Entry Helper Windows 27 ba
38. 3 The DB Schema and DB XML files 0 e eee ccceseeseeeneeeneeeseeeeeeeeaeeneenseens 112 6 3 4 DB Filters Filtering DB Data ceceecceccecseeeneeeneeeeeeeseeceeenaecnseenseenseens 115 6 3 5 SPS Design Features for DB 0 ccc eeceecceesceeceseeeseeeeeeseeeseecaeeneecnseeeeenaeens 120 6 3 6 Generating Output Files ec ccecceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeseesseeeseeeseecseeeseeeeseceeeeaeees 123 HTME Tim port sceceiehaiscissegsadedadieceds hig Seeded adden dedides e ds degeeagebtdle T fades 125 6 4 1 Creating New SPS via HTML Import 000 ee eee eeeeeeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeenees 126 6 4 2 Creating the Schema and SPS Design cceccccsseeseeseeseeeseeeeeeseeeeeeaeens 128 6 4 3 Creating Tables and Lists as Elements Attributes 000 00 ee eeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 130 6 4 4 Generating Output cess ccccccccdie ce sccelecertegeretaadedecesisivertesde dete sasdves totdedenteaseeesveee 132 Command Line Interface StyleVisionBatch ccccccccsccessceesceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeessees 133 6 5 1 StyleVisionBatch Syntax cc ccccseccessceeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeceecsaeeneeeeseeeseeeseees 134 6 5 2 StyleVisionBatch Examples ccccceescseseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeceecseeeseeenseeeeeeaeees 137 Content Editing Procedures 140 Inserting XML Content as Tektsaisisisiismii diisi nia asiani ai 141 7 1 1 Inserting Content with a Predefined Format 0 ecceceseeceseeeeeeeeeteeneeenees 143 7 1 2 Adding Elements in Authentic View ccccccccsceesees
39. 339 SPS and Authentic View 11 and DBs 102 and StyleVision 11 and XSLT stylesheets 11 closing 302 general description of 11 opening 302 setting up for DBs 105 SPS and Authentic View 89 SPS design structure of 92 SPS design overview 88 SPS tables 159 editing dynamic tables 247 SPS tables in Authentic View usage of 258 SPSs assigning Template XML 347 inserting XML tables 345 Static SPS tables in Authentic View usage of 258 Static content in Quick Start tutorial 56 Static lists 156 157 Static table inserting 335 inserting in SPS 290 toolbar buttons for editing 290 Static tables 159 162 see also Tables 166 Static text in Quick Start tutorial 56 Status bar 317 Style Repository and external CSS stylesheets 200 and global styles 203 entry helper window 36 see also Design Entry Helpers 27 Styles _ 2006 Altova GmbH Index 429 Styles and property groups 43 assigning CSS stylesheets to SPS 200 cascading order 199 defining 43 defining global styles in SPS 203 defining local styles 206 entry helper window 43 inline and block styling 210 media for assigned external stylesheets 200 precedence of 36 precedence of styles 203 see also Design Entry Helpers 27 selecting components to style locally 207 terminology of 199 working with in StyleVision 199 Stylesheets also see under CSS stylesheets 200 also see under XSLT stylesheets 200 StyleVision introduction
40. 7 6 Bookmarks and Hyperlinks In the SPS document bookmarks can be inserted anywhere within the design These bookmarks are transformed into anchors in the output which can be linked to from hyperlinks Hyperlinks can not only link to bookmarks but also to external resources like Web pages StyleVision offers considerable flexibility in the way target URIs for hyperlinks can be built In this section we describe e How bookmarks can be inserted in the SPS e How hyperlinks can be inserted in the SPS and how they link to the pages required _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 178 Content Editing Procedures Bookmarks and Hyperlinks Inserting Bookmarks A static bookmark or anchor can be inserted anywhere in the SPS at a cursor insertion point or around an SPS component A bookmark is created for a single fixed location in the SPS If created around an element that repeats the bookmark is effectively created around the first occurrence of that element and hyperlinks that reference this bookmark will link to the first occurrence of the bookmarked element Creating a bookmark To insert a bookmark do the following 1 Place the cursor at the location where you wish to create the bookmark 2 Select the menu command Insert Bookmark or right click and select Insert Bookmark 3 Inthe Insert Bookmark dialog screenshot below enter a name for the bookmark in the Name field The name of the bookmark is a st
41. Address C Program Files Altova tyleVision2006 E xamples T utorials Newsltems bmp Use above field to enter IV Absolute Path a simple static Address 3 Inthe Static tab click the Absolute Path then browse for the file NewsItems BMP and select it 4 Click OK to finish Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Quick Start Tutorial Inserting Static Content 57 The HTML preview will look something like this Summary of News Items NanoNull Inc Launches Version 2 0 of NanoPower 2006 04 01BostonUSA Nanonull Inc today launched version 2 0 of its market leading NanoPower line of hardware and software The highlights of the new version of NanoPower are improved chip design capabilities in NanoSoft the software used to design computer chips and higher precision sand filtering processes in NanoMeld the hardware in which the transformation from sand to silicon chips is executed NewTech Online Inserting horizontal lines The first horizontal line you will insert is between the document header and document body Do this as follows 1 Place the cursor immediately after the recently inserted static image 2 Right click and select Insert Horizontal Line A horizontal line is inserted Set properties for the line as follows 1 With the line selected in Design View in the Properties entry helper select the line component in the Properties For column and then the HTML group of properties 2 Assi
42. After an entity has been defined it can be inserted in the XML document by right clicking at the location where you wish to insert the entity and from the context menu that pops up selecting Insert Entity and then the name of the entity to be inserted An entity that you define with this command can be any of three types e Internal parsed entity The value of the entity is a text string that usually occurs frequently in the document Using an entity ensures that all occurrences are expanded to the value defined here e External parsed entity This is an external XML file that will replace each occurrence of the entity The value of the entity is the URI of the external XML file e External unparsed entity This is an external resource that will be called when the entity is processed The value of the entity is the URI of the external resource Clicking the command pops up the Define Entities dialog shown below OK Internal Nanonull Inc BA Internal Nanonull Europe 4G a Cancel Internal Nanonull Partners Inc Internal http www nanonull com Append SYSTEM v branches xml re ectcheetcdicichitte Insert Delete For a description of how to use this dialog see Define Entities in the Authentic View documentation Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Reference Authentic Menu 353 Validate XML The Validate XML F8 command checks the validity of the XML file against the associated schema
43. Assigning Functions as Event Handlers In the StyleVision GUI you can assign JavaScript functions as event handlers for events that occur on the HTML renditions of SPS components These event handlers will be used in the HTML output The event handler for an available event such as onclick is set by assigning a global function as the event handler In the Properties Entry Helper global functions defined in the JavaScript Editor are available as event handlers in the dropdown boxes of each event in the Events property group for the selected component screenshot below Authentic onclick common ondbiclick event onkeydown HTML onkeypressed onkeyup onmousedown onmousemove onmouseout onmouseover onmouseup Tia To assign a function to an event handler do the following 1 Select the component in the SPS for which the event handler is to be defined The component can be a node or content of any kind dynamic or static 2 Inthe Properties Entry Helper select the Event group This results in the available events being displayed in the Attribute column screenshot above 3 Inthe Value column of the required event click the down arrow of the combo box This drops down a list of all the functions defined in the JavaScript Editor 4 From the dropdown list select the required function as the event handler for that event Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Chapter 10 Authentic View 244 Authentic View
44. Base year in input formatting 219 Batch files for generating files from SPS via command line 133 Block styles 210 Bookmarks 177 command for inserting in design 328 creating and editing 178 deleting 178 Bookmarks anchors symbol in Design View 293 Borders of SPS tables 340 Bullets and numbering 156 157 158 355 command for inserting in design 322 Buttons 155 C CALS tables in SPSs 345 CALS HTML tables 167 Carriage return key see Enter key 279 Cell of table split horizontally 339 split vertically 339 Cells joining in SPS tables 338 Changing view to Authentic View 247 character entities in HTML output of XSLT transformation 378 Check boxes 153 Class attributes in Quick Start tutorial 61 Close SPS command 302 collations in XPath 2 0 385 Column append to SPS table 336 delete from table in SPS 337 insert in SPS table 336 Combo box in Quick Start tutorial 70 Combo boxes 151 Command line and parameters 233 examples of commands 137 syntax 134 using StyleVision from 133 Command line utility 18 Commands customizing 364 Companion software for download 374 Component download center at Altova web site 374 Condition command for inserting in design 332 Conditional templates 332 also see Conditions 189 symbol in Design View 293 Conditions and Auto Calculations 194 editing 193 in Quick Start tutorial 70 setting up 190 Connect
45. Calculations and can be displayed if certain conditions in the source document are fulfilled Different pieces of content can be placed at various and multiple locations in the SPS Also the SPS can contain various other components such as images hyperlinks and JavaScript functions Each component of the SPS can then be formatted for presentation as required The SPS and Authentic View When a finished SPS is associated with an XML document or DB that XML document or DB can be edited in Authentic View Authentic View is an ideal solution for enabling the distributed and graphical editing of an XML document Multiple users can edit an XML document in the graphical user interface presented by Authentic View In StyleVision as you design an SPS you can preview and test the SPS in the Authentic View tab for that SPS For a detailed description of how SPSs work with Authentic View see SPS and Authentic View The SPS and XSLT stylesheets After you have completed designing the SPS you can generate XSLT stylesheets based on the design you have created StyleVision supports both XSLT 1 0 and XSLT 2 0 and from a single SPS you can generate XSLT stylesheets for HTML RTF and XSL FO output Enterprise edition only in Professional Edition only HTML output is supported The generated XSLT stylesheets can be used in external transformations to transform XML documents based on the same schema as the SPS from which the XSLT stylesheet was generated F
46. Customize menu item screenshot below Bee 6S lime dd or Remove Buttons Table ustomize Save Authentic XML Data Validate XML Hide Markup Show Small Markup Show Large Markup Show Mixed Markup Append Row Insert Row Duplicate Row Move Row Up Move Row Down Delete Row Define DTD Entities KSIKS ESKS KSEI ESES KES EESE D 0 FOL TiO l A A x E Reset Toolbar 3 Place the cursor over the toolbar that contains the toolbar button to be added or removed screenshot above 4 Inthe menu that rolls out screenshot above click on the name of the toolbar button to add or remove from the toolbar Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Reference Toolbars 285 The Reset Toolbar item below the list of buttons in each toolbar menu see screenshot above resets the toolbar to the state it was in when you downloaded StyleVision In this state all buttons for that toolbar are displayed Note The buttons that a toolbar contains are preset and cannot be disassociated from that toolbar The process described above displays or hides the button in the toolbar that is displayed in the GUI _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 286 Reference Toolbars Authentic The Authentic toolbar contains commands for customizing Authentic View and editing XML documents in Authentic View These commands are shown in the screenshot below the menu
47. Filter A DB Filter determines what data from the selected database table is imported and displayed A DB Filter consists of one or more criteria When you specify criteria you use an expression which is a combination of operators or gt and values text or numbers Additionally criteria can be joined by the logical operators AND or OR The Clear DB Filter command Sel deletes the filter after asking for and receiving a confirmation from you Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Reference Properties Menu 357 Predefined Format Strings Any contents placeholder input field or Auto Calculation which is of a numeric date time dateTime Or duration datatype can be assigned a custom format with the Input Formatting dialog In the Input Formatting dialog you can either create a format directly or select from a drop down list of predefined formats This list consists of two types of predefined formats e supplied predefined formats delivered with StyleVision and e customized predefined formats that you define with the Predefined Format Strings command These customized formats are created for the currently open SPS file and not for the entire application After the customized formats have been defined the SPS File must be saved in order for the formats to be available when the file is next opened Creating a predefined format string A predefined format string is specific to a datatype To create a predefined
48. In your design to specify that the entire text contents of a news item should have Arial as its font click the div component surrounding the newsitem element and in the Styles entry helper in the Styles For column select 1 paragraph Then in the font group of properties assign Arial as the font family This property setting will be inherited by all five descendant predefined formats Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Quick Start Tutorial Formatting the Content 65 Now in the design select the three div components surrounding the dateline synopsis and source nodes by keeping the Shift key pressed as you click each div component In the Styles entry helper select 3 paragraphs then the font group of properties and set a font size Of 10pt The h3 component was not selected because it already has the required font size Of 12pt Finally in the design select the div component surrounding the dateline element In the Styles For column of the Styles entry helper select 1 paragraph In the font group of properties set font weight tO bold and font style to italic In the color group of properties set color to gray The output of the dateline will look like this 2006 04 01 Boston USA Notice that the styling defined for the div component has been applied to the static text within the div component as well that is to the colon and the comma Defining local styles for a single component A local styl
49. Manual 14 Introduction Product Features display the result This is useful when you wish to perform calculations on numbers for example sum the prices in an invoice manipulate strings for example change hyphens to slashes generate content etc The available manipulations are those that can be effected using XPath 1 0 or XPath 2 0 expressions e When data is edited in Authentic View the result of Auto Calculations can also be passed to a node in the source document This procedure is referred to as updating the XML node with the value of the Auto Calculation e Additional validation enables individual XML document nodes to be validated additionally to schema validation against an XPath expression defined for that node In this way Authentic View users can be alerted when the data they enter is invalid a customized error message for the node can indicate the problem e Images can be inserted in the design The URI for the image can be static entered in the SPS or dynamic taken from a node in the source document or a combination of both static and dynamic parts e Two types of lists can be created static and dynamic In a static list each list item is defined in the SPS In a dynamic list a node is created as a list item the values of all instances of that node are created as the items of the list e Static and dynamic links can be inserted in the design The target URI can be static entered in the SPS or dynamic ta
50. NULL value for some DBs and could result in an error message Deleting a record To delete a record 1 Place the cursor in the row representing the record to be deleted and click the a icon The record to be deleted is marked with a strikethrough The AltovaRowStatus is set as follows primary instances of the record are set to D secondary instances to d and records indirectly deleted to x Indirectly deleted records are fields in the deleted record _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 272 Authentic View Editing in Authentic View that are held in a separate table For example an Address table might be included in a Customer table If a Customer record were to be deleted then its corresponding Address record would be indirectly deleted If an Address record in the Customer table were deleted then the Address record in the Customer table would be primarily deleted but the same record would be secondarily deleted in an independent Address table if this were instantiated 2 Click File Save Authentic XML Data to save the modifications to the DB Please note Saving data to the DB resets the Undo command so you cannot undo actions that were carried out prior to the save Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Authentic View Editing in Authentic View 273 Working with Dates There are two ways in which dates can be edited in Authentic View e Dates are entered or modified using the Date Pi
51. Press New Shortcut Key input field and press the shortcut keys that are to activate the command The shortcut immediately appears in the Press New Shortcut Key input field If this shortcut has already been assigned to a command then that command is displayed below the input field For example in the screenshot above Ctrl C has already been assigned to the Copy command and cannot be assigned to the Open File command To clear the New Shortcut Key input field press any of the control keys Ctrl Alt or Shift 4 Click the Assign button to permanently assign the shortcut The shortcut now appears in the Current Keys text box To de assign or delete a shortcut 1 Select the command for which the shortcut is to be deleted 2 Click the shortcut you want to delete in the Current Keys list box 3 Click the Remove button which has now become active To reset all keyboard assignments 1 Click the Reset All button to go back to the original installation time shortcuts A dialog box appears prompting you to confirm whether you want to reset all keyboard assignments 2 Click Yes if you want to reset all keyboard assignments Set accelerator for Currently no function is available Menu The Menu tab allows you to customize the main menu bar as well as the context menus right click menus Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Reference Tools Menu 367 xi Commands Toolbars Keyboard Menu Options
52. Query Save Authentic XML Generated XML Schema Design Document Output Previews Editable temp XML file generated from DB Note The XML Schema and XML files are generated from the DB by StyleVision and you cannot alter their structure or content for use in Authentic View This is because the structure of these files is related to the structure of the DB Editing the DB and creating reports from the DB depend on the unique XML structure generated by StyleVision from the DB _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 104 High Level Procedures Working with Databases Broad mechanism for working with DB based SPSs Given below are the steps involved in creating and using DB based SPSs These steps cover the two uses of DB based StyleVision Power Stylesheets editing the DB and creating HTML reports from the DB Connect to the database with StyleVision During the connection process you can specify what data tables in the DB should be filtered out from the XML Schema When the connection is made a temporary XML Schema is generated based on the structure of the DB and that schema is displayed in the Schema Window of StyleVision in tree form Temporary StyleVision internal XML files are also created One is non editable see screenshot above and is used for the previews and as the source of the generated XML data file The other is an editable XML file which is displayed in Authentic View see scre
53. Repository Context Properties Context Styles e Right click any toolbar area to display a context menu screenshot below that allows you to toggle the display of individual toolbars on and off _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 284 Reference Toolbars Authentic Formatting Standard Toolbar e Inthe Toolbars tab of the Customize dialog Tools Customize toggle the display of individual toolbars on or off by clicking a toolbar s check box When done click the Close button to close the dialog Adding and removing toolbar buttons Individual toolbar buttons can be added to or removed from a toolbar that is they can be made visible or be hidden To add or remove a button from a toolbar do the following 1 Inthe toolbar where the button to be added or removed is click the More Buttons button if the toolbar is in a toolbar area or the Toolbar Options button if the toolbar is a floating toolbar The More Buttons button is an arrowhead located at the right hand side of the toolbar in horizontal toolbar areas or at the bottom of the toolbar in vertical toolbar areas The Toolbar Options button is an arrowhead located at the right hand side of the floating toolbar 2 Inthe Add or Remove Buttons menu that pops up place the cursor over the Add or Remove Buttons menu item screenshot below This rolls out a menu which contains the names of the toolbars in that toolbar area as its menu items plus the
54. Save Authentic XML Data command saves these modifications to the Working XML File or DB Alternatively to editing the XML file in StyleVision you can edit an XML document or DB in the Authentic View of Altova XMLSpy or Altova Authentic Desktop Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Reference File Menu 305 Save Generated Files The Save Generated Files command pops up a submenu which contains options for saving the following files screenshot below For perspective on how the generated files fit into the genaeral usage procedure see Usage Procedure Generated Files Save Generated XSLT HTML File Save Generated HTML File Save Generated DB Schema Save Generated DB XML Data ve Generated User Defined Schema Save Generated User Defined XML Data Save Generated XSLT HTML File The Save Generated XSLT HTML File command generates an XSLT file for HTML output from your SPS You can use this XSLT file subsequently to transform an XML document to HTML Save Generated HTML File The Save Generated HTML File command generates an HTML file This operation requires two input files e The Working XML File assigned to the currently active SPS file If no Working XML File has been assigned the Save Generated HTML File command is disabled For DB based SPSs the automatically generated non editable XML file is the Working XML File see The DB Schema and DB XML files you do not assign a Work
55. Schema Sources Design Tree Style Repository Context Properties Context Styles Status Bar Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Reference View Menu 317 Toolbars and Status Bar Placing the cursor over the Toolbars item pops out a submenu screenshot below which enables you to turn on and off the display of the different toolbars and to access the Customize dialog v Table v Authentic Formatting Standard Toolbar When a toolbar is checked it is displayed In the screenshot above all the toolbars are displayed To toggle on or off the display of a toolbar click the appropriate toolbar Status Bar The display of the Status Bar which is located at the bottom of the application window can be switched on or off by clicking the Status Bar toggle command _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 318 Reference View Menu Design Entry Helpers The View menu contains toggle commands to switch the display of each of the Entry Helpers in Design View on and off screenshot below Schema Sources Design Tree Style Repository Context Properties Context Styles When an Entry Helper is checked it is displayed in Design View Click an Entry Helper to set its display on or off as required This command is also used to make a hidden Entry Helper visible again Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Reference Insert Menu 319 11 6 Insert Menu The
56. Schema icon in the toolbar This pops up a menu screenshot below that enables you to add i an XML Schema or DTD ii a schema generated by StyleVision from a DB or iii a user defined schema 6 18 B elle Add XML Schema DTD X Add DB Schema Add User defined Schema The Working XML File and Template XML File When a schema is added it is listed under the Schema Sources item Each schema has two important sub items within the XML item in order e The Working XML File Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH User Interface Design Entry Helpers 31 e The Template XML Eile To select or change the Working XML File or Template XML File click the and buttons respectively and browse for the required file Root elements For each schema there is a Root elements aka document elements list This list consists of all the root elements you select for the schema see below for how to do this Each root element can be expanded to show its content model tree It is from the nodes in these root element trees that the content of the main template is created Note that the entry point of the main template is the document node of the main schema which you can select or change at any time see below for how to do this To select the root elements for a schema do the following Click the Select L button at the right of the Root elements item This pops up the Select Root Elements dialog screenshot
57. Tables Table Sg Categories Sg Employees ie Cancel 4 Select the database owner if any This causes a list of data table belonging to that owner to be displayed in the Database Tables pane 5 Inthe Database Tables pane select the DB tables that you wish to include in the schema These tables are displayed in the Selected Tables pane 6 Click Start An XML Schema is created with the selected tables as children of the document element DB The schema is displayed in the Schema Sources entry helper The Global Templates list also contains the selected DB tables You can now start designing the SPS A temporary XML File is created each time output preview tab is clicked The XML file is structured according to the generated XML Schema and contains data from the selected DB tables _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 98 High Level Procedures Creating the SPS Structure User Defined Schemas You can quickly create a user defined schema in the Schema Sources entry helper This is useful if you have an XML document that is not based on any schema and you wish to create an SPS for this XML document To add and create a user defined schema in the Schema Sources entry helper do the following 1 Click File New New empty In the Schema Sources entry helper click the dropdown arrow of the Add Schema icon and select Add User Defined Schema screenshot below Schema Sources x
58. Tables Table C views vi Bg Addresses Bg Articles _ Bg Customers Select All l Deselect All Selected Tables Table Eis Addresses Eis Articles l To select DB tables do the following Cancel 1 Inthe DB Owners pane check the owners if any for which you want DB tables displayed in the DB Tables pane 2 Inthe DB Tables pane select the tables you wish to use in the SPS The selected tables are shown in the Selected Tables pane Note that some tables contain other tables If the contained tables are not selected they will not be created in the generated XML Schema 3 Click Start to generate and load the XML Schema An XML Schema with a structure corresponding to that of the DB with the selected tables is displayed in the Schema Window Schema Sources 9 etit cgl Schema sources HG DB1 EZ Root elements E DB E gt Addresses E Articles E T All Global Elements Addresses iE Articles DB LB EI Note that all the selected DB tables are created in the XML Schema as children of the Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH High Level Procedures Working with Databases 111 DB document element and as items in the Global Templates list For a complete description of the structure of the generated XML schema see The DB Schema and DB XML files After you have connected to the DB and gen
59. These commands apply only to dynamic SPS tables They should not be used inside static SPS tables DB Row Navigation icons ta T fh The arrow icons are from left to right Go to First Record in the DB Go to Previous Record Open Go to Record dialog Go to Next Record and Go to Last Record _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 248 Authentic View Interface e This icon opens the Edit Database Query dialog in which you can enter a query Authentic View displays the queried record s Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Authentic View Interface 249 Authentic View main window There are four viewing modes in Authentic View Large Markup Small Markup Mixed Markup and Hide All Markup These modes enable you to view the document with varying levels of markup information In Authentic Preview of StyleVision only two markup modes are available Hide Markup and Show Large Full Markup To switch between modes use the commands in the Authentic menu or the icons in the toolbar see the previous section Authentic View toolbar icons Large markup This shows the start and end tags of elements and attributes with the element attribute names in the tags Enter the department The element Name in the figure above is expanded i e the start and end tags as well as the content of the element are shown An element attribute can be contracted by double clicking either its start or end tag
60. This gives the block the inherent styles of the HTML s p element The HTML preview should now look something like this _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 66 Quick Start Tutorial Formatting the Content NanoNull Inc Launches Version 2 0 of NanoPower 2006 04 01 Boston USA Nanonull Inc today launched version 2 0 of its market leading NanoPower line of hardware and software The highlights of the new version of NanoPower are improved chip design capabilities in NanoSoft the software used to design computer chips and higher precision sand filtering processes in NanoMeld the hardware in which the transformation from sand to silicon chips is executed Source NewTech Online After you are done save the file Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Quick Start Tutorial Using Auto Calculations 67 5 5 Using Auto Calculations Auto Calculations are a powerful mechanism for providing additional information from the available XML data In this section you will add two pieces of information to the design the total number of news items and the time period covered by the news items in the XML document Neither piece of information is directly available in the XML document but has to be calculated or manipulated from the available data Counting the news item nodes In the design do the following 1 Create space as shown in the screenshot below for a line of static text on which the Auto Cal
61. User License Agreement Software License Agreement is a legal document between you and Altova GmbH Altova It is important that you read this document before using the Altova provided software Software and any accompanying documentation including without limitation printed materials online files or electronic documentation Documentation By clicking the I accept and Next buttons below or by installing or otherwise using the Software you agree to be bound by the terms of this Software License Agreement as well as the Altova Privacy Policy Privacy Policy including without limitation the warranty disclaimers limitation of liability data use and termination provisions below whether or not you decide to purchase the Software You agree that this agreement is enforceable like any written agreement negotiated and signed by you If you do not agree you are not licensed to use the Software and you must destroy any downloaded copies of the Software in your possession or control Please go to our Web site at http www altova com eula to download and print a copy of this Software License Agreement for your files and http www altova com privacy to review the privacy policy 1 SOFTWARE LICENSE a License Grant Upon your acceptance of this Software License Agreement Altova grants you a non exclusive non transferable except as provided below limited license to install and use a copy of the Software on your compatible co
62. XML Content as Text 145 Ambiguous content model For Authentic View to correctly and efficiently display elements correctly while an XML document is being edited the SPS must adhere to the following rules e Child elements will be displayed in the order in which they are laid out in the design e In order for Authentic View to disambiguate among sibling child elements all child elements should be laid out in the design document in the required order and within a single parent node If the sibling relationship is to be maintained in Authentic View it is incorrect usage to lay out each child element of a single parent inside multiple instances of the parent node These two rules are illustrated with the following example We consider a content model of an element parent which consists of a single sequence of mandatory child elements This content model is similar to the unambiguous content model discussed above with one difference the single sequence is optional which makes the content model ambiguous because the presence of the sequence is not a certainty If you create a design document as shown in the screenshot below there will be ambiguity in Authentic View parent el e2 e3 The Authentic View of the parent element will look like this since the sequence is optional Parent add Clicking add pops up a menu of the three child elements If you select one of these elements it will
63. XML generated from the DB will be appropriately filtered using parameter values you specify at the command line Each parameter declaration on the command line must be prefixed with a and if multiple parameters are used they must be separated from each other with a space If the value of the parameter contains a space then the value must be enclosed in double quotes No default output is specified so you must specify the required output For example OutHTML Test html If you specify only the output file no XML file or XSLT file the Working XML File or DB specified in the SPS is used for the source XML and the required XSLT is generated from the SPS Any temporary files that are created are deleted at the end of the processing _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 136 High Level Procedures Command Line Interface StyleVisionBatch The verbose option provides a detailed report of all steps carried out during the processing of the command When specifying HTML output make sure that the generated file is placed in a location in which relative paths to images etc will point correctly to their targets The same applies to hyperlinks Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH High Level Procedures Command Line Interface StyleVisionBatch 137 StyleVisionBatch Examples The examples below are organized according to output XSLT stylesheets XSLT stylesheets can be generated from the SPS files
64. _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 48 Quick Start Tutorial Creating and Setting Up a New SPS THE Schema sources fl XML1 C Program Files Altova StyleVision2006 Examples Tutorials QuickStart xsd ane MIL E Z Root elements presswatch E T All Global Elements You should note the following points about the Schema Sources tree i The schema is identified by the parameter sxmi1 and the parameter s value is the URI of the document node of the Working XML Eile for this schema source ii The XML entry HL directly under the name of the schema when expanded contains two entries T the first El to select the Working XML File the second H5 to select the Template XML File iii The Root Elements tree lists the root elements document elements you select from among the global elements defined in the schema The element presswatch is selected by default because it is the one global element in the schema that lies clearly at the top of the hierarchy defined in the schema iv All global elements in the schema are listed in the All Global Elements tree Selecting the XSLT version For this SPS you will use XSLT 2 0 To specify the XSLT version in the toolbar click the icon Assigning the Working XML File Assigning a Working XML File to the SPS provides the SPS with a source of XML data to process To assign a Working XML File click the Add Working XML button El directly under the name o
65. a distribution method that provides the following unique benefits e You can evaluate the software free of charge before making a purchasing decision e Once you decide to buy the software you can place your order online at the Altova website and immediately get a fully licensed product within minutes e When you place an online order you always get the latest version of our software e The product package includes a comprehensive integrated onscreen help system The latest version of the user manual is available at www altova com i in HTML format for online browsing and ii in PDF format for download and to print if you prefer to have the documentation on paper 30 day evaluation period After downloading this product you can evaluate it for a period of up to 30 days free of charge About 20 days into this evaluation period the software will start to remind you that it has not yet been licensed The reminder message will be displayed once each time you start the application If you would like to continue using the program after the 30 day evaluation period you have to purchase an End User License Agreement which is delivered in the form of a key code that you enter into the Registration dialog to unlock the product You can purchase your license at the online shop at the Altova website Distributing the product If you wish to share the product with others please make sure that you distribute only the installation program which is
66. a specific way and apply templates to its siblings It is important to apply templates to siblings in order to avoid the possibility that the siblings are not processed This enables you to reach elements lower down in the document hierarchy The rest of contents placeholder can be deleted by selecting it and pressing the Delete key on the keyboard _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 326 Reference Insert Menu Date Picker The Date Picker command inserts a Date Picker at the current cursor position It will be enabled only when the cursor is within an xs date Or xs dateTime node and if the element has been created as contents or an input field Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Reference Insert Menu 327 Page With the Page command you can insert for paged media output a page break These insertions are possible only at cursor insertion points Page Break Click Page Break to define a page break at the cursor insertion point The page break is displayed as a dashed line across the whole of the Design window In HTML output while the page break has no effect in the browser view a page break will be inserted when the browser view of the HTML file is printed out Deleting Page Breaks To delete page breaks select the placeholder and click Delete _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 328 Reference Insert Menu Bookmark The Bookmark command allows you to i
67. and Setting Up a New SPS 47 5 1 Creating and Setting Up a New SPS In this section you will learn How to create a new SPS document How to add a schema source for the SPS How to select the XSLT version of the SPS How to assign the Working XML File How to specify the output encoding How to save the SPS document Creating a new SPS document Create a new SPS document by clicking File New New Empty or select New Empty 3 v in the dropdown list of the New icon in the application toolbar A new document titled SPS1 sps is created and displayed in Design View screenshot below Schema Sources gt ax a 0B El 8 Main template Schema sources T All Global Elements Pe Design v Authentic Preview HTML In Design View an empty main template is displayed In the Schema Sources entry helper there are no schema entries Adding a schema source For this SPS you will use the schema QuickStart xsd To add this schema as the schema source do the following 1 Inthe Schema Sources entry helper click the dropdown button of the Add Schema icon screenshot below and select Add XML Schema DTD CERCA PEE Add XML Schema DTD l Add DB Schema Add User defined Schema 2 Inthe Open dialog that pops up browse for the file styleVision2006 Examples Tutorials QuickStart xsd and click Open The schema will be added to the Schema Sources tree screenshot below
68. are two types of button radio buttons and buttons Radio buttons allow the Authentic View user to enter data into the XML file Buttons do not allow data entry in Authentic View but are useful for triggering events in the HTML output Radio buttons Inserting radio buttons in the SPS allows you to give the user a choice among multiple alternatives Each radio button you insert maps to one XML value The way to use this feature is to create the node for which the data entry is required multiple times as a radio button For each radio button enter i some static text to indicate its value to the user and ii a different XML value The radio buttons for a node are mutually exclusive only one may be selected at a time and the associated XML value is entered as the value of the node Buttons The button option allows you to insert a button and specify the text on the button This is useful if you wish to associate scripts with button events in the generated HTML output Note however that a button does not map to any XML value and does not allow data entry in Authentic View Note You can modify the HTML properties of a check box by selecting it and then modifying its HTML properties in the Properties entry helper _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 156 Content Editing Procedures Creating Lists 7 3 Creating Lists There are two types of lists that can be created in the SPS Static lists which are lists the content
69. as the Software is being used on the primary computer Key Codes Upgrades and Updates Prior to your purchase and as part of the registration for the thirty 30 day evaluation period as applicable you will receive an evaluation key code You will receive a purchase key code when you elect to purchase the Software The purchase key code will enable you to activate the Software beyond the initial evaluation period You may not re license reproduce or distribute any key code except with the express written permission of Altova If the Software that you have licensed is an upgrade or an update then the update replaces all or part of the Software previously licensed The update or upgrade and the associated license keys does not constitute the granting of a second license to the Software in that you may not use the upgrade or update in addition to the Software that it is replacing You agree that use of the upgrade of update terminates your license to use the Software or portion thereof replaced 2 Title Title to the Software is not transferred to you Ownership of all copies of the Software and of copies made by you is vested in Altova subject to the rights of use granted to you in this Software License Agreement As between you and Altova documents files stylesheets generated program code including the Unrestricted Source Code and schemas that are authored or created by you via your utilization of the Software in accordance with its Do
70. be inserted screenshot below but since Authentic View cannot disambiguate the sequence it does not insert any of the remaining two elements nor does it offer you the opportunity of inserting them parent ED FirstKel Paren The correct way to design this content model following the rules given above would be to explicitly create the required nodes in the desired order within the single parent node The design document would look like this _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 146 Content Editing Procedures Inserting XML Content as Text gt parent gt 1 gt contents lt e1 ED contents ED contents 3 lt parent 7 Note that all three child elements are placed inside a single parent node The design shown above would produce the following Authentic View The Authentic View user clicks the respective add element prompt to insert the element and its content Note e Ifan element can occur multiple times and if the rules above are followed then the element appears in the Entry Helper till the number of occurrences in Authentic View equals the maximum number of occurrences allowed by the schema maxOccurs e Creating each child element inside a separate parent node see screenshot below not only creates isolated child parent relationships for each child element so instantiated it also increases processing time because the parent node has to be re traversed in order to locate each child e
71. below in which you can select which of the global elements in the schema is are to be the root elements See SPS Structure Schema Sources for an explanation of the possibilities offered by a selection of multiple root elements Select Root Elements Please select the active root elements Department OrgChart x Conce A Additionally all the global elements in the schema are listed under the All Global Elements item For each global element a global template can be created Toolbar and schema tree icons The following toolbar icons are shortcuts for common Schema Sources entry helper commands Adds a schema from a file or a DB or adds a user defined schema The option is selected from a dropdown list d In a user defined schema adds a child element to the document element or appends a sibling element to the selected element Alternative levels are available by clicking the dropdown arrow of the icon m In a user defined schema adds an attribute to the document element or appends an attribute at the same level to the selected node Alternative levels are available by clicking the dropdown arrow of the icon ia Make Remove Global Template enabled when a global element is selected E _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 32 User Interface Design Entry Helpers Synchronize tree toggle When toggled on icon has border selecting a node in the tree selec
72. click the image placeholder in Design View and select Image Properties from the context menu This pops up the Edit Image dialog which is the same as the Insert Image dialog screenshot above and in which you can make the required modifications Deleting images To delete an image select the image and press the Delete key _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 174 Content Editing Procedures Using Graphics Text State Icons A Text State Icon is a toolbar icon in Authentic View which can be used to mark up text that is inside an element of mixed content The markup that is added is that for descendant elements of the mixed content element When the markup is added the newly marked up element in Authentic View takes the formatting assigned to the global template of that element Prerequisites for creating a text state icon The following prerequisites apply e A text state icon can be created only for an element that is a child of an element of mixed content e The element for which a text state icon is to be created must be declared in the XML Schema as a global element In a DTD all elements are global elements Text state icons are most commonly used to mark up bold and italic text in paragraphs The XML Schema declarations for such a document structure typically would be something like this lt xs element name bold type TextType gt lt xs element name italic type TextType gt lt xs complexType nam
73. created as a list from the Schema Sources entry helper and drop it at the desired location in the design 2 From the context menu that pops up select Create Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog screenshot below pops up Bullets and Numbering S x Plain Bullets Numbering 3 Select the required list type and click OK The dynamic list is created Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Content Editing Procedures Working with Tables 159 7 4 Working with Tables In an SPS two types of tables are used SPS tables and XML tables There are crucial differences between the two types and it is important to understand these This section contains a detailed description of SPS tables and XML tables and instructions about how to use them For now we look at the broad picture The illustration below shows the relationship of SPS tables and XML tables to the SPS and to the XML document Authentic View XML Document XML Tables 5 k aolha ON OFF Can be inserted as XML i elements by user of l Authentic View STYLEVISION Power STYLEVISION Stylesheet for XML document Power Stylesheet SPS Table Generate XSLT OOo from SPS XSLT for XSL FO XSLT for HTML a ee SPS tables An SPS table is a component of an SPS and is created and formatted using StyleVision If present in an SPS an SPS table appears in Authentic View as well as in the X
74. current cursor position with the cell below The tags of both cells remain in the new cell the column headers remain unchanged _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 264 Authentic View Editing in Authentic View Join cell above join 5 The Join cell above command joins the current cell current cursor position with the cell above The tags of both cells remain in the new cell the column headers remain unchanged Split cell horizontally JE SPLIT The Split cell Horizontally command creates a new cell to the right of the currently active cell The size of both cells is now the same as the original cell Split cell vertically za a The Split cell Vertically command creates a new cell below the currently active cell Align top This command aligns the cell contents to the top of the cell Center vertically E Align bottom This command centers the cell contents This command aligns the cell contents to the bottom of the cell Table properties The Table properties command opens the Table Properties dialog box This icon is only made active for HTML tables it cannot be clicked for CALS tables Table Properties x Table Row Column Cell Cancel border collapse cellpadding cellspacing frame height page break after page break before rules table layout Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Authentic View Editing in Authentic View 265
75. data in that component _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 218 Additional Editing Procedures Additional Validation 5 Enter an error message to display when the data is invalid 6 Click OK to finish Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Additional Editing Procedures Input Formatting Formatting Numeric Datatypes 219 9 3 Input Formatting Formatting Numeric Datatypes Input Formatting enables the contents of numeric XML Schema datatype nodes see list below to be displayed in a format other than the lexical representation of that datatype The Input Formatting is displayed in Authentic View and depending on the formatting definition may also be available for display in the HTML output Input Formatting can also be used to format the result of an Auto Calculation if the result of the Auto Calculation is in the lexical format of one of the numeric datatypes see list below for which Input Formatting is available In the sub sections of this section we describe Note how the Input Formatting mechanism works and the syntax for defining the input formatting Input Formatting does not change the format in which the data is stored in the XML document In the valid XML document the data is always stored in the lexical format appropriate to the datatype of the node Input Formatting is applied to the display in Authentic View and optionally if available to the display in the output
76. executed NewTech Online Notice that in the output of the dateline element the contents of the date element and place city and place country attributes are run together without spacing You can add the spacing as static text In the design place the cursor after the date element and enter a colon and a space Next enter a comma and space after the city attribute screenshot below EHS content Gee Babe gt WEA content Baty GeouTky gt content E This part of the output will now look like this Summary of News Items NanoNull Inc Launches Version 2 0 of NanoPower 2006 04 01 Boston US A Notice the colon spacing and comma in the dateline output All of these text items are static text items that were inserted directly in the design You will now add one more item of static text In the design type in the string Source just before the start tag of the source element screenshot below Bap content EEE Source Source gt content lt source Formatting static text To format static text highlight the text to be formatted and specify local style properties In the design highlight the text Source that you just typed In the Styles entry helper screenshot below notice that the 7 text component is selected Now select the font group of properties and for the font style property screenshot below select the italic option from the dropdown menu Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 A
77. for the combo box do the following 1 Select the method with which you wish to define the entries and values by clicking the appropriate radio button 2 If you select Schema Enumerations the enumerations are entered in automatically If you select Use List of Values you can insert append edit and delete any number of drop down list entries with their corresponding XML values If you wish to use values from the XML file select Use XPath Expression and enter or build an XPath expression to generate the desired sequence 3 Click OK to finish Note e Using XPath to select the items of the combo box drop down list enables you to create combo boxes with dynamic entries from the XML file itself e You can modify the HTML properties of a combo box by selecting it and then modifying its HTML properties in the Properties entry helper Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Content Editing Procedures Using Data Entry Devices 153 Check Boxes You can create a check box as a data entry device This enables you to constrain user input to one of two choices In the Edit Check Box dialog shown below you specify the XML values to map to the checked and unchecked events i 2 for Element n1 Name Cancel Unchecked value false In the above screenshot an element called Name has been created as a check box If the Authentic View user checks the check box a value of t rue will be entered as the value of the e
78. format string do the following 1 Click Properties Predefined Format Strings The following dialog appears Predefined Format Strings Predefined formats for date x e 2 Select a datatype from the drop down list in the combo box and then click the Append or Insert icon as required This pops up the Edit Format String dialog Edit Format String E x v Gk Format string is empty Cancel d Insert Field Field Options Go te Error If you click the down arrow of the combo box a drop down list with the supplied predefined formats for that datatype is displayed shown in the screenshot below _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 358 Reference Properties Menu Edit Format String E x Cancel You can either select a format from the list and modify it or you can enter a format directly into the input field The syntax for defining a format is explained in Input Formatting If you need help with the syntax use the Insert Field and Field Options buttons 3 After you have defined a format click OK The format string is added to the list of predefined formats for that datatype and it will appear as an option in the Input Formatting dialog of the current SPS file when the selected element is of the corresponding datatype Note You can add as many custom format strings for different datatypes as you want e The sequential order of format strings in the Predefined Format Str
79. formatting of 219 O ODBC conversion of datatypes in XML Schema generation from DB 394 Onscreen help index of 372 searching 372 table of contents 372 Open recently used files 309 Open SPS command 302 Oracle conversion of datatypes in XML Schema generation from DB 393 Ordering Altova software 373 OS for Altova products 398 Otherwise condition branch 190 Output encoding 307 Output files from DB based lt SV PS gt 123 generating 91 using command line to generate 133 Output Views description of 25 p Page commands for design 327 Page breaks 327 Page numbers Enterprise Edition 327 Paragraph command for inserting in design 321 Parameter defaults in DB Filters 115 Parameters and Authentic View 233 and command line 233 creating and editing 315 general description 233 in DB Filters 115 in DB queries 267 in SPS 233 overview of user defined parameters 33 Parser built into Altova products 399 Paste command 310 PDF output Enterprise edition 91 Platforms _ 2006 Altova GmbH Index 427 Platforms for Altova products 398 position function in XPath 1 0 378 position function in XPath 2 0 see fn position 385 Precedence of styles 36 Predefined format strings for input formatting 357 Predefined formats command for inserting in design 321 on inserting a node 143 symbol in Design View 293 Presentation also see Fo
80. generated using the File Save Generated Files command or via the command line Try generating XSLT stylesheets from MyQuickStart sps and then using these stylesheets to transform QuickStart xml _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual Chapter 6 High Level Procedures 84 High Level Procedures 6 High Level Procedures This section describes important high level procedures involved when using StyleVision These procedures are listed below and described in detail in the sub sections of this section e General Usage Procedure provides a broad overview of how to build an SPS It starts with the sources required by an SPS and goes on to explain how an SPS is used with Authentic View and to generate output e Creating the SPS Structure discusses the structure of an SPS and the factors affecting it e Working with Databases explains how an SPS can be used to edit databases and generate DB reports e Command Line Interface StyleVisionBatch describes how StyleVision can be used from the command line to generate files Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH High Level Procedures General Usage Procedure 85 6 1 General Usage Procedure Objectives SPS documents that you create in StyleVision can be used for two broad purposes e Tocontrol the display of XML source documents in Authentic View and to enable data to be entered in XML documents or DBs via the Authentic View interface e To generate XSLT st
81. i as first character in value signifies parameter State JCA City Los Angeles OR City San Diego OF l Append AND City San Francisco CustomerNr i i Append OR Delete Parameters Cancel The DB Query shown in the screenshot above may be represented in text as State CA AND City Los Angeles OR City San Diego OR City San Francisco AND CustomerNr 25 You can re order the DB Query by moving a criterion or set of criteria up or down relative to the other criteria in the DB Query To move a criterion or set of criteria do the following 1 Select the criterion by clicking on it or select an entire level by clicking on the bracket that represents that level 2 Click the Up or Down arrow button in the dialog The following points should be noted e If the adjacent criterion in the direction of movement is at the same level the two criteria exchange places e A set of criteria i e criterion within a bracket changes position within the same level it does not change levels e An individual criterion changes position within the same level If the adjacent criterion is further outward inward i e not on the same level then the selected criterion will move outward inward one level at a time To delete a criterion in a DB Query select the criterion and click Delete Modifying a DB Query To modify a DB Query 1 Click the Query button el The Edit Database Query dialog box opens Yo
82. is entered incorrectly or is invalid both the property and the value are displayed in red To modify the value use any of the applicable methods described in the previous section Entering Property Values To delete a property value double click in the Value column of the property delete the value using the Delete and or Backspace key and then press Enter Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Chapter 9 Additional Editing Procedures 214 Additional Editing Procedures 9 Additional Editing Procedures Additional to the content editing and presentation procedures StyleVision provides a number of useful features that can be used in the SPS These procedures are listed below and described in detail in the sub sections of this section e Authentic Node Properties Individual nodes in the XML document have Authentic View specific properties Nodes can be defined to be non editable to be displayed with markup tags to display user information on mouseover etc e Additional Validation A node can be tested using an XPath expression to return a Boolean value that determines whether user input for that node is valid This test is in addition to document validation against a schema e Input Formatting Formatting Numeric Datatypes The formatting of numeric datatype content including dates can be customized using the tools provided by the Input Formatting feature e Working with Dates In Authentic View a graphical d
83. is updated with the changes you made This command is not relevant for DB based SPSs and is grayed out when a DB based SPS is opened Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Reference File Menu 307 Encoding The Encoding command pops up a dialog in which you can select the encoding of your output documents Changing the encoding in this dialog changes the encoding for the currently active SPS You can also specify the default encoding for all subsequently created SPS documents this is done in the Encoding tab of the Options dialog _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 308 Reference File Menu Print Preview Print The Print Preview command E is enabled in Authentic View It opens a window containing a preview of the Authentic View of the Working XML File You can do the following in the Print Preview window e Navigate the pages of the preview using the page navigation buttons or by entering the page number in the Page text box e Change the zoom factor of the preview pages using the Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons or the combo box to select a zoom factor e Print the page using the Print button You can set page properties by clicking the Page Setup buttons to get the Page Setup dialog The Print command is enabled in the Authentic View and output preview tabs It prints out the selected view of the Working XML File according to the page setup for that view Note that the page setup for Authen
84. it and entering data The commands for working with XML tables are available as icons in the toolbar see XML table editing icons Currently XML tables cannot be inserted in the Authentic Preview of StyleVision Inserting tables To insert an XML table 1 Place your cursor where you wish to insert the table and click the E icon Note that where you can insert tables is determined by the schema This opens the Insert Table dialog shown below xi TS roe FS Columns E Rows 3 Cancel MV Use the whole available width ma 2 Select the number of columns and rows and specify whether you wish the table to extend the entire available width For the specifications given in the dialog box shown above the following table is created You can add and delete columns create row and column joins later Create the broad structure first Please note All modifications to table structure must be made by using the Table menu commands They cannot be made by changing attribute values in the Attribute Entry Helper Formatting tables and entering data To format your table 1 Place the cursor anywhere in the table and click the Table Properties icon This opens the Table Properties dialog see screenshot where you specify formatting for the table or for a row column or cell _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 260 Authentic View Editing in Authentic View Table Properties i ixi Table Row
85. law and the limitations or exclusions of warranties and liability contained herein do not prejudice applicable statutory consumer rights of person acquiring goods otherwise than in the course of business The disclaimer and limited liability above are fundamental to this Software License Agreement between Altova and you d Infringement Claims Altova will indemnify and hold you harmless and will defend or settle any claim suit or proceeding brought against you by a third party that is based upon a claim that the content contained in the Software infringes a copyright or violates an intellectual or proprietary right protected by United States or European Union law Claim but only to the extent the Claim arises directly out of the use of the Software and subject to the limitations set forth in Section 5 of this Agreement except as otherwise expressly provided You must notify Altova in writing of any Claim within ten 10 business days after you first receive notice of the Claim and you shall provide to Altova at no cost with such assistance and cooperation as Altova may reasonably request from time to time in connection with the defense of the Claim Altova shall have sole control over any Claim including without limitation the selection of counsel and the right to settle on your behalf on any terms Altova deems desirable in the sole exercise of its discretion You may at your sole cost retain separate counsel and participate in the defense or s
86. lexical format of date entries 228 using in Authentic View 228 274 Dates and Date Picker 326 and the Date Picker 228 349 changing manually 275 examples of data manipulation with XPath 2 0 227 formatting of 230 how to use in SPS 227 DB connecting to from StyleVision 105 creating queries 267 datatype conversion for XML Schema 389 editing in Authentic View 265 271 filtering display in Authentic View 267 generated XML data files 103 generated XML Schema file 103 generating XML files and HTML PDF output 123 navigating tables in Authentic View 266 parameters in DB queries 267 queries in Authentic View 265 records to display in Authentic View 215 schema file for 112 work mechanism in StyleVision 103 working with in StyleVision 102 XML data file 112 DB controls 350 auto insertion 120 DB Filters clearing 314 creating and modifying 115 datatypes in 115 editing 314 filtering data for XML file 115 DB Parameter Defaults 115 _ 2006 Altova GmbH 422 Index DB Parameters usage 115 DB Parameters in Enterprise edition creating and editing 315 DB Query button inserting in SPS 120 DB schemas 96 DB table navigation controls 350 DB tables selecting for generated schema 105 Decimals formatting of 219 deep equal function in XPath 2 0 see fn deep equal 385 default functions namespace for XPath 2 0 and XQueyr 1 0 expressions 385 in XSLT 2 0 stylesheets 381 Default user dicti
87. na Gasdease tad ceauadead caundeudeasavesdeasstassease 371 11 12 1 Table of Contents Index Search oo ccccccecssssscecceecessesssessescessessenseasess 372 11 12 2 Registration Order FOr ceeccesscessceeeceeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseecseecsaecneeceaeenseenaeees 373 1112 3 Other Commands siccccecaiccdsveencdatidecdessacsexsssadesvlhereevsratacteset cadence vel cestcdeevecsteds 374 Appendices 376 XSLT Engine Information 2 0 0 cccccccecccessesseeeseeeseecsceccecsaecaeceaecnaeesaeeeeeseeeseeeseeeeenes 377 12 1 1 XSLT 1 0 Engine Implementation Information cc eeeeeeereeteeneeeeees 378 12 1 2 XSLT 2 0 Engine Implementation Information i cceeeseeeeeeeeeneeeeees 380 General Infor mation cccccccccccccceesceeseecetneeeseeetuceeseesecseeaeeaeeeseeeeeseeteeneeeneeaes 381 Altova StyleVision User Manual XSLT 2 0 Elements and Functions cccccsesesesesesesesesssssssssssessnsssssnsssnsnssnnaaes 383 12 1 3 XPath 2 0 and XQuery 1 0 Functions 0 0 0 eee eceeseeeteeeeeeeseeeneeceaeeneenaeens 384 General InfOrimationne ccccccccccccccccccscccceccecceee cee eee ceca secusesusesuseeneeeneesnseenseeeas 385 Functions Support ee ere 387 12 2 Datatypes in DB Generated XML Schemas cccccsccssccsseceseceseceseceseeseeeseeeseneeeeeennes 389 WO 2 MS ACCESS aoe enee A ccantecesttea eis cavsaieast vee OE N EAE 390 122252 MS SOIL Server an aa A E EE E ON A A 391 QDS MySQL eraren E E Gres E A E EER 392 1224 Oracle trocie o
88. not affect the remainder of this Software License Agreement and this Software License Agreement shall continue in full force and effect to the fullest extent allowed by law The parties knowingly and expressly consent to the foregoing terms and conditions Last updated 2005 05 05 _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual Index 419 Index lt lt SV PS gt s formatting of numeric fields 219 input formatting 219 A Abbreviations used in user manual 6 About StyleVision 374 Add name 215 Adding schema 301 Additional editing procedures 214 Additional validation 217 ADO conversion of datatypes in XML Schema generation from DB 395 ADO connections for connecting to DB from StyleVision 105 Aligning table cell content in SPSs 341 Altova Engines in Altova products 400 Altova website 374 Altova XML Parser about 399 Altova XSLT 1 0 Engine limitations and implementation specific behavior 378 Altova XSLT 2 0 Engine general information about 381 information about 380 AltovaRowStatus in DB based SPS 120 Ambiguity of content model 144 Append column to table in SPS 336 row to table in SPS 336 Appendices 376 Assign predefined formats in Quick Start tutorial 61 atomization of nodes in XPath 2 0 and XQuery 1 0 evaluation 385 Attributes entry helper in Authentic View 251 Authentic menu 342 dynamic table editing 247 markup display 247 Authentic node propert
89. of the Customize dialog you can toggle a toolbar on and off by clicking in its checkbox When a toolbar is selected in the Toolbars tab you can cause the text labels of that toolbar s items to be displayed by clicking the Show text labels check box You can also reset a selected toolbar to the state it was in when StyleVision was installed by clicking the Reset button You can reset all toolbars and the menu bar by clicking the Reset All button Menu Bar Commands can be added to and items deleted from the menu bar see Commands above To reset the menu bar to the state it was in when StyleVision was installed select Menu Bar in the Toolbars tab of the Customize dialog and click the Reset button Clicking the Reset All button will reset the toolbars as well Keyboard The Keyboard tab allows you to define or change keyboard shortcuts for any StyleVision command _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 366 Reference Tools Menu Commands Toolbars Keyboard Menu Options Category Set Accelerator for oer i 6 Commands Current Keys Assign Working XML Fil Close a Imnort HTMI File Zl Press New Shortcut Key Description Eoo j ssign a Working ML file to selected schema source To assign a shortcut to a command 1 Select the category in which the command is by using the Category combo box 2 Select the command you want to assign a shortcut to in the Commands list box 3 Click in the
90. one of the following ways e The DB schema is generated for a new SPS when the SPS is created directly from a DB File New New from DB e The DB schema is added to a new empty SPS that has no schema sources in Schema Sources entry helper toolbar icon or context menu Add Schema Add DB Schema The respective DB schema generation commands generate a temporary XML Schema from the selected DB and creates the schema as a schema source in the Schema Sources entry helper An element extraneous to the DB called DB is created as the document element and the DB structure is created within this document element During the schema creation process you will be prompted to select which tables from the database you wish to import These database tables will be created in the XML Schema as children of the DB element and also as items in the Global Templates list Creating the XML Schema from the DB consists of two steps e Browsing for the DB file if it is a MS Access DB or building a connection string all other DBs except MS Access Note that only ADO connections are supported This is because ADO s shape command support enables data to be generated hierarchically e Selecting the Base Table information which enables you to select what tables from the database to import The temporary XML Schema that is generated and the XML file that is created will be based on the selected data tables Given below are the steps for creating the schema
91. only nodes are relevant in patterns that use the wildcard for example 10 Note If a boundary whitespace only text node is required in the output then insert the required whitespace within one of the two adjoining child elements For example the XML fragment lt para gt This is lt b gt bold lt b gt lt i gt italic lt gt lt para gt when processed with the XSLT template lt xsl template match para gt lt xsl apply templates gt lt xsl template gt will produce This is bolditalic To get a space between bold and italic in the output insert a space character within either Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Appendices XSLT Engine Information 379 the lt b gt or lt i gt elements in the XML source For example lt para gt This is lt b gt bold lt b gt lt i gt italic lt gt lt para gt or lt para gt This is lt b gt bold amp x20 lt b gt lt i gt italic lt gt lt para gt or lt para gt This is lt b gt bold lt b gt lt i gt amp x20 italic lt gt lt para gt When such an XML fragment is processed with the same XSLT template given above it will produce This is bold italic _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 380 Appendices XSLT Engine Information XSLT 2 0 Engine Implementation Information The Altova XSLT 2 0 Engine is built into Altova s XMLSpy StyleVision Authentic and MapForce XML products It is also available in the fre
92. password will be entered in the connection string only if the Allow saving password option is checked Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH High Level Procedures Working with Databases 109 MS SQL Server ADO Connection String e xi Generate a valid connection string by clicking on the build button Once the connection string is generated click on the next button to proceed Provider SQLO LEDB 1 Integrated Security SSPI Persist Next Cancel 6 Click Next The connection to the DB is made and the Select Base Table Information dialog is displayed e If a password is required to access the DB it must be saved in the connection string e All the connection information is stored in the SPS in the form of a connection string It is therefore important that all clients that use this SPS must have the same driver installed so that they will correctly use the connection string e Since an ADO connection is used hierarchical relationships in Oracle and Sybase DBs are ignored and only flat schemas are generated from these DBs Select Base Table Information The Select Base Table Information dialog is displayed when StyleVision connects successfully to a DB This dialog displays DB tables by owner _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 110 High Level Procedures Working with Databases Select Base Table Information x Database Owners Select All Database
93. records displayed is applied to Authentic View e In Authentic View if the maximum number of DB records to be displayed is less than the total number of records in the DB then Authentic View initially loads and displays that maximum number Additional records are loaded and displayed using the row record navigation buttons in Authentic View e fa large number of tables is open in Authentic View then the user will get an error message saying that too many tables are open On the design side you can reduce the number of tables that are open by reducing the number of records displayed because a record can contain tables On the user side the user can use queries to reduce the number of tables loaded into Authentic View AltovaRowStatus In the XML Schema that is created from a DB each table has an AltovaRowStatus attribute The value of this attribute is automatically determined by StyleVision and consists of three characters which are initialized to If a row is modified or a new row is added the value is changed using the following characters The row has been added but not yet saved to the DB The row has been updated but not yet saved to the DB The row has been deleted but not yet saved to the DB These values can be used to provide users with information about rows being edited The status information exists up to the time when the file is saved After the file is saved the status information is initialized indica
94. resides in the federal or state courts of Massachusetts and you further agree and expressly consent to the exercise of personal jurisdiction in the federal or state courts of Massachusetts in connection with any such dispute or claim If you are located outside of the European Union or the United States and are not using the Software in the United States then this Software License Agreement will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the Republic of Austria excluding its conflict of laws principles and the U N Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods and you expressly agree that exclusive jurisdiction for any claim or dispute with Altova or relating in any way to your use of the Software resides in the Handelsgericht Wien Commercial Court Vienna and you further agree and expressly consent to the exercise of personal jurisdiction in the Handelsgericht Wien Commercial Court Vienna in connection with any such dispute or claim This Software License Agreement will not be governed by the conflict of law rules of any jurisdiction or the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods the application of which is expressly excluded Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Appendices License Information This Software License Agreement contains the entire agreement and understanding of the parties with respect to the subject matter hereof and supersedes all prior
95. section you will learn more about how design components can be formatted using CSS principles and properties Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Quick Start Tutorial Formatting the Content 61 5 4 Formatting the Content StyleVision offers a powerful and flexible styling mechanism based on CSS for formatting components in the design The following are the key aspects of StyleVision s styling mechanism e CSS style rules can be defined for both block components and inline components e Predefined formats are block components that have inherent styles and can be used as wrappers for a group of adjacent components that need to be treated as a block The inherent styles of these formats can be overridden by styles you specify e Class attributes can be declared on components in the design and the class can be used as a selector for external or global style rules e You can specify styles at three levels These are in increasing order of priority i style rules in external stylesheets ii global style rules and iii local style rules In this section you will learn how to e Assign predefined formats e Assign a component a class attribute e Define styles in an external CSS stylesheet and add this stylesheet to the style repository of the SPS e Define global style rules e Define local styles for a selection of multiple design components e Define local styles for a single component Assigning predefined f
96. see under Scripts 239 JavaScript Editor 239 241 in Design View 22 Joining cells in SPS tables 338 K Keyboard shortcuts customizing for commands 364 Key codes for your Altova software 373 L last function in XPath 1 0 378 last function in XPath 2 0 see fn last 385 Layout Enterprise Edition creation of cover headers footers 33 Legal information 405 License 409 information about 405 License metering in Altova products 407 Licenses for your Altova software 373 Links see under Hyperlinks 177 List properties 355 Lists 156 command for inserting in design 322 imported from HTML document 130 in Quick Start tutorial 70 Local styles see under Styles 206 Local template 101 _ 2006 Altova GmbH 426 Index Main schema 30 101 Main template 101 definition of 15 Markup in Authentic View 247 249 351 Memory requirements 398 Menu customizing 364 Menu bar moving 20 Mixed markup 215 MS Access conversion of datatypes in XML Schema generation from DB 390 MS SQL Server conversion of datatypes in XML Schema generation from DB 391 Multiline input fields 150 Multiple schema sources Enterprise Edition 30 MySQL conversion of datatypes in XML Schema generation from DB 392 N namespaces in XSLT 2 0 stylesheet 381 overview of 33 New command 301 Notations of unparsed entities declaring 236 Numbers formatting of 219 Numeric fields
97. soannsscesisveccsaaaxesdeaanseacsatesheasaad aosans 233 9 6 Unparsed Entity URIS dsccssscccsses seccbsestescssencsecssnsctersescesesssoduacsesecbbvaesscecserediecis octsis 235 9 6 1 Declaring an Unparsed Entity oo cccecceccecseeeseeeneeeseeeeeeeecseeeneeenseseseenaeens 236 9 6 2 Using an Unparsed Entity 0 0 cecceecceesceseceeeeeeseeeneeeeeeseeeseecseecsaeenaeenaeenaeens 237 OEE USE SCHIP tS re e E E aveuaseente accohconn caste E AEN EE 239 9 7 1 Defining JavaScript Functions 0 0 cc eeceecceeeceeteeeeeeeeeeseeceecaecseeesaeeeeenseens 241 9 7 2 Assigning Functions as Event Handlers cccccceesseeseeseeeeteeeeceeeeeenseens 242 10 Authentic View 244 10 1 Tnterfate sestese iarere er eda a as 245 LOA Oy rview of the GUI cic ccsiesasssescteasccipsaa eetenreaneinaea aceite E a TESES 246 10 1 2 Authentic View toolbar icons sssessssesssesssssseeressssssesrestssesessessssesreesseseseest 247 10 1 3 Authentic View main window cccccccccssceeseeeeeeseeeseecseeceecaecnaeseaeenaeenaeens 249 10 1 4 Authentic View entry helpers ccceeccccccesseeeseeeseeeeeeseecseecsaeenseceaeenaeenseees 251 10 1 5 Authentic View context menus 00 eecceeccecceeeseeeneeeseeceeceecaecnaeenseceaeenseees 255 10 2 Editing in Authentic View ccecccecccessceesseesseescecssecssecstecaecaecnsecesecnaeeseeseeesenesseeeeaes 256 10 2 1 Tables in Authentic View 0 cececceecesecseeeeeeeceeeeseeeceaeeaeeereeaeseeeeeeaeeneeeaees 257 SPS
98. src Picture gt lt link href AltovaURI gt Link to the Altova Website lt link gt lt document gt In the listing above the Picture and AltovauRI entities are used as values of the img src and link href attributes Note that they are used without the ampersand and semi colon delimiters that are use for parsed general entities Inserting images and hyperlinks to use unparsed entities Images and hyperlinks that reference unparsed entity URIs are used as follows 1 Insert the image and hyperlink via the Insert menu 2 Inthe Edit dialog for each select the Dynamic tab properties screenshot below and enter an XPath expression that selects the node containing the name of the unparsed entities In the XML document example given above these nodes would be respectively the img src and link href nodes Edit Image Static Dynamic Static and Dynamic Dynamic Address i Schone Use above field to enter a dynamic Path Address Use button to select Schema content Treat as unparsed entity for XSLT transformation 3 Then check the Treat as Unparsed Entity check box at the bottom of the dialog This causes the content of the selected node to be read as an unparsed entity if an _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 238 Additional Editing Procedures Unparsed Entity URIs unparsed entity of that name is declared the URI associated with that unpa
99. string or ii a predefined format represented in the Design View by its start and end tags Each SPS component may e be ofa single component type for example a horizontal line component is of the line component type a contents placeholder is of the content component type a combo box is of the combobox component type e have structurally mandatory component subtypes for example a table component will be of the component type table and will have the mandatory component subtypes body row column and cell and optionally the header and footer component subtypes The component or components to style are selected in two steps 1 Select the SPS component in the design Design View 2 Selecta component type from the contained component types this selection is done in the Styles For column of the Styles entry helper These two steps are described in detail below Selecting the SPS component When an SPS component is selected in the design by clicking it its component type is listed in the Styles For column of the Styles Entry Helper If multiple components are selected in the design all components of one component type are listed together in the Styles For column of the Styles entry helper screenshot below fol EB ke 8 Be box font h a autocalcs culor font family i x contents i es common font size Spt 10pt smaller v checkbox details font style gt comboboxes effects font variant edit
100. table s cells is entered as content of the corresponding XML elements For example the HTML text fragment for the XML table shown in the illustration above looks like this lt table border 1 width 40 gt lt tbody gt lt tr gt lt td gt Name lt td gt lt td gt Phone lt td gt ae lt tr gt lt td gt John Merrimack lt td gt lt td gt 6517890 lt td gt lt tr gt lt tr lt td gt Joe Concord lt td gt lt td gt 6402387 lt td gt lt tr gt lt tbody gt lt table gt The original XML document might look like this lt phonelist border 1 width 40 gt lt items gt Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Content Editing Procedures Working with Tables 161 lt person gt lt name gt Name lt name gt lt phone gt Phone lt phone gt lt person gt lt person gt lt name gt John Merrimack lt name gt lt phone gt 6517890 lt phone gt lt person gt lt person gt lt name gt Joe Concord lt name gt lt phone gt 6402387 lt phone gt lt person gt lt items gt lt phonelist gt Note that the element names in the XML document have no relation to table terminology the table structure however corresponds to the HTML table model it could also correspond to the CALS table model in order to be allowed as an XML table Also note the following e An XML table can be inserted at any location in the XML document where according to the schema a table is allowed e In Authenti
101. template for the global element member Inserting the rest of contents instruction The broad structure of the schema is shown in the screenshot below 2B B S cil Schema sources fab XML1 C Program Files Altova StyleVision2006 Examples Tutorials QuickStart xsd g gu XML k Working QuickStart xml iis i Template E Z Root elements E presswatch selection E newsitems team T All Global Elements The document element presswatch contains three children i selection ii newsitems and iii team The main template you have created this far processes the presswatch element Within the presswatch element only the newsitems element is processed The selection and team elements are not processed within the presswatch element although selection has been processed within the newsitems element Inserting the rest of contents instruction within presswatch will therefore cause the selection and team elements to be processed Insert the rest of contents instruction in the design by placing the cursor between the end tags of newsitems and presswatch and selecting the menu command or context menu command Insert Rest of Contents The rest of contents placeholder is inserted screenshot below _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 78 Quick Start Tutorial Using Global Templates and Rest of Contents IEE rest of contents If you look at t
102. that the list contains the unique values of all relevance nodes screenshot below Check this against the XML document This is a dynamic listing that will be augmented each time a new relevance value is added to the XML document Total number of news items 4 Period covered by news items 4 2006 to 5 2006 Select by relevance NanoPower NanoPower NanoSoft NanoMeld NanoNull Stockmarket NanoDiamonds _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 72 Quick Start Tutorial Using Conditions Inserting a condition to display news items having the selected relevance The condition selects newsitem elements that have a metainfo relevance element with a value that is the same as that selected by the user and passed to the presswatch selection byrelevance element Insert the condition as follows 1 Select the contents of the newsitem part of the design which is to be contained inside the condition highlighted in the screenshot below na Bheadiine Bf aye headline K n av EEE content Eq EED conten C country Seaman country i pg synopsis 2 content g div TREE source AOWUGMAR sourcelk div 2 Select the menu command or context menu command Insert Condition This pops up the Edit XPath expression 3 Enter the expression metainfo relevance presswatch selection byrelevance This expression evaluates to true when the value of the metainfo relevance descendant of the current newsitem is the same a
103. the DTD You can enter the declarations either in the external DTD subset or the internal DTD subset Declaring the name URI and type of the unparsed entity In the example below the unparsed entities are declared in the internal DTD subset that is in the XML document lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt lt DOCTYPE document SYSTEM UEURIDoc dtd lt ENTITY Picture SYSTEM nanonull gif NDATA GIF gt lt ENTITY AltovaURI SYSTEM http www altova com NDATA LNK gt J gt lt document gt lt document gt Two unparsed entities have been declared in the above fragment Picture and AltovaURI The URI for each is located between quotes and the datatypes are respectively GIF and LNK Declaring notations for the entity types The XML document fragment listed above references a DTD called vEURIDoc dtd located in the same folder as the XML file The notations for both datatypes Gir and LNK are declared in the DTD file that is in the external subset The entire external DTD subset in UEURIDoc dtd is given below with the notations at the bottom lt Element declarations gt lt ELEMENT document header para img link gt lt ELEMENT header PCDATA gt lt ELEMENT para PCDATA gt EMENT img EMPTY gt lt ATTLIST img CDATA REQUIRED gt ENT link PCDATA gt lt ATTLIST link href CDATA REQUIRED gt
104. the cell and click the required icon Vertically Align Top vertically aligns cell content with the top of the cell EA Vertically Align Middle vertically aligns cell content with the middle of the cell Vertically Align Bottom vertically aligns cell content with the bottom of the cell _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 342 Reference Authentic Menu 11 8 Authentic Menu The Authentic menu contains commands that enable you to e Customize aspects of the Authentic View of an XML document that will be displayed using the SPS e Edit documents in the Authentic View preview of StyleVision The commands in the Authentic menu are listed below Text State Icons CALS HTML Tables Assign Template XML File Auto Add Date Picker Auto Add DB Controls Table Markup Define DTD Entities Validate XML Each of these commands is described in detail in the sub sections of this section Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Reference Authentic Menu 343 Text State Icons The Text State Icons command enables you to define an icon for a global element Once defined the icon can be displayed in the toolbar of Authentic View i e in Altova s XMLSpy Authentic Desktop and Authentic View products thus allowing the Authentic View user to insert an element around selected text by clicking the icon This feature is intended for elements that provide inline formatting such as bold and italic fonts All glo
105. the schema is named differently from the corresponding element in the selected table model then the schema element must be mapped to the corresponding table model element by entering its name in the User Defined column of the CALS HTML Table Properties dialog _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 346 Reference Authentic Menu e The names of all attributes of schema table elements must correspond exactly with the relevant attribute names in the table model These attributes must therefore be defined in the schema Attribute names must correspond exactly because when the Authentic View user modifies the table structure or enters for HTML tables table properties Authentic View enters attributes and enters modifies attribute values for the appropriate element in the XML file If these attributes are not present in the schema or are named or spelled differently in the schema then the XML file will be invalid After selecting the appropriate model all elements in the selected model which do not exist in the table structure of the schema or which do not have a corresponding schema element specified for it are displayed in red If a schema element exists that corresponds to a CALS HTML element then you must map this element to the corresponding CALS HTML element Note When all the elements in the CALS HTML Table Properties dialog are displayed in black this means that the schema contains elements that correspond to t
106. the target URI static dynamic a combination of both and unparsed entity URIs e Auto Calculations Auto Calculations are a powerful XPath based mechanism to manipulate data and i present the manipulated data in the output as well as ii update nodes in the XML document with the result of the Auto Calculation e Conditional Templates A parts of the design document can be active when a certain condition pertaining to the XML document is true In this way the output can be made conditional on the data held in the XML document Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Content Editing Procedures Inserting XML Content as Text 141 7 1 Inserting XML Content as Text Data from a node in the XML document is included in the design by dragging the corresponding schema node from the Schema Sources window and dropping it into the design When the schema node is dropped into the design a menu pops up with options for how the node is to be created in the design screenshot below Create Contents Create Paragraph X Create Table Create Bullets and Numbering Create Image Create Input Field Create Multiline Input Field Create Combo Box Create Check Box Create Radio Button Create Button Use Global Template To output the text contents of the node the node should be created as contents When a node is created as contents the node will look something like this in the design docum
107. this Software License Agreement Altova may use your internal network for license metering between installed versions of the Software b Software Activation Altova s Software may use your internal network and Internet connection for the purpose of transmitting license related data at the time of installation registration or update to an Altova operated license server and validating the authenticity of the license related data in order to protect Altova against unlicensed or illegal use of the Software and to improve customer service Activation is based on the exchange of license related data between your computer and the Altova license server You agree that Altova may use these measures and you agree to follow any applicable requirements c LiveUpdate Altova provides a new LiveUpdate notification service to you which is free of charge Altova may use your internal network and Internet connection for the purpose of transmitting license related data to an Altova operated LiveUpdate server to validate your license at appropriate intervals and determine if there is any update available for you d Use of Data The terms and conditions of the Privacy Policy are set out in full at http www altova com privacy and are incorporated by reference into this Software License Agreement By your acceptance of the terms of this Software License Agreement or use of the Software you authorize the collection use and disclosure of information collected by Alto
108. this is done is described in the section Defining CSS Styles Globally Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH User Interface Design Entry Helpers 39 Properties The Properties window screenshot below enables properties to be defined for SPS components selected in the Design View paragrap Authentic class standard common dir event id intro10 HTML en The Properties window is divided into two broad parts The Properties For column in which the selected component types are listed One of these component types may be selected at a time and properties assigned for it In the screenshot above the paragraph component is selected For detailed information about how components with properties are grouped see the section Components and their Property Groups below The Property Definitions column in which component properties are defined for the component type selected in the Properties For column The Property Definitions column can be displayed in three views see below For the details of what properties are in each property group see the section Property Groups below Three views of Property Definitions The Property Definitions column shows the properties of the component selected in Design View The display is available in three views listed below and can be switched between each other by clicking the respective buttons in the toolbar of the Entry Helper Grouped al The properties
109. upcoming maintenance release or update which is made available at certain times at Altova s sole discretion If Altova in its discretion requests written verification of an error or malfunction discovered by you or requests supporting example files that exhibit the Software problem you shall promptly provide such verification or files by email telecopy or overnight mail setting forth in reasonable detail the respects in which the Software fails to perform You shall use reasonable efforts to cooperate in diagnosis or study of errors Altova may include error corrections in Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Appendices License Information 415 maintenance releases updates or new major releases of the Software Altova is not obligated to fix errors that are immaterial Immaterial errors are those that do not significantly impact use of the Software Whether or not you have purchased the Support amp Maintenance Package technical support only covers issues or questions resulting directly out of the operation of the Software and Altova will not provide you with generic consultation assistance or advice under any circumstances Updating Software may require the updating of software not covered by this Software License Agreement before installation Updates of the operating system and application software not specifically covered by this Software License Agreement are your responsibility and will not be provided by Al
110. value of a node In the example just cited different templates could be used for US and EU locations This section consists of the following topics e Setting Up the Conditions which describes how to create a condition and its branches e Editing Conditions about how to edit the XPath expressions of condition branches after they have been created e Conditions and Auto Calculations explains usage issues when conditions and Auto Calculations are used in combination _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 190 Content Editing Procedures Condition Templates Setting Up the Conditions Setting up the condition consists of the following steps Create the condition with its first branch 2 Create additional branches for alternative processing 3 Create and edit the templates within the various branches of the condition Creating the condition with its first branch Set up a condition as follows Place the cursor anywhere in the design or select a component and then select the menu command Insert Condition The Edit XPath Expression dialog pops up screenshot below E Edit XPath expression x Expression count n1 Department M Select Schema Attribute or ElemerSelect Operator Select Function Selection n1 Oipchat n1 0 Oper Description Function Returns Description any equal boolean any boolean argument con ag Schema sources ri any not equal ceiling number number small
111. written agreement your use of the Software is governed by such agreement You may not sublicense lease loan rent distribute or otherwise transfer the Pre release Software Upon receipt of a later unreleased version of the Pre release Software or release by Altova of a publicly released commercial version of the Software whether as a stand alone product or as part of a larger product you agree to return or destroy all earlier Pre release Software received from Altova and to abide by the terms of the license agreement for any such later versions of the Pre release Software 5 LIMITED WARRANTY AND LIMITATION OF LIABILITY a Limited Warranty and Customer Remedies Altova warrants to the person or entity that first purchases a license for use of the Software pursuant to the terms of this Software License Agreement that i the Software will perform substantially in accordance with any accompanying Documentation for a period of ninety 90 days from the date of receipt and ii any support services provided by Altova shall be substantially as described in Section 6 of this agreement Some states and jurisdictions do not allow limitations on duration of an implied warranty so the above limitation may not apply to you To the extent allowed by applicable law implied warranties on the Software if any are limited to ninety 90 days Altova s and its suppliers entire liability and your exclusive remedy shall be at Altova s option either 1 return o
112. your previous actions and to select all content of the SPS e Find Find Next Replace to find text in the SPS Authentic View and XSLT stylesheet previews and to replace text in Authentic View e Edit DB Filter Clear DB Filter to access the Edit DB Filters dialog and clear DB Filters respectively e Edit Stylesheet Parameters to edit parameters declared globally for the SPS Commands are also available via the context menu which appears when you right click a component or right click at a cursor insertion point Additionally some commands are available as keyboard shortcuts and or toolbar icons Note however that commands which are not applicable in a particular document view or at a given location are grayed out in the menu Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Reference Edit Menu 311 Undo Redo Select All The Undo Ctrl Z command enables you to undo an editing change An unlimited number of Undo actions is supported Every action can be undone and it is possible to undo one command after another till the first action that was made since the document was opened The Redo Ctrl Y command allows you to redo any number of previously undone commands By using the Undo and Redo commands you can step backward and forward through the history of commands The Select All command selects the entire contents of the Design Document window _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 312 Re
113. 0080c0 la os The Style Repository window contains two listings External and Global each in the form of a tree The External listing contains a list of external CSS stylesheets associated with the SPS The Global listing contains a list of all the global styles associated with the SPS The structure of the listings in the Style Repository is as follows External CSS 1 css Location of file editable in Style Repository window Media can be defined in Style Repository window Rules non editable must be edited in CSS file Selector 1 Property 1 Property N Selector N CSS N css Global Selector 1 Selector 1 Properties Selector N Precedence of style rules If a global style rule and a style rule in an external CSS stylesheet have selectors that identify the same document component then the global style rule has precedence over that in the external stylesheet and will be applied If two or more global style rules select the same document component then the rule that is listed last from among these rules will be applied Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH User Interface Design Entry Helpers 37 Likewise if two or more style rules in the external stylesheets select the same document component then the last of these rules in the last of the containing stylesheets will be applied Managing styles in the Style Repository In the Style Repository window you can do the following
114. 1 6 11 Auuto Calculation wie ccccccccccscccccccsssssssceccescscsesseasesscesceesesssaesseceuceesesseaeeas 330 VD G12 Condition a cede deccstesuesssceshictswcdhed sedis Wvcsiaetexitsucedbresastecttante ste claincadaddedestsiutectecwts 332 Table MENU an casecees cescerscvaade cent ie coes EREA EROE OA si sdasitvis tacveaeiees 334 11 7 1 Insert Table Delete Table wo cccccccscssssscescesccssesssssseeceseeesenteaeess 335 11 7 2 Append Insert Row Column 00 0 ccccceesceesceeseeeeeeseeeeseeeeeceecaeenaeenaeeeaeseaeens 336 11 7 3 Delete Row Column 0 ccceccc cc ccccccccsesscecccecessesseseescesceesesssassescesseseesseasens 337 11 7 4 Join Cell Left Right Below Above 0 cccccceecceesseeseeeseeneeeseecneeceseenseenseees 338 11 7 5 Split Cell Horizontally Vertically 0 0 ccceccecsseeseeseeeseeesecseeeneecneeeeenaeens 339 11 7 6 View Cell Bounds encrenca n Aa T E A EAE 340 11 7 7 Vertical Alignment of Cell Content 2 0 0 0 ccc cccccceeseeseeneeeseecneeeeseeneenaeens 341 AUtH ent e Ment sesccessessss conevsaiceaseverccase sda ccanaveideadadelactavsiccadeedaccamaarieia adden O R 342 LESA Text Stale ICONS neniani inan e e E E SN E EEE 343 11 8 2 CALS HTML Tables 0 ccc ce ccecccescesseescessesceeeeesecsseeseseecesecseseesssecseeeeesaeeseesees 345 11 8 3 Assign Template XML File 0 0 cc ccceccccesceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeceecseeeneeseseeeaeenseees 347 11 8 4 Auto Add Date Picker cccececcccsscesseeeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeseeeseeceecssecsaeenseseaesea
115. 387 FO processor setting up 18 Footers in tables 166 Footers Enterprise Edition creation of 33 Format command for inserting in design 321 Format strings defining for Input Formatting 357 Formatting also see Presentation 196 for tables 166 lists 287 nodes on insertion 143 of numeric fields 219 overview of procedures 196 predefined HTML formats 287 text alignment 287 text in Authentic View 343 text properties 287 toolbar buttons for 287 functions see under XSLT 2 0 functions 383 XPath 2 0 and XQuery 1 0 384 G General usage procedure 85 Generated files 91 Global styles see under Styles 203 Global template 101 Global templates effect on rest of contents 147 in Quick Start tutorial 77 Graphics overview of use in SPS 171 see also under Images 171 Graphics formats in Authentic View 278 GUI description of 20 document views in 21 Main Window of 21 multiple documents in 21 H Headers in tables 166 Headers Enterprise Edition creation of 33 Help see Onscreen Help 372 Help menu 371 Hide feature of Design Entry Helpers 27 Hide markup 247 249 High level procedures 84 Horizontal line command for inserting in design 323 in Quick Start tutorial 56 HTML import 125 creating a new SPS 126 generating files from SPS 132 of HTML lists 130 of HTML tables 130 schema structure 128 SPS design 128 HTML output 91 HTML tables 167 in SPSs 345 HTML to XML co
116. 5 Using Graphics There are two ways in which graphics are used in an SPS e As images in the design document and e As Authentic View toolbar icons for applying markup to the XML document text state icons When inserting images in the design document the location of the image can be specified directly in the SPS by the SPS designer or can be taken or derived from a node in the XML document How to specify the location of the image is described in the section Image URIs The section Text State Icons describes how toolbar icons for Authentic View can be defined _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 172 Content Editing Procedures Using Graphics Image URIs Images can be inserted at any location in the design document These images will be displayed in Authentic View and the output documents in Design View inserted images are indicated with placeholders To insert an image click the Insert Image menu command which pops up the Insert Image dialog screenshot below The URI of the image to be inserted is to be entered in this dialog Insert Image Static Dynamic Static and Dynamic Static Address Use above field to enter Absolute Path Browse a simple static Address Cancel There are three ways in which the URI of the image can be entered e Inthe Static tab directly as an absolute or relative URI For example nanonull gif relative URI see section below and c imag
117. 6 Bookmarks and Hyperlinks 0 0 c ccccecccecseesceesceescecceceecsaecesecnsecnseeeaeeseeeseeeseeeseneenaes 177 7 6 1 Inserting Bookmarks ecccesccesecesecessceeeeeeeeeeneeeseeeseeeseeeseecsaecaeenaeenseenaeens 178 7 6 2 Defining Hyperlinks 000 0 cecccsccescceseceeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeseecseecaeecseecsaeenaeeeaeeeaeens 180 TP AvitO Cal culations issecs tas scindsacdaces iis ests baheiea Hataceds hace Ha alata ag tienpadnden eedadsetbeteancens tates 183 7 7 1 Editing and Moving Auto Calculations ccececeecceseeseeeeceseeeeeeeeeaeeneeeeees 184 7 7 2 Updating Nodes with Auto Calculations cccccssecsseesteesteceeeeeeeeenaeens 186 7 7 3 Auto Calculations Based on Updated Nodes ccccessesseesteeeteeeteeeteenseens 188 FS Condition Templates sosisini e R ed ceshereaseasdviecsiwessaecans EE 189 7 8 1 Setting Up the Conditions 0 ccceecceesceesceseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeceeeneeenseeneeeaeees 190 7 8 2 Editing Conditions ccccesccescceseceseceeeeseeeeceeeseeseeeeeseecseecaeecsaecaeceaeeeaeenaeens 193 7 8 3 Conditions and Auto Calculations ccccecccecseeseeeseeeneeeseecseeceaeceaeeneenaeens 194 8 Presentation Procedures 196 Sil Predefined Formats cscs ssceccos aecniscetesves dicen sve oi R AR A E EARE NE 197 82 gt Working with CSS Style Steenin oa a eena a E A E A ERE ERR 199 8 2 1 External CSS Stylesheets 20 0 cccccccesecesecsseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeseeseeeeecnseenseenaeens 200 8 2 2 Defining C
118. B file in the case of a MS Access 2000 or MS Access 2003 DB or explicitly building a connection string for all other DBs except MS Access DBs Note that only ADO connections are supported This is because ADO s shape command support enables data to be generated hierarchically e Selecting the Base Table information which enables you to select what tables from the DB to import The temporary XML Schema that is generated and the XML files that are created will be based on the selected data tables These steps are described in detail below Select the DB type 1 Click File New from DB The following dialog is displayed Select a Source Database x Please select a source database or a stored connection and click on next Microsoft Access ADO Microsoft SQL Server ADO C Oracle ADO MySQL ADO IBM DB2 ADO C Any ADO Next Cancel 2 Select the source DB type and click Next If you selected a DB type of MS Access then a dialog appears in which you can browse for the DB see next section If you selected any other DB type option a dialog appears prompting you to build a connection string Connecting to an MS Access DB If you selected an MS Access DB to which to connect the Select a MS Access DB dialog is displayed screenshot below Do the following 1 Click Browse and select an existing MS Access DB Note that StyleVision supports MS Access 2000 or MS Access 2003 DBs _ 2006 Alt
119. Bs starting with the 2005 version of StyleVision is different than the structure generated in previous versions of StyleVision The new structure enables the editing of databases in the Authentic View of Altova products a feature which was not available with earlier versions As a result any SPS generated with earlier versions of StyleVision will generate an error when opened in versions of StyleVision starting from the 2005 version To be able to use the DB editing and reporting features of lt SV PROD gt you should recreate the SPS in the current version of StyleVision DB XML files Two temporary XML files are generated from the DB see DBs and StyleVision for an illustration e Atemporary editable XML file which can be edited in Authentic View e Atemporary non editable XML File which is used as the Working XML File for previews and output generation The temporary editable XML file is generated when the DB is loaded into StyleVision It can be edited in Authentic View after the SPS has been created The display in Authentic View can be filtered by using the Query mechanism available in Authentic View Any modification made in _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 114 High Level Procedures Working with Databases Authentic View to the editable data is written to this temporary XML File Clicking File Save Authentic XML Data saves the information in the temporary editable XML file to the DB The temporary n
120. Cancel Build the ADO connection string as follows 1 In the ADO Connection String dialog click Build This pops up the Data Link Properties dialog Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH High Level Procedures Working with Databases 107 E Data Link Properties j x Provider Connection Advanced All Select the data you want to connect to MediaCatalogDB OLE DB Provider MediaCatalogMergedDB OLE DB Provider MediaCatalogWebDB OLE DB Provider Microsoft ISAM 1 1 OLE DB Provider Microsoft Jet 4 0 OLE DB Provider Microsoft OLE DB Provider For Data Mining Services Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Indexing Service Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Internet Publishing Microsoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers Microsoft OLE DB Provider for OLAP Services 8 0 Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Oracle Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Outlook Search Microsoft OLE DB Provider for SOL Server Microsoft OLE DB Simple Provider MSDataShape OLE DB Provider for Microsoft Directory Services OK Cancel Help 2 Select the provider driver to connect to the DB For SQL DBs we recommend that you set up and use Microsoft OLE DB Provider for SQL Server For Oracle MySQL Sybase and IBM DB2 DBs we recommend that you set up and use Microsoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers Then click NEXT gt gt This takes you to the Connection tab _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 108 High Level Procedures
121. Change or Change All to change the highlighted instance of this spelling or all its instances respectively Double clicking a word in the Suggestions list causes it to replace the unknown word Alternatively you can ignore this instance of the unknown word Ignore Once or ignore all instances of this unknown word Ignore All or add this unknown word to the default user dictionary Add to Dictionary Adding the unknown word to the dictionary causes the spell checker to treat the word as correct and to pass on to the next word not found in the dictionary After all the words not found in the dictionary have been displayed in turn and an action taken for each the spell checker displays the message The spelling check is complete You can then recheck the document from the beginning Recheck Document or close the dialog Close The Options button opens the Spelling Options dialog in which you can specify options for the spelling check Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Reference Tools Menu 361 Spelling Options The Spelling options command opens a dialog box shown below in which you specify options for the spell check Spelling Options x Spelling IV Always suggest corrections Make corrections only from the main dictionary IV Ignore words in UPPER case I Ignore words with numbers Custom Dictionaries Engish U S M Dictionary Language cod Alwa
122. Content Editing Procedures Working with Tables 165 Tables for elements with text content To create columns or rows for child elements the element being created as a table must have a child element or attribute node Having a child text node does not work If you have this kind of situation then create a child element called say Text and put your text node in the TableElement Text elements Now you will be able to create TableElement as a dynamic table This table will have one column for Text elements Each row will therefore contain one cell containing the text node in Text and the rows of the table will correspond to the occurrences of the TableElement element Contents of table body cells When you create a dynamic table you can create the node content as any one of a number of StyleVision components In the examples above the table body cells were created as contents They could also have been created as data entry devices There are two points to note here e The setting you select is a global setting for all the table body cells If you wish to have an individual cell appear differently edit the cell after you have created the table right click in the cell and in the context menu that appears select Change to and then the required cell content type e If you create cells as element contents and if the element has descendant elements then the content of the cell will be a concatenation of the text strings of the ele
123. DB Controls submenu Note that in this submenu the DB Controls panel can be inserted as the four navigation buttons or as the four navigation buttons plus the button that calls the Goto Record dialog Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Reference Authentic Menu 351 Table Markup The Table command is enabled in Authentic View preview and allows you to manipulate the rows of a dynamic table When you place the cursor over the command a submenu pops out which contains more specific commands You can append insert duplicate and delete rows and you can move the selected row up and down relative to the other rows of the table A row is selected by placing the cursor inside it Note that each row of a dynamic table represents an occurrence of a repeatable element within the set of all those repeatable elements With the Markup command you can select between the Hide Markup and the various Show Markup modes When you place the cursor over the command a submenu which contains the specific commands In Hide Markup mode node tags are not displayed In Show Full Markup mode opening and closing tags with their node names are displayed _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 352 Reference Authentic Menu Define DTD Entities The Define Entities command is available only in Authentic View With the Define Entities command in Authentic View you can define entities that you want to add to your XML document
124. DITIONS EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE SATISFACTORY QUALITY INFORMATIONAL CONTENT OR ACCURACY QUIET ENJOYMENT TITLE AND NON INFRINGEMENT WITH REGARD TO THE SOFTWARE AND THE PROVISION OF OR FAILURE TO PROVIDE SUPPORT SERVICES THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS YOU MAY HAVE OTHERS WHICH VARY FROM STATE JURISDICTION TO STATE JURISDICTION c Limitation Of Liability TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EVEN IF A REMEDY FAILS ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE IN NO EVENT SHALL ALTOVA OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INCIDENTAL DIRECT INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS BUSINESS INTERRUPTION LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION OR ANY OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE OR THE PROVISION OF OR FAILURE TO PROVIDE SUPPORT SERVICES EVEN IF ALTOVA HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES IN ANY CASE ALTOVA S ENTIRE LIABILITY UNDER ANY PROVISION OF THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THE SOFTWARE PRODUCT Because some states and jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of liability the above limitation may not apply to you In such states and jurisdictions Altova s liability shall be limited to the greatest extent permitted by
125. Editing a DB In Authentic View you can edit database DB tables and save data back to a DB This section contains a full description of interface features available to you when editing a DB table The following general points need to be noted e The number of records in a DB table that are displayed in Authentic View may have been deliberately restricted by the designer of the StyleVision Power Stylesheet in order to make the design more compact In such cases only that limited number of records is initially loaded into Authentic View Using the DB table row navigation icons see Navigating a DB Table you can load and display the other records in the DB table e You can query the DB to display certain records e You can add modify and delete DB records and save your changes back to the DB See Modifying a DB Table _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 266 Authentic View Editing in Authentic View Navigating a DB Table The commands to navigate DB table rows are available as buttons in the Authentic View document Typically one navigation panel with either four or five buttons accompanies each DB table The arrow icons are from left to right Go to First Record in the DB Go to Previous Record Open the Go to Record dialog see screenshot Go to Next Record and Go to Last Record _ Go to record 1 of 8 Cancel To navigate a DB table click the required button Altova StyleVision User Man
126. For each schema one optional Working XML File and one optional Template XML File can be assigned Working XML File An SPS can optionally have a Working XML File associated with it The function of the Working XML Eile is to provide the XML data source for output previews in StyleVision and it must therefore be valid according to the schema with which it is associated The Working XML Eile is assigned in the Schema Sources entry helper Template XML File An SPS can have a Template XML Eile optionally associated with it The function of the Template XML File is to provide the starting data of the new XML document that is created each time that SPS is opened in the Authentic View of a product other than StyleVision The Template XML File must be valid according to the schema with which it is associated It is assigned in the Schema Sources entry helper Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH High Level Procedures General Usage Procedure 87 XSLT and XPath Versions An SPS is essentially an XSLT stylesheet For each SPS you must set the XSLT version 1 0 or 2 0 You do this by clicking the appropriate toolbar icon or E The selection you make determines two things e Which of the two XSLT engines in StyleVision is used for transformations StyleVision has separate XSLT 1 0 and XSLT 2 0 engines e What XSLT functionality 1 0 or 2 0 is displayed in the interface and allowed in the SPS XSLT transformations XSLT transfo
127. Generated user defined XML data which is an XML document based on the schema you have created and containing data imported from the HTML file e XSLT stylesheets for HTML output e HTML output Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH High Level Procedures Command Line Interface StyleVisionBatch 133 6 5 Command Line Interface StyleVisionBatch StyleVision s file generation functionality can be called via the StyleVisionBatch utility which is included in your StyleVision installation The utility is named styleVisionBatch exe and is located in the StyleVision application folder The syntax for invoking StyleVision commands via StyleVisionBatch is explained in the StyleVisionBatch Syntax sub section When a command is executed StyleVision runs silently i e without the GUI being opened generates the required output files and closes Output files Using StyleVisionBatch you can generate one or more of the following files e XSLT for HTML xs1t file from the specified SPS e HTML htm1 file using the XML and XSLT files in the specified SPS or using alternative XML and or XSLT files e XML Schema file of a database based SPS e XML data file of a database based SPS How to use the command line There are two ways you can use the command line e Commands can be entered singly on the command line and be executed immediately For example in a DOS window you can go to the directory in which the StyleVisionBatch util
128. Input Formatting definition This definition can be entered in three ways i by selecting from a dropdown list of available options for that datatype see screenshot below ii by entering the definition directly in the input field and iii by using the Insert Field and Field Options entry helpers to build the definition correctly See Input Formatting Syntax for a full description of the various formatting options Input Formatting x m Formats for type date Unformatted Standard format YYYY MM DD Cancel Formatted DD Month YAY ie applied Errors in syntax If there is an error in syntax the following happens The definition is displayed in red An error message also in red is displayed below the input field The OK button in the Input Formatting dialog is disabled The Go to Error button in the Input Formatting dialog is enabled Clicking it causes the cursor to be placed at the point in the format definition where the syntax error is Mismatch of data and datatype formats If the data entered in an XML node does not match the lexical format of that node s datatype or if the result of an Auto Calculation does not match the lexical format of the expected datatype then the formatting will be undefined and the display in Authentic View and output will not be displayed correctly Applying Input Formatting to the output The Input Formatting that you define applies to Authentic View Some Inpu
129. Insert menu provides commands enabling you to insert a variety of design components into the SPS Some of these commands are available as toolbar icons Additionally Insert menu commands are also available via context menus which appear when in the SPS design you right click a selection or a cursor insertion point In the context menus commands that are not available at that location in the SPS are disabled Note Since the Insert commands are used for constructing the SPS they are available in Design View only _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 320 Reference Insert Menu Image The Image command atiows you to insert an image using an image location address that either comes from the XML document dynamic or is entered by you directly in the SPS static To insert an image do the following 1 Click Insert Image or the Insert Image toolbar icon The Insert Image dialog shown below appears Edit Image Static Dynamic Static and Dynamic Dynamic Address ji Schema Use above field to enter a dynamic Path Address Use button to select Schema content Treat as unparsed entity for XSLT transformation 2 Select the required tab Static Dynamic or Static and Dynamic and enter the address of the image location and or the XPath expression that locates the image address in the XML document The screenshot above shows how a Static and Dynamic address is entered Using unparse
130. It cannot be created within the global template of the authors element _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 166 Content Editing Procedures Working with Tables Formatting Static and Dynamic Tables Static and dynamic tables can be formatted using HTML table formatting properties and CSS properties The HTML table formatting properties are available in the Properties entry helper screenshot below These properties are available in the HTML group of properties for the table component and its sub components body row column and cell hl Le Pro template Authentic abie common event row align bgcolor border column HTML cellpadding cell cellspacing datafld dataformatas datasrc frame rules summary width E The CSS table formatting properties are available in the Styles entry helper screenshot below CSS properties are available for the table component and its sub components body row column and cell Styles For table color common row column details cell effects font family font size font style font ariant font weight Be eee Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Content Editing Procedures Working with Tables 167 XML Tables An XML table is defined as a hierarchical XML structure the elements of which contain the cell content of the table This XML structure must correspond exactly to the CALS or HTML tabl
131. License Information backups and copies stored on a computer c the receiving party secures a personalized key code from Altova and d the receiving party accepts the terms and conditions of this Software License Agreement and any other terms and conditions upon which you legally purchased a license to the Software Notwithstanding the foregoing you may not transfer education pre release or not for resale copies of the Software 4 PRE RELEASE AND EVALUATION PRODUCT ADDITIONAL TERMS If the product you have received with this license is pre commercial release or beta Software Pre release Software then this Section applies In addition this section applies to all evaluation and or demonstration copies of Altova software Evaluation Software and continues in effect until you purchase a license To the extent that any provision in this section is in conflict with any other term or condition in this Software License Agreement this section shall supersede such other term s and condition s with respect to the Pre release and or Evaluation Software but only to the extent necessary to resolve the conflict You acknowledge that the Pre release Software is a pre release version does not represent final product from Altova and may contain bugs errors and other problems that could cause system or other failures and data loss CONSEQUENTLY THE PRE RELEASE AND OR EVALUATION SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED TO YOU AS IS WITH NO WARRANTIES FOR USE OR PERF
132. ML Infoset that is passed to the Altova XSLT 1 0 Engine is stripped of boundary whitespace only text nodes A boundary whitespace only text node is a child whitespace only text node that occurs between two elements within an element of mixed content This stripping may have an effect on the value returned by the fn position fn last and fn count functions For any node selection that selects text nodes also boundary whitespace only text nodes would typically also be included in the selection However since the XML Infoset used by the Altova engines has boundary whitespace only text nodes stripped from it these nodes are not present in the XML Infoset As a result the size of the selection and the numbering of nodes in the selection will be different than that for a selection which included these text nodes The fn position fn last and fn count functions therefore could produce results that are different from those produced by some other processors A situation in which boundary whitespace only text nodes are evaluated as siblings of other elements arises most commonly when xs1 apply templates is used to apply templates When the n position fn last and fn count functions are used in patterns with a name test for example para 3 whichis short for para position 3 boundary whitespace only nodes are irrelevant since only the named elements para in the above example are selected Note however that boundary whitespace
133. Numeric datatypes for which Input Formatting is available Input Formatting is available for the following datatypes xs decimal xs integer the 12 built in types derived from xs integer xs double and xs float when values are between and including 0 000001 and 1 000 000 Values outside this range are displayed in scientific notation for example 1 0E7 and cannot have Input Formatting applied to them xs date xs dateTime xs duration xs gYear xs gYearMonth xs gMonth xs gMonthDay xs gDay _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 220 Additional Editing Procedures Input Formatting Formatting Numeric Datatypes The Input Formatting Mechanism Input formatting can be applied to e A numeric datatype node such as xs decimal Or xs date that is present in the SPS as contents or an input field e An Auto Calculation that evaluates to a value which has the lexical format of a numeric datatype Defining Input Formatting To define Input Formatting for a node or Auto Calculation in the SPS do the following 1 Select the contents placeholder or input field of the node or the Auto Calculation 2 Inthe Element group of properties in the Properties entry helper click the Edit button of the Format property The Input Formatting dialog appears screenshot below It is different according to whether the selected component was a node or an Auto Calculation If the selected component was a node then a dialog like the o
134. ORMANCE AND ALTOVA DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY OR LIABILITY OBLIGATIONS TO YOU OF ANY KIND WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WHERE LEGALLY LIABILITY CANNOT BE EXCLUDED FOR PRE RELEASE AND OR EVALUATION SOFTWARE BUT IT MAY BE LIMITED ALTOVA S LIABILITY AND THAT OF ITS SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE SUM OF FIFTY DOLLARS USD 50 IN TOTAL If the Evaluation Software has a time out feature then the software will cease operation after the conclusion of the designated evaluation period Upon such expiration date your license will expire unless otherwise extended Access to any files created with the Evaluation Software is entirely at your risk You acknowledge that Altova has not promised or guaranteed to you that Pre release Software will be announced or made available to anyone in the future that Altova has no express or implied obligation to you to announce or introduce the Pre release Software and that Altova may not introduce a product similar to or compatible with the Pre release Software Accordingly you acknowledge that any research or development that you perform regarding the Pre release Software or any product associated with the Pre release Software is done entirely at your own risk During the term of this Software License Agreement if requested by Altova you will provide feedback to Altova regarding testing and use of the Pre release Software including error or bug reports If you have been provided the Pre release Software pursuant to a separate
135. PS is based StyleVision creates a temporary XML file that is based on the Working XML File and it is this temporary file that is displayed in the Authentic View tab of the Main Window Modifications that you make in Authentic View will modify the temporary XML file The Working XML File itself will not be modified till you explicitly save the modifications with the menu command File Save Authentic XML Data If no Working XML File is assigned you will be prompted to assign a Working XML File when you click the Authentic View tab Authentic View limitations The Authentic View in the Main Window is similar to the full fledged Authentic View available in XMLSpy and Authentic Desktop except in the following major respects e Authentic View Entry Helpers are not available in the GUI To insert or append nodes you must right click and use the context menus e XML tables are not available for insertion e Text state icons are not available _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 24 User Interface Main Window To test these features you should use the full fledged Authentic View in XMLSpy or Authentic Desktop A full description of how to use Authentic View is given in the section Editing in Authentic View For additional information please see the Authentic View tutorial in the XMLSpy or Authentic Desktop user manual Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH User Interface Main Window 25 Output Vi
136. Query 1 0 functions general information about 385 implementation information 384 see under fn for specific functions 385 XQuery processor in Altova products 400 xs date and the Date Picker 228 xs dateTime and the Date Picker 228 xs QName also see QName 387 xsl preserve space 378 xsl strip space 378 XSLT engine information 377 XSLT 1 0 Engine limitations and implementation specific behavior 378 XSLT 2 0 Engine general information about 381 information about 380 XSLT 2 0 functions implementation specific behavior of 383 see under fn for specific functions 383 XSLT 2 0 stylesheet namespace declarations in 381 XSLT files generating via command line from SPS 133 XSLT processors in Altova products 400 XSLT stylesheet preview in Output Views 25 XSLT version setting for SPS 288 XSLT version in SPS 87 _ 2006 Altova GmbH
137. Receivable 471 f further nanonull com 22 20 Accounting Loby Matise 963 lmatise nanonull com addShares 25 7 18 Manager Employees 3 20 of Office 9 of Company Shares 1500 13 of Office 6 of Company Non Shareholders Frank Further Loby Matise To move among cells in the table use the Up Down Left and Right arrow keys To move forward from one cell to the next use the Tab key Pressing the Tab key in the last cell of a row creates a new row Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Authentic View Editing in Authentic View 259 XML Tables XML tables can be inserted by you the user of Authentic View They enable you to insert tables anywhere in the XML document where they are allowed which is useful if you need to insert tabular information in your document These tables will be printed out as tables when you print out directly from Authentic View If you are also generating output with XSLT stylesheets discuss the required output with the designer of the StyleVision Power Stylesheet Note that you can insert XML tables only at allowed locations These locations are specified in the schema DTD or XML Schema If you wish to insert a table at additional locations discuss this with the person designing the StyleVision Power Stylesheet Working with XML tables There are three steps involved when working with XML tables inserting the table formatting
138. SLT stylesheets you generate with StyleVision The structure of an SPS table is specified by the person who designs the SPS An SPS table can be created anywhere in an SPS and any number of SPS tables can be created SPS tables are entirely presentational devices and are represented using the presentational vocabulary of Authentic View and the output format The structure of an SPS table is not represented by nodes in the XML document although the content of table cells may come from nodes in the XML document SPS tables occur in three types of output e Rendered in Authentic View a vocabulary specific to Authentic View is used to mark up SPS tables e In StyleVision generated XSLT stylesheets for HTML output SPS tables are marked up as HTML tables _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 160 Content Editing Procedures Working with Tables There are two types of SPS tables e Static tables are built up step by step by the person designing the SPS After the table structure is created the content of each cell is defined separately The content of cells can come from random locations in the schema tree and even can be of different types It is important to realize that the rows of a static table are not intended to represent a repeating data structure This is why the table is said to be static it has a fixed structure that does not change with the XML content e Dynamic tables are intended for data structures in the
139. SS Styles Globally 0 0 cece ceccccecceeseeeceesceeseeeseecseecseecseeeeeneens 203 8 2 3 Defining CSS Styles Locally 0 cceecceceeseeeeceeeseeeeeeseceeeeeesecnaeeaeeeeeeaeeas 206 Selecting SPS Components to Style rreren 207 How Styles Are Applied to COMpPONENES cccccccccccsceseeeteceteeeteteneeesetenseenatenes 210 8 2 4 Setting CSS Property Values cccccesccesccsssceesceeeeeeseeeseeeeeeseeeseecsaeeneenseens 211 9 Additional Editing Procedures 214 9 1 Authentic Node Properties cccceccccsscesseeeseeeseeeeecseecuecsaecsaeceseceaeesseeseeeseeeseeeseaeenses 215 Altova StyleVision User Manual 9 2 Additional Validation cccccccccssscssscsssssssssssessssssssssssssssssesesssesscesesesssssssesssesesesseeeees 217 9 3 Input Formatting Formatting Numeric Datatypes 0 0 cece eeeeeeeecneeetteeenseeaeens 219 9 3 1 The Input Formatting Mechanism c cccceccseeseeesceeseeeneeeseeeneecnseeneenaeens 220 9 3 2 Input Formatting Syntax ccc ccccccsccessceesceeeeseseeeseeeseeeseecseecsaeeeecnseeneenaeens 222 DA Working with Dates lt scsssississcecssavetnststein ces itendstaiieaseaetny a a A a S 227 9 4 1 Using the Date Picker cc ceccccsccsssceseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeseecseecaeceaecsaeeeseeeaeens 228 94 2 Formatting Dates sscecccisssescccsssesscaassaadeaesseacsnesteosaeava sesada ad osteadeacensavdiccssaveicens 230 95 User Declared Parameters sive ccsiashavcdasvenycatacntdchaeven
140. Schema generated from DB to the specified file Explanatory points The following points provide supplementary information about StyleVisionBatch syntax and the command line process When StyleVisionBatch is called it looks in the current directory for StyleVision exe If your StyleVision executable is named otherwise or located in another folder use the lt stylevision exe gt argument to specify the executable Paths may be absolute or relative and should use backslashes Options are prefixed either with a minus sign for example outHTML or a forward slash for example OutHTML If the filename or the path to it contains a space then the entire path should be enclosed in quotes For example c My Files MyXML xml or c MyFiles My XML xml Commands paths and folder and file names are case insensitive If the SPS file is specified the Working XML File associated with it and the XSLT stylesheet generated from it will be used to generate output therefore no input XML or XSLT file is required If however the SPS file is not specified an input XML file and input XSLT file must be specified as options An input XML File must also be specified if the SPS file does not have a Working XML File assigned it For output from a DB the SPS must be specified Parameter declarations refer to parameters in the XSLT stylesheet Parameter names and values are case sensitive If the SPS is DB based and has a DB Filter which uses parameters the
141. StyleVision User Manual 186 Content Editing Procedures Auto Calculations Updating Nodes with Auto Calculations You can copy the value or result of an Auto Calculation to a node in the XML document You do this as follows 1 Create the Auto Calculation as described in Editing and Moving Auto Calculations 2 Select the select the Auto Calculation and in the Properties entry helper click the Edit button of the Update XML node in Authentic property in the Authentic group of properties screenshot below Properties CS Authentic additional validation common Format event Update XML node in Authentic user Info XPath count n1 Department n1 Person 3 Inthe Schema Selector dialog that pops up screenshot below select the node to update and click OK to finish Schema Selector x Select Schema Attribute or Element ag Schema sources HB XML C Program Files Altova StyleVisio E Z Root elements E OrgChart CompanyLogo Name G Office Name E Desc Location iE Address FE Address FII of gt I Absolute XPath Conceal The node to update is now specified The XPath expression must select a single node If the XPath expression selects multiple nodes no node will be updated IMPORTANT For a node in the XML document to be updated two conditions must be fulfilled Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Content Editing Proce
142. TADLES yoe EAEE eee 258 AML LADIES aniona r E E T 259 XML Table Editing Icons ccccccccccccceceesseeseecetseeeecesecuseeseeseensesseseeceeeneeeeeeaeens 263 10 2 2 Editing a DB oases ees seca ta ses se cases Ciena alee ameter 265 Navigating a DB Table i ccecceccccccesceecesetsseeseeeteceeseeecuseeseeeeeseeeeeteneeneeenenats 266 DB QUCPIOS orni sees ened nate eeeattneune ash AEEA EEEE 267 NOG TNE a DB Table srno A 271 10 2 3 Working with Dat s scisercecnuiisnunsnnissnipn aae 273 Dat Picker asic scevstosssetinessiaeiesnacivibs Ea E E a E a ans aN 274 Text ENP oee asus e E E E E EE AE E EE E OARS 275 10 2 4 Defining Entities 20 0 cecccscccsecesecsseceeseeeeeeeceeeceeeseceseeeseecseecsaecnaeseaeenseenaeens 276 10 2 5 Images in Authentic View cccccccesccessceseeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeaeecsaecaeceaeeeaeenaeees 278 10 2 6 Keystrokes in Authentic View cccccceccccescecseeeseesneceseeeeeceecneecnaeenaeeneeeaeees 279 Altova StyleVision User Manual 11 Reference 282 IET OOND ALS sess erener catecitecsedvensvasne sa cuslade ERE AE E E EE 283 ILLI Authentic E E E AE E TER 286 VIAN Format asiarren E N A A 287 TEIS Standard iecccescaceteacesaiecetess tes ecessde decstebaceaeieeestiettensttohanedecedbecstsbvseduietahecsiebes 288 VU DA Table g cceecccssite ccindidechsie Sevan desdacsiiy a ney Rami tania te amines 290 11 2 DESIST VIEW asses cotstes tite Givssucndansvecvenvsnv stensbieceusesues caseiiedenapsetedaa speesTiavs
143. TD X Add DB Schema Add User defined Schema The schema source can be selected from a file from a DB or be user defined An important point to consider is whether you will be using global templates and whether elements you wish to create as global templates are defined as global elements in the schema When adding a DTD from file remember that all elements defined in the DTD are global elements When adding an XML Schema from file it is worth checking what elements are defined as global elements and should you wish to make any change to the schema whether this is permitted in your XML environment When a DB is selected during the import process you can select what tables from the DB to import This selection determines the structure of the XML Schema that will be generated from the DB Root elements If a schema source has multiple global elements then multiple root elements document elements can be selected for use in the design This enables the SPS design to have templates that match multiple document elements The advantage of this is that if an SPS say UniversalSPS sps based on UniversalSchema xsd has one template each for its two root elements Element A and Element B then this one SPS can be used with an XML instance document which has Element a as its document element as well as with another XML instance document which has Element B8 as its document element For each XML instance the relevant t
144. The XPath 2 0 functions current date and current dateTime can be used to obtain the current date and date time respectively e Dates can be subtracted For example current date DueDate would return an xdt dayTimeDuration value for example something like P24p which indicates a positive difference of 24 days e Time units can be extracted from durations using XPath 2 0 functions For example days from duration xdt dayTimeDuration P24pD would return the integer 24 Here is an XPath 2 0 expression in an Auto Calculation It calculates a 4 annual interest on an overdue amount on a per day basis and returns the sum of the principal amount and the accumulated interest cna current date gt DueDate then round half to even InvoiceAmount InvoiceAmount 0 04 div 365 days from duration current date DueDate 2 else InvoiceAmount Such a calculation would be possible with XPath 2 0 only if the DueDate element were defined to be of a date type such as xs date and the content of the element is entered in its lexically correct form that is yyyy MM DD HH MM where the timezone component prefixed by is optional Using the Date Picker ensures that the date is entered in the correct lexical form _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 228 Additional Editing Procedures Working with Dates Using the Date Picker The Date Picker screenshot below is a graphical calendar in Authentic View for enter
145. The only input required is the SPS file e The XSLT for HTML file is generated from the SPS StyleVisionBatch v Test sps OutXSLT Test xslt HTML output HTML output is obtained by transforming an XML file with an XSLT stylesheet The XML file may be the Working XML File assigned in the SPS or may be specified on the command line The XSLT file may be that generated from the SPS or may be specified on the command line e Working XML file in SPS transformed with XSLT stylesheet generated from SPS StyleVisionBatch v Test sps OutHTML Test html e Specified XML file transformed with XSLT stylesheet generated from SPS StyleVisionBatch v Test sps InpXML External xml OutHTML Test html e Working XML file in SPS transformed with specified XSLT stylesheet StyleVisionBatch v Test sps InpXSLT External xslt OutHTML Test html e Specified XML file transformed with specified XSLT stylesheet StyleVisionBatch v InpXML External xml InpXSLT External xslt OutHTML Test html StyleVisionBatch v Test sps InpXML External xml InpXSLT External xslt OutHTML Test html DB data XML XML Schema XSLT and output files can be generated from a DB based SPS The appropriate switches must be set for the respective outputs e XML Schema file from DB based SPS StyleVisionBatch v DB sps OutDBSchema DB xsd e XML data file from DB based SPS StyleVisionBatch v DB sps OutDBXML DB xml e XSLT for HTML file
146. The output produced by processing an XML document with an XSLT stylesheet Output files that can be generated by StyleVision would be HTML format Authentic View is not considered an output and is referred to separately as Authentic View XSLT stylesheets generated by StyleVision are also not considered output and are referred to separately as XSLT stylesheets Items that originate in the SPS and not in XML data sources Static items may be text tables and lists also images hyperlinks and bookmarks when the URIs are static An SPS component can be i a schema node for example an element node ii a static SPS component such as an Auto Calculation or a text string or iii a predefined format represented in the SPS by its start and end tags Defined loosely as a set of instructions for processing a node or group of nodes A Template XML File is assigned to an SPS in StyleVision It is an XML file that provides the starting data of a new XML document created with a given SPS when that SPS is opened in Authentic View The Template XML File must be conformant with the schema on which the SPS is based A Working XML File is an XML file that is assigned to an SPS in StyleVision in order to preview the Authentic View and output of the XML document in StyleVision Without a Working XML File the SPS in StyleVision will not have any dynamic XML data to process If the SPS is based on a schema that has more than one global element ther
147. Vision User Manual 276 Authentic View Editing in Authentic View Defining Entities You can define entities for use in Authentic View whether your document is based on a DTD or an XML Schema Once defined these entities are displayed in the Entities Entry Helper and in the Insert Entity submenu of the context menu When you double click on an entity in the Entities Entry Helper that entity is inserted at the cursor insertion point An entity is useful if you will be using a text string XML fragment or some other external resource in multiple locations in your document You define the entity which is basically a short name that stands in for the required data in the Define Entities dialog After defining an entity you can use it at multiple locations in your document This helps you save time and greatly enhances maintenance There are two broad types of entities you can use in your document a parsed entity which is XML data either a text string or a fragment of an XML document or an unparsed entity which is non XML data such as a binary file usually a graphic sound or multimedia object Each entity has a name and a value In the case of parsed entities the entity is a placeholder for the XML data The value of the entity is either the XML data itself or a URI that points to a xm1 file that contains the XML data In the case of unparsed entities the value of the entity is a URI that points to the non XML data file To defi
148. Working with Databases E Data Link Properties q x Provider Connection Advanced Al Specify the following to connect to SOL Server data 1 Select or enter a server name TS SQL x Refresh 2 Enter information to log on to the server Use Windows NT Integrated security C Use a specific user name and password Username E P aAsSsSwWor d i inn T Blank password 7 Allow saving password Northwind v Attach a database file as a database name o Using the filename Test Connection Cancel Help 3 Enter the name of the server server log on information and the DB name all of which are user specific If for the log on information you enter a required password note that you must check Allow saving password to save the password in the connection string If a password is required it must be saved in the connection string Otherwise the connection will fail 4 Click Test Connection to test whether a connection can be successfully made with the connection string you have built If a password has been entered it will be used for testing the connection However the password will be saved in the connection string only if the Allow saving password option has been checked see Step 3 5 Ifthe connection test fails rebuild the connection string correctly If the connection test is successful click OK to complete The connection string you build is entered in the ADO Connection String dialog A
149. XML document that repeat They can be created for schema elements that have a substructure that is at least one child attribute or element Any element with a substructure repeats if there is more than one instance of it Each instance of the element would be a row in the dynamic table and all or some of its child elements or attributes would be the columns of the table A dynamic table s structure therefore reflects the content of the XML file and changes dynamically with the content XML tables An XML table is created by the Authentic View user as a data structure in the XML document The purpose of XML tables is to give the Authentic View user the option of inserting a table type data structure in the XML document This XML data structure can then be transformed to the table markup of the output format The data structure for an XML table must correspond to either the HTML or CALS table model One element in the XML document corresponds to the table element of the CALS or HTML table model and must have a substructure that corresponds to either the CALS or HTML table model An XML table can be inserted at any point in the XML document where it is allowed according to the schema An XML table is formatted after it is inserted in the XML document Shown below is the Authentic View of an XML table that corresponds to the HTML table model Name Phone John Merrimack 6517890 Joe Concord 16402387 Data that is entered into the
150. a Schema sources HO DB1 E Z Root elements g lt DB Addresses E Articles Customers E T All Global Elements Addresses E Articles Customers E DB Each top level table element may have an unlimited number of rows see screenshot below Each row corresponds to a record in the DB In the schema tree the rows are represented by a single Row element Each Row element has attributes which correspond to the fields of the table One of these attributes is generated by StyleVision for every row of every table AltovaRowStatus which holds the current status of the row added updated and or deleted The remaining attributes are the fields of the respective DB table Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH High Level Procedures Working with Databases 113 1 18 18 B S Schema sources HO DB1 E Z Root elements g DB E Addresses E Row AltovaRowStatus CustomerNr city State Street ziP E Articles E Row AltovaRowStatus Number Name SinglePrice Customers 4 T All Global Elements Note The structure of the generated XML Schema is as outlined above Whatever tables are selected during the connection step are included in the structure The construction of a DB Filter does not affect the structure of the XML Schema New DB Schema Structure The structure of the XML Schema generated from D
151. a StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Appendices XSLT Engine Information 377 12 1 XSLT Engine Information This section contains information about implementation specific features of the Altova XSLT 1 0 Engine and Altova XSLT 2 0 Engine _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 378 Appendices XSLT Engine Information XSLT 1 0 Engine Implementation Information The Altova XSLT 1 0 Engine is built into Altova s XMLSpy StyleVision Authentic and MapForce XML products It is also available in the free AltovaXML package The Altova XSLT 1 0 Engine implements and conforms to the World Wide Web Consortium s XSLT 1 0 Recommendation of 16 November 1999 and XPath 1 0 Recommendation of 16 November 1999 Limitations and implementation specific behavior are listed below Limitations e The xsl preserve space and xs1 strip space elements are not supported e When the method attribute of xsl output is set to HTML or if HTML output is selected by default then special characters in the XML or XSLT file are inserted in the HTML document directly as special characters they are not inserted as HTML character references in the output For instance the character 160 the decimal character reference for a non breaking space is not inserted as amp nbsp in the HTML code but directly as a non breaking space Implementation s handling of whitespace only nodes in source XML document The XML data and consequently the X
152. a and DB XML file When DB tables are loaded StyleVision generates and works with temporary XML Schema and XML data files based respectively on the DB structure and data e DB Filters Filtering DB Data DB data that is loaded into the temporary XML file can be filtered e SPS Design Features for DB In the SPS special DB functionality such as DB controls and DB Queries are available e Generating Output Files A wide range of DB report related files can be generated by StyleVision Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH High Level Procedures Working with Databases 103 DBs and StyleVision In StyleVision you can create DB based SPSs These stylesheets enable you to do two things e Edit DBs in Authentic View and e Generate reports from DBs After you have created the SPS you can view reports in StyleVision and generate report files in HTML format You can also save the following DB related XML files that StyleVision generates XML Schema based on DB structure XML file having structure defined in the generated schema and content from the DB SPS that you design and which is based on the generated schema XSLT stylesheet for HTML output based on design of SPS HTML output The saved XML file can then be processed with the required XSLT stylesheet s This provides more flexible report generating capabilities DB Filter Save DB Non editable temp XML file generated from DB Altova StyleVision DB
153. a convenient package that will install the application together with all sample files and the onscreen help Any person that receives the product from you is also automatically entitled to a 30 day evaluation period After the expiration of this period any other user must also purchase a license in order to be able to continue using the product For further details please refer to the End User License Agreement at the end of this section Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Appendices License Information 407 License Metering Your Altova product has a built in license metering module that helps you avoid any unintentional violation of the End User License Agreement Your product is licensed either as a single user or multi user installation and the license metering module makes sure that no more than the licensed number of users use the application concurrently This license metering technology uses your local area network LAN to communicate between instances of the application running on different computers Single license When the application starts up it sends a short broadcast datagram to find any other instance of the product running on another computer in the same network segment If it doesn t get any response it will open a port for listening to other instances of the application Other than that it will not attempt to communicate over a network If you are not connected to a LAN or are using dial up connec
154. a from a Template XML File if any is associated with the SPS is opened in Authentic View Adding folders and SPS files to the tabbed list in the Create a New Document dialog You can add your own SPS files to the tabbed list in the Create a New Document dialog Do this by copying moving the folders containing the SPS files into the sps Template folder within the XMLSpy or Authentic Desktop application folder The added folder will then be displayed as _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 348 Reference Authentic Menu a tab in the Create a New Document dialog The SPS files which are in the folder will be displayed in the tab for that folder Unassigning the Template XML File Open the SPS in an XML editor application such as XMLSpy or in a plain text editor such as Notepad The root element of the StyleVision Power Stylesheet is lt structure gt Delete the contents of the templatexml file attribute of structure so that the attribute has an empty value The start tag of the structure element should now look something like this lt structure version 2 schemafile test xsd workingxmlfile templatexmlfile gt Save the SPS The Template XML File is now unassigned Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Reference Authentic Menu 349 Auto Add Date Picker This is a toggle command that switches the Auto Add Date Picker feature on and off When the Auto Add Date Picker feature is ON any xs
155. about defining and editing a style s property values see Setting CSS Property Values The style properties can be displayed in three possible views These views and how to switch between them are described in Views of Property Definitions To delete a global style select the style and click the Reset button in the Style Repository toolbar Changing the precedence of global styles Global styles that are assigned in the Style Repository window are placed as CSS rules in the html head style element In the HTML file they would look something like this lt html gt lt head gt lt style gt lt le h1 color blue font size 16pt h2 color blue font size 14pt main color green gt lt style gt lt head gt lt body gt lt html gt The order in which the global styles are listed in Authentic View and the HTML document corresponds to the order in which they are listed in the Global tree of the Style Repository The order in Authentic View and the HTML document has significance If two selectors select the same node then the selector which occurs lower down the list of global styles has precedence For example in the HTML document having the partial listing given above if there were an element lt h1 class main gt then two global styles match this element that with the n1 selector and that with the main selector The color property of main selector will apply because it occurs after the n1 selector in the
156. aeeecsssaeeeesenaes 314 11 4 4 Edit Stylesheet Parameters ccccceescsssceseeeeeeeeeeseeeseeceecsaecnseceaeeeaeenaeens 315 VAS View M Cn eay sv csvesccacdedan iietoaceendacadenes ena Gaaensccadaisvaesabacsdtedas sie ER EEE 316 11 5 1 Toolbars and Status Bar cccccccesccessceeeceeseeeseeseeeseeeeeceecaeeneeeeseeneeeaeees 317 11 5 2 Design Entry Helpers ccccceccccsccsssceesceeeeeeceseseesseesseeeseeeseecaecneeceaeseaeenaeees 318 116 mser Menu ennaa nasa Meee ea dese eee dies 319 lesk AMMAR Cs enar E E E EEE E teasers 320 11 6 2 Paragraph F rmat wi ccccscscccstesssscessaasaciacecsnccentecnseevracnsteteecsiagea sect ENEA 321 11 6 3 Bullets and Numbering 000 0 cee ceecccscceesceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecseecaaecsaecsaeeeaeeeaeenaeens 322 11 6 4 Horizontal Line 0 cee cecceseceseceseceseceseceeeeeeceseeeesseeeaeecseeeseecsaecaeceaeenaeenaeees 323 116 5 Contents siscccechceiscdicis scieis aleecasantcevaassdeccectaccaviassdedeaieacsiued dasdbadequccdassteieiaoetaes 324 116 6 Rest Of Content svisiscessescccsasesdccanseaseadoad i Losaeaaesdvadasna dsaaaabadenaatasenssateacess 325 V6 7 Date Picket sessasvsees de snivctacsvtesacessieneaecetpbaceseiecess a a i ne oeta 326 ILGS Pag cesdsaicesisevecainss Gidedassocaseseadeeasdeasaasandoad A A 327 T69 Bookmark ciernes a E E E E E OENE 328 1116 10 Hyperlink sicn E E E ORERE TEE 329 Altova StyleVision User Manual 11 7 11 8 11 9 11 10 11 11 11 12 12 12 1 1
157. afld dataformatas datasrc disabled maxlength For example with the input field selected the maxlength property in the input group of properties can be specified by double clicking in its Value field and entering a value Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Content Editing Procedures Using Data Entry Devices 151 Combo Boxes A combo box presents the Authentic View user with a list of options in a dropdown list The selected option is mapped to a value that is entered in the XML document The mapping of drop down list entry to XML value is specified in the SPS Mappings can be made in the Edit Combo Box dialog in one of three ways From the schema enumerations for the selected node In this case the visible entry in the dropdown list will be the same as the XML value From a list defined in the Edit Combo Box dialog You enter the visible entry and the corresponding XML value which may be different From the result sequence of an XPath expression relative to the current node The items in the result sequence are displayed as the entries of the drop down list and the list entry selected by the Authentic View user is entered as the value of the node This is a powerful method of using dynamic entries in the combo box The node that you create as the combo box is important For example say you have a NameList element that may contain an unlimited number of Name elements which themselves have First an
158. an double click an item in any of the three panes to insert that item Nodes inserted from the schema tree in the left hand pane are inserted relative to the context node if the Absolute XPath check box is unchecked or as an absolute expression starting from the document node if the Absolute XPath check box is checked 4 Click OK to finish inserting the condition The condition is created with one branch the test for which is the XPath expression you entered Editing the XPath expressions of branches Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Reference Insert Menu 333 To edit the XPath expression of a branch select the branch in Design View Then in the Properties entry helper select condition branch Authentic Click the Edit button for the XPath item This pops up the Edit XPath Expression dialog screenshot above in which you can edit the expression Click OK when done Adding branches changing the order of branches and deleting branches To add new branches change the order of branches and delete branches right click the required branch and select the relevant item from the context menu _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 334 Reference Table Menu 11 7 Table Menu The Table menu provides commands enabling you to insert a static table and to change the structure and properties of both static and dynamic tables You can edit table structure by appending inserting deleti
159. anual 398 Appendices Technical Data OS and Memory Requirements Operating System This software application is a 32 bit Windows application that runs on Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 and Windows XP Memory Since the software is written in C it does not require the overhead of a Java Runtime Environment and typically requires less memory than comparable Java based applications However each document is loaded fully into memory so as to parse it completely and to improve viewing and editing speed The memory requirement increases exponentially with the size of the document For example a 512kB document would typically require about 2MB of RAM whereas a 5MB document can consume up to 50MB Memory requirements are also influenced by the unlimited Undo history When repeatedly cutting and pasting large selections in large documents memory can rapidly be depleted Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Appendices Technical Data 399 Altova XML Parser When opening any XML document the application uses its built in validating parser the Altova XML Parser to check for well formedness validate the document against a schema if specified and build trees and Infosets The Altova XML Parser is also used to provide intelligent editing help while you edit documents and to dynamically display any validation error that may occur The built in Altova XML Parser implements the Final Recommendation of the W3C s XML Schema sp
160. are No other network use is permitted including without limitation using the Software either directly or through commands data or instructions from or to a computer not part of your internal network for Internet or Web hosting services or by any user not licensed to use this copy of the Software through a valid license from Altova c Concurrent Use If you have licensed a Concurrent User version of the Software you may install the Software on any compatible computers up to ten 10 times the Permitted Number of users provided that only the Permitted Number of users actually use the Software at the same time The Permitted Number of concurrent users shall be delineated at such time as you elect to purchase the Software licenses d Backup and Archival Copies You may make one backup and one archival copy of the Software provided your backup and archival copies are not installed or used on any computer and further provided that all such copies shall bear the original and unmodified copyright patent and other intellectual property markings that appear on or in the Software You may not transfer the rights to a backup or archival copy unless you transfer all rights in the Software as provided under Section 3 e Home Use You as the primary user of the computer on which the Software is installed may also install the Software on one of your home computers for your use However the Software may not be used on your home computer at the same time
161. are organized into groups In this view the Property Definitions column is divided into three columns Group Attribute and Value All the available property groups are displayed in the Group column When a group is selected the properties of that group are displayed in the Attribute column If a value for a property is defined the value appears in the Value column List All E amp I All properties of all groups are listed in a single alphabetically ordered list The Attribute column is listed first followed by the Group column and then the Value column List Non Empty Esl Only properties that have values defined are listed The columns are ordered from left to right as follows Attribute Group and Value In this view it will not be possible to define a value for a new property because no undefined property is listed However this is a quick way to see all the defined properties for the selected component type and the displayed properties can be edited Views can also be changed by right clicking any item in the Property Definitions column selecting View Mode and then the required view _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 40 User Interface Design Entry Helpers Reset toolbar icon _ Clicking the Reset icon resets the value of the selected property to its default Components and their property groups The availability of property groups is context sensitive What property groups are available depends on w
162. arsacnteatesncecteseeteateeasactes 22 41 2 Anthenti ViGw s scccvsscescshsicgeacaads ccadaseadsauevsresishaseccasattaddanaeasdasssvaseassasoveanaeaniease 23 41 3 Outp t VIEWS ccsiesssteste deecsacettededidaccbedeeelediaeddagevdebidadeastdageadatacedesed iaucanettbudeasd 25 Design Entry Helpers 00 ecceeceessessceessecssecsseceseceseesseesseessneseneeeaeecaaeeaaecaaecsaecaecnaeesaeenes 27 ADA SCHEMA SOULCES sesesisichacdas ccsvassscdiddesdeneas scoehaesdedeges Gichucetaeediessdseducrsedeanes ects 30 ADD DOSISM VTS eerror eri EE E E A VETERE EEREN EEE 33 42 3 Style Repository sei ccislcvcccccctecassdeasecsarted decscersssteasveadeteavacsdtinteuaccncasiwenveasscess 36 ADA POPC CS ics sicssceacccee ces E a E 39 AD S OSLYIES st nicitisahnieiineah nidiiniad nna la eeoeanes Meee 43 Quick Start Tutorial 46 Creating and Setting Up a New SPS 0 eeceecceccccesseeseeesceeseeeeecaecesecnaeceaeeeeeseeeeeaeenseennes 47 Inserting Dynamic Content from XML Source ccecccecsseeseessecsseesecssecssecnecnteesseenes 50 Inserting Static Content aoeeoe rinrin aaa aR EE ERE EAR 56 Formatting the Content ressieyra a AEE ER 6l Using Auto Calculations casseria siapa E E 67 Using ConditiOns ssscssianos inen ia aa E EE E eens 70 Using Global Templates and Rest of Contents ssseseeseeeseeeeeeeeeeseseerressrsrerssesrersns TI Altova StyleVision User Manual 5 8 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 17 2 Phats Ai ena a EE AEA TE EAEE 81 High Level P
163. at is applied for each child element in this case will be either a global template if one is defined for that element or the default template for elements which simply outputs text of text only elements and applies templates to child elements For example consider an element book which contains the child elements title author isbn and pubdate If the definition of book specifies that only the title child element be output then none of the other child elements author isbn and pubdate will be output when this definition is processed If however the definition of book includes the rest of contents placeholder after the definition for the title element then for each of the other child elements author isbn and pubdate a global template if one exists for that element or the default template for elements will be applied Data entry devices In order to aid the Authentic View user edit the XML document correctly and enter valid data data entry devices can be used in the design You can assign any of the following data entry devices to a node e Input fields single line or multi line ETNE ontent e Combo boxes cation Us e Check boxes Model gt lt Model e Buttons Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Reference Design View 295 Brand gt C Brand These tags can be collapsed and expanded by double clicking an expanded and the collapsed tag respectively For a detailed description o
164. at of the corresponding DB field otherwise the expression will evaluate to FALSE For example if a criteria for a field of the date datatype in an MS Access DB has an expression StartDate 25 05 2004 the expression will evaluate to FALSE because the date datatype Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH High Level Procedures Working with Databases 117 in an MS Access DB has a format of YYYY MM DD Using parameters with DB Filters You can also enter the name of a parameter as the value of an expression This causes the parameter to be called and its value to be used as the value of that expression The parameter you enter here can be a parameter that has already been declared for the stylesheet or it can be a parameter that you declare subsequently Parameters are useful if you wish to use a single value in multiple expressions or if you wish to pass a value to a parameter from the command line See StyleVision from the command line for details To enter the name of a parameter as the value of an expression type into the value input field followed without any intervening space by the name of the parameter If the parameter has already been declared see Parameters then the entry will be colored green If the parameter has not been declared the entry will be red and you must declare it Declaring parameters from the Edit DB Filter dialog To access the Edit Parameters dialog in order to declare parameters
165. atabase Filters as first character in value signifies parameter Append AND Append OR Delete Parameters 4 Enter the expression for the criterion An expression consists of i a field name available from the associated combo box ii an operator available from the associated combo box and iii a value to be entered directly For details of how to construct expressions see the Expressions in criteria section below 5 If you wish to add another criterion click the Append AND or Append OR button according to which logical operator AND or OR you wish to use to join the two criteria Then add the new criterion For details about the logical operators see the section Re ordering criteria in DB Filters Expressions in criteria Expressions in DB Filter criteria consist of a field name an operator and a value The available field names are the child elements of the selected top level data table the names of these fields are listed in a combo box see screenshot above The operators you can use are listed below LIKE NOT LIKE IS NULL NOT NULL Equal to Not equal to Less than Less than or Greater than Greater than Phonetically Phonetically Is empty Is not empty equal to or equal to alike not alike If IS NULL Or NOT NULL is selected the Value field is disabled Values must be entered without quotes or any other delimiter Values must also have the same formatting as th
166. ate picker ensures that dates are entered in the correct XML Schema format Furthermore dates can be manipulated and formatted as required e Parameters Parameters are declared at the global SPS level with a default value These values can then be overridden at runtime by values passed to the stylesheet from the command line e Unparsed Entity URIs URIs can be stored in unparsed entities in the DTD on which an XML document is based The Unparsed Entity URI feature enables images and hyperlinks to use these URIs as target URIs e Using Scripts StyleVision contains a JavaScript Editor in which JavaScript functions can be defined These functions are then available for use as event handlers anywhere within the SPS and will take effect in the output HTML document Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Additional Editing Procedures Authentic Node Properties 215 9 1 Authentic Node Properties Authentic node properties are properties you set for the display of a node in Authentic View For example a node can be displayed with XML markup tags be defined to be non editable and or to have user information displayed when the cursor is placed over the node Authentic node properties can be set on various SPS components What properties are available for a component depends upon the type of component it is To assign Authentic node properties select the required component in the design Then in the Authentic group of proper
167. atic name that you give It does not come dynamically from the XML document You cannot assign a dynamic name to a bookmark If there are more bookmarks in the design they are displayed in the Other Bookmarks on This Page window Insert Bookmark x Bookmark name top_of_page Other bookmarks on this page E Goto Cancel 4 Click OK The bookmark is defined After a bookmark has been created it can be linked to by a hyperlink Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Content Editing Procedures Bookmarks and Hyperlinks 179 Modifying a bookmark After a bookmark has been created its name can be modified via the Edit Bookmarks dialog This dialog is accessed as follows 1 Select the bookmark in the design 2 Inthe Properties entry helper click the Edit button of the 1ink property screenshot below in the Authentic group of properties This pops up the Edit Bookmarks dialog Authentic link top_of_page common target event user Info HTML 3 Inthe Other Bookmarks pane of the dialog select the bookmark and in the text input field enter a new name Deleting a bookmark To delete a bookmark select it in the design and press the Delete key _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 180 Content Editing Procedures Bookmarks and Hyperlinks Defining Hyperlinks Hyperlinks can be created around SPS components such as text or images The targets of hyperlinks can be i book
168. ation of logo nanonull gif Last Updated 2003 09 01 A To display the Date Picker see screenshot click the Date Picker icon Location of logo nanonull gif Last Updated 2003 09 01 M September p q AME Nanonull Inc 4 Location us gt To select a date click on the desired date month or year The date is entered in the XML document and the date in the display is modified accordingly You can also enter a time zone if this is required Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Authentic View Editing in Authentic View 275 Text Entry For date fields that do not have a Date Picker see screenshot you can edit the date directly by typing in the new value Please note When editing a date you must not change its format Invoice Number 001 2006 03 10 Customer The ABC Company Invoice Amount 40 00 If you edit a date and change it such that it is out of the valid range for dates the date turns red to alert you to the error If you place the mouse cursor over the invalid date an error message appears see screenshot Invoice Number 001 2006 03 32 Customer ERROR Invalid value for datatype date in element Invoice AnlnvoiceD ate If you try to change the format of the date the date turns red to alert you to the error see screenshot Invoice Number 001 2006 03 10 Customer The ABC Company Invoice Amount 40 00 _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova Style
169. ave created e an XML data file with a structure based on the schema and content for schema nodes that are created with the content placeholder in the SPS design e aSPS sps file and or XSLT stylesheet based on your design _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 126 High Level Procedures HTML Import Creating New SPS via HTML Import To create a new SPS file from an HTML document do the following 1 Select the menu command File New New from HTML File 2 Inthe Open dialog that pops up browse for the HTML file you wish to import Select it and click Open A new SPS document is created The document is displayed in Design View and is marked up with the predefined HTML formats available in StyleVision screenshot below WA Sample Article p gt This is a simple article marked up in HTML It is the example HTML document used to demonstrate how STYLEVISION can generate schema files KML files and stylesheets from an HTML document It contains headlines paragraphs two lists a table an image a hyperlink horizontal rules and inline italics A number of these elements have attributes lt p p gt It is important to note that the HTML to XML conversion involves two parallel processes lt p e Creation of a schema tree e Design of a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet SPS Note that the HTML document is displayed within the main template There is no global template In the Schema Sources entry help
170. ay encounter XML documents that contain unprintable characters because the font you have selected does not contain the required glyphs Therefore it can sometimes be very useful to have a font that covers the entire Unicode range especially when editing XML documents from all over the world The most universal font we have encountered is a typeface called Arial Unicode MS that has been created by Agfa Monotype for Microsoft This font contains over 50 000 glyphs and covers the entire set of characters specified by the Unicode 2 1 standard It needs 23MB and is included with Microsoft Office 2000 We highly recommend that you install this font on your system and use it with the application if you are often editing documents in different writing systems This font is not installed with the Typical setting of the Microsoft Office setup program but you can choose the Custom Setup option to install this font Inthe Examples folder in your application folder you will also find a new XHTML file called Unicode UTF8 htm1 that contains the sentence When the world wants to talk it speaks Unicode in many different languages Wenn die Welt miteinander spricht spricht sie Unicode and writing systems tt 3 ACTES Unicode CY 9 this line has been adopted from the 10th Unicode conference in 1997 and is a beautiful illustration of the importance of Unicode for the XML standard Opening this file will give you a quick impression on what is possibl
171. b union of nod string name of a cor z shrine name nf the Absolute XPath gt E lt Office 2 In the Expression pane enter the XPath expression for the Auto Calculation via the keyboard Alternatively enter the expression by double clicking nodes operators and or functions in the entry helper panes of the dialog It is important to be aware of the context node at the insertion point the context node is highlighted in the schema sources tree when the dialog pops up If you have selected XSLT 1 0 as the version of the XSLT language for your SPS then you must use XPath 1 0 expressions if you have selected XSLT 2 0 then you must use XPath 2 0 expressions 3 Optionally if you wish to copy the value of the Auto Calculation to a node in the XML document you can select that node via an XPath expression How to update nodes with the result of the Auto Calculation is described in the section Updating Nodes with Auto Calculations Click the OK button finish In the Design tab the Auto Calculation symbol is displayed To see the result of the Auto Calculation change to Authentic View or an Output View Editing Auto Calculations To edit the XPath expression of the Auto Calculation select the Auto Calculation and in the Properties entry helper click the Edit button of the xPath property in the Authentic group of properties screenshot below This pops up the Edit XPath Expression dialog screenshot Altova StyleVis
172. bal elements in the schema appear in the All Global Elements list in the Schema Sources entry helper To create a Text State icon do the following 1 Define a global template for the global element that is to get a Text State icon The formatting that you define for the global template will be applied to text when the Authentic View user clicks the Text State icon If the element you require is not available as a global element you must make it a global element if you wish to use this feature 2 Select the menu option Authentic Text State Icons This opens the Text State Icons dialog box 3 Click the Append button to add a new Text State icon 4 Inthe Element name field enter the name of the element for which you wish to create the Text State icon and click OK Text State Icons x In order to make user editing experience in AUTHENTIC more comfortable you can define in this dialog toolbar buttons for specific Schema elements which modify text styles like bold italic Cancel Bitmap file bold bmp 5 Press Tab or double click in the Bitmap file column and enter the name of the icon image that you wish to have displayed in the Authentic View toolbar Text State Icons i x In order to make user editing experience in AUTHENTIC more comfortable you can define in this dialog toolbar buttons for specific Schema elements which modify text styles like bold italic Cancel Bitmap file bold bmp Lp svsese
173. ble editing icons are described in the User Reference in the section titled XML Table Icons Moving among cells in the table To move among cells in the XML table use the Up Down Right and Left arrow keys Entering data in a cell To enter data in a cell place the cursor in the cell and type in the data Formatting text Text in an XML table as with other text in the XML document must be formatted using XML elements or attributes To add an element highlight the text and double click the required element in the Elements Entry Helper To specify an attribute value place the cursor within the text fragment and enter the required attribute value in the Attributes Entry Helper After formatting the header text bold your table will look like this Telephone Office Home The text above was formatted by highlighting the text and double clicking the element strong for which a global template exists that specifies bold as the font weight The text formatting becomes immediately visible _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 262 Authentic View Editing in Authentic View Please note For text formatting to be displayed in Authentic View a global template with the required text formatting must have been created in StyleVision for the element in question Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Authentic View Editing in Authentic View 263 XML Table Editing Icons The comma
174. by double clicking the required node If the Absolute XPath check box is not checked the selected node will be inserted with a location path expression that is relative to the context node For example in the screenshot above the Location element which is a child of the Office element the context node has been inserted with a location path that is relative to the context node that is aS Location If the Absolute XPath check box were checked the Location node would have been inserted as OrgChart Office Location Inserting XPath operators The Select Operator pane automatically lists XPath 1 0 or XPath 2 0 operators according to whether XSLT 1 0 or XSLT 2 0 has been selected as the XSLT version for the SPS To insert an operator in the XPath expression double click the required operator Inserting XPath functions The Select Function pane screenshot below is at the right of the Edit XPath Expression dialog and automatically lists XPath 1 0 or XPath 2 0 functions according to whether XSLT 1 0 or XSLT 2 0 has been selected as the XSLT version for the SPS Each function is listed with its signature If a function has more than one signature that function is listed as many times as the number of signatures See adjust date to timezone in screenshot below Arguments in a signature are separated by commas and arguments can have an occurrence indicators indicates a sequence of zero or one items of the specified type indicates a seq
175. c View data is entered directly into table cells This data is stored as the content of the corresponding XML table element e The formatting properties of an XML table are assigned in Authentic View Note that XSLT stylesheets generated with StyleVision will not contain XML tables because no template for the XML table is automatically included in the SPS Summary for designer From the document designer s perspective the following points should be noted e An SPS table occurs in the XML document at a location determined by the designer of the document not the user of Authentic View The structure and formatting of SPS tables are specified by the designer of the SPS in StyleVision e The location structure and formatting of XML tables are specified by the user of Authentic View The user may insert an XML table wherever this is allowed by the schema remember the table element corresponds to an element in the schema Note also that the table format of XML tables is available only in Authentic View The HTML output will not automatically display a table format You will have to create your own template s to match the table element and manually add these to the generated XSLT stylesheets _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 162 Content Editing Procedures Working with Tables Creating Static Tables To insert a static table click Table Insert table or the ES icon The following dialog appears xi ry m3 Colum
176. ccording to the referenced schema a prompt of type add elemenv attribute is displayed Title add Title Clicking the prompt adds the element and places the cursor for data entry If there are multiple optional nodes the prompt add is displayed Clicking the prompt displays a menu of the optional nodes Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Authentic View Interface 251 Authentic View entry helpers There are three entry helpers in Authentic View for Elements Attributes and Entities They are displayed as windows down the right side of the Authentic View interface Elements IV Show XML tree OrgChart i Office Desc para italic Attributes ax italic i xsitype Entities The Elements and Attributes Entry Helpers are context sensitive i e what appears in the entry helper depends on where the cursor is in the document The entities displayed in the Entities Entry Helper are not context sensitive all entities allowed for the document are displayed no matter where the cursor is Each of the entry helpers is described separately below Elements Entry Helper The Elements Entry Helper consists of two parts e The upper part containing an XML tree that can be toggled on and off using the Show XML tree check box The XML tree shows the ancestors up to the document s root element for the current element When you click on an element in the XML tree elements corresponding
177. ccs deat vendeserssters 292 WL Dell Symbols erri ne sade tveesaedexstsieedvsdssetvsiesavedesu datnets eats devteesizetecess 293 112 2 XPath Dialogs ianei EA cans EE AEE A 297 S Ele Menine a E E E N taties 300 1131 NeW eemeceimeediie dna a a a E aS 301 1132 Open ClOSG aii rvencecedesniectevstescessiek cisudtaacetaiacaaten ites a i i EE Ea EEAS 302 11 3 3 Save Design Design As Al oo cecceccecsccsscesceeeeeeeeeseeceeceecaaecnaeenaeeeaeenaeens 303 11 3 4 Save Authentic XML Data ceeccecceescseeceeeeeeseesseeeseeeseeeeeceeeneeenaeenaeenaeens 304 11 3 5 Save Generated Files ccccsccsscsccscceeccseccsescseecoctcssnecsnscsncssnescetscsuccsecenanees 305 11 3 6 Edit Schema Definition in XMLSpy cecceccceeseeseeeseeeseeeseecnaeeeaeeeeeeseens 306 TL37 EMGOCIN Gives cevessnecendeinsdctesacabenwcasaceusacbactacescasvevsdctve scagtanedicedibecst ENE NERE KEAS 307 11 3 8 Print Preview Print cccceccccccccececssssscescescessesseeeeescessessesssessssceueeesesseasens 308 11 3 9 Most Recently Used Files Exit ccccceccceccceeseeeseeeseeeseeeseecseeeneeeneeeeenaeees 309 SUAS Git A tha co oes eh es cee cnt dacs ssc cee cack av cade votes sesh E E teens E 310 11 4 1 Undo Redo Select All oc ececcscccccccsssessssessecesccesesseeseeseseeeserseaeess 311 11 4 2 Find Find Next Replace ccccccccsccsssceeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeseeeseecaeecsaecnaeeeaeenaeenaeees 312 11 4 3 Edit DB Filter Clear DB Filter ccc cccccccccsesccecssseeeecss
178. ce 10 00 state CA date 2004 06 24 Cancel 2 Click Append or Insert E 3 Type in the name and value of the parameter in the appropriate fields Please note The Edit Parameters dialog contains all the parameters that have been defined for the stylesheet While it is an error to use an undeclared parameter in the StyleVision Power Stylesheet it is not an error to declare a parameter and not use it Using parameters in queries To enter the name of a parameter as the value of an expression e Type into the value input field followed without any intervening space by the name of the parameter in the Edit Database Query dialog Please note If the parameter has already been declared then the entry will be colored green If the parameter has not been declared the entry will be red and you must declare it Re ordering criteria in DB Queries The logical structure of the DB Query and the relationship between any two criteria or sets of criteria is indicated graphically Each level of the logical structure is indicated by a square bracket Two adjacent criteria or sets of criteria indicate the AND operator whereas if two criteria are separated by the word or then the OR operator is indicated The criteria are also appropriately indented to provide a clear overview of the logical structure of the DB Query _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 270 Authentic View Editing in Authentic View Edit Database Query
179. ce otherwise Located before number prefix after number suffix gt Minus symbol if negative space otherwise Number and sign adjacent Left aligned prefix right aligned suffix foe fae ea lt gt Minus symbol left aligned if negative space otherwise Number right aligned ae La cae ines oe ae Plus or minus sign always located adjacent to number before number prefix after number suffix gt Plus or minus sign always located adjacent to number left aligned prefix right aligned suffix Plus or minus sign always left aligned number right aligned Parentheses if negative space otherwise Adjacent to number gt Parentheses if negative space otherwise Adjacent to number Left aligned Parentheses if negative space otherwise Left parentheses left aligned number and right parentheses adjacent and right aligned fe po o Parentheses if negative nothing otherwise Adjacent to number al Ea od th Extendable number of digits to left prefix or to right suffix eo p fi TH orenean ENET No Ro o _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 226 Additional Editing Procedures Input Formatting Formatting Numeric Datatypes Field options Field options enable advanced modifications to be made to fields The following options are available option Explanation O O O Read XML only no editing allowed Note on Base Year When using short year
180. cedure 91 Generated Files In StyleVision XSLT stylesheets and output files can be generated using the File Save Generated Files command or the command line utility styleVisionBatch exe The following files can be generated e XSLT stylesheets based on the SPS design e Output files generated by processing the Working XML File assigned in the SPS with the XSLT stylesheets generated from the SPS The command line utility offers the option of specifying XML files other than the Working XML File as the XML input The markup for the output is contained in the SPS The data for the output is contained in the XML document or DB It is the XSLT stylesheet that brings markup and data together in the output Both the XSLT stylesheets as well as the actual output can be previewed in StyleVision in the Output Views Given below are important points to note about the generated documents e HTML output and stylesheets 1 The formatting and layout of the generated HTML document will be identical to the HTML Preview of StyleVision and near identical to the Authentic View of the XML document 2 Data input devices text input fields check boxes etc in the HTML file do not allow input These data input devices are intended for XML data input in Authentic View and though they are translated unchanged into the graphical HTML equivalents they cannot be used for data entry in the HTML document _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manua
181. cker e Dates are entered or modified by typing in the value The method the Authentic View user will use is defined in the SPS Both methods are described in the two sub sections of this section Note on date formats In the XML document dates can be stored in one of several date datatypes Each of these datatypes requires that the date be stored in a particular lexical format in order for the XML document to be valid For example the xs date datatype requires a lexical format of YYyY MM pp If the date in an xs date node is entered in anything other than this format then the XML document will be invalid In order to ensure that the date is entered in the correct format the SPS designer can include the graphical Date Picker in the design This would ensure that the date selected in the Date Picker is entered in the correct lexical format If there is no Date Picker the Authentic View should take care to enter the date in the correct lexical format Validating the XML document could provide useful tips about the required lexical format _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 274 Authentic View Editing in Authentic View Date Picker The Date Picker is a graphical calendar used to enter dates in a standard format into the XML document Having a standard format is important for the processing of data in the document The Date Picker icon appears near the date field it modifies see screenshot Organization Chart Loc
182. cking Insert Date Picker when the cursor is at the desired location within the xs date Of xs dateTime node in the SPS This command can be accessed via the Insert menu or via the context menu when the cursor is within the xs date or xs dateTime node When the Date Picker is inserted the Date Picker icon appears at that location To delete a Date Picker use the Delete or Backspace buttons Using the Date Picker in Authentic View In Authentic View the Date Picker appears as an icon screenshot below Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Additional Editing Procedures Working with Dates 229 Organization Chart Location of logo nanonull gif Last Updated 2003 09 01 A To modify the date click the icon This pops up the Date Picker screenshot below To enter a new date select the required date in the Date Picker The date will be entered in the correct lexical format according to that node s datatype Location of logo nanonull gif Last Updated 2003 09 01 4 September pb 4 2003179 Nanonull Inc Location us gt To enter a timezone click the Timezone button which is set to a default of No Timezone The timezone will be entered in the lexical format appropriate to the node s datatype screenshot below Location of logo nanonull gif Last Updated 2003 09 01 01 00 4 September_p q 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Nanonull Inc 22 23 24 25 26 27 2 2930 1 23 4 5
183. color property values screenshot below _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 64 Quick Start Tutorial Formatting the Content 1B Bo V aBel S fed External E Global selector header background color background attachment common background color E details background image effects background position background repeat IE color ai ee ee o numbering paged media text ul Where the global style rule defines a property that is defined in the external stylesheet the color property the property value in the global rule takes precedence In the HTML preview the contents of the headline will therefore be green Other property definitions from the external stylesheet not over ridden by a property in a global style rule are retained in this case font family and font weight NanoNull Inc Launches Version 2 0 of NanoPower 2006 04 01 Boston USA Nanonull Inc today launched version 2 0 of its market leading NanoPower line of hardware and software The highlights of the new version of NanoPower are improved chip design capabilities in NanoSoft the software used to design computer chips and higher precision sand filtering processes in NanoMeld the hardware in which the transformation from sand to silicon chips is executed Source NewTech Online Defining local styles for multiple components at once Local styles can be defined for multiple components at once
184. creating and setting up the SPS shows you how to insert content in the SPS how to format the components of the SPS and how to use two powerful SPS features Auto Calculations and conditions Along the way you will get to know how to structure your output efficiently and how to use a variety of structural and presentation features Files required Files related to this Quick Start tutorial are in the folder st yleVision2006 Examples Tutorials e QuickStart xsd the XML Schema file on which the SPS is based e QuickStart xml the Working XML File which is the source of the data displayed in the output previews e QuickStart sps which is the finished SPS file you can compare the SPS file you create with this file e QuickStart css which is the external CSS stylesheet used in the tutorial e NewsItems BMP an image file that is used in the SPS Doing the tutorial It is best to start at the beginning of the tutorial and work your way through the sections Also you should open the XSD and XML files before starting the tutorial and take a look at their structure and contents Keep the XSD and XML files open while doing the tutorial so that you can refer to them Save your SPS document with a name other than QuickStart sps so that you do not overwrite the supplied SPS file And of course remember to save after successfully completing every part Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Quick Start Tutorial Creating
185. cript Editor Design vf Authentic Jarm Doct sps Doezss JD Design View can also be switched to a JavaScript Editor in which you can create and edit JavaScript functions which then become available in the GUI for use in the SPS To switch to the JavaScript Editor click the dropdown button in the Design tab see illustration and select JavaScript from the dropdown menu To switch back to Design View click the dropdown button in the JavaScript tab and select Design from the dropdown menu Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH User Interface Main Window 23 Authentic View In the Authentic View tab of the Main Window you can view and edit the Working XML File in its Authentic View This view enables you i to see how your Authentic XML document will look and ii to test the Authentic View created by the SPS This is particularly useful if you wish to test the dynamic features of Authentic View For example you could test how Authentic View behaves when you e Add new elements and attributes e Add new paragraphs or table rows e Change values that affect conditional templates Main Window Active view of active document Design Authentic ATT Dectsps Doctaps J aD Authentic View and the Working XML File In order for Authentic View to be displayed a Working XML File must be assigned to the active SPS document This Working XML File must be valid according to the schema on which the S
186. ct contains many useful functions these are unrelated to the license metering technology _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 408 Appendices License Information Copyright All title and copyrights in this software product including but not limited to images photographs animations video audio music text and applets incorporated in the product in the accompanying printed materials and in any copies of these printed materials are owned by Altova GmbH or the respective supplier This software product is protected by copyright laws and international treaty provisions This software product 1998 2006 Altova GmbH All rights reserved The Sentry Spelling Checker Engine 2000 Wintertree Software Inc STLport 1999 2000 Boris Fomitchev 1994 Hewlett Packard Company 1996 1997 Silicon Graphics Computer Systems Inc 1997 Moscow Center for SPARC Technology Scintilla 1998 2002 Neil Hodgson lt neilh scintilla org gt ANTLR Copyright 1989 2005 by Terence Parr www antlr org All other names or trademarks are the property of their respective owners Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Appendices License Information 409 Altova End User License Agreement THIS IS A LEGAL DOCUMENT RETAIN FOR YOUR RECORDS ALTOVA END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT Licensor Altova GmbH Rudolfsplatz 13a 9 A 1010 Wien Austria Important Read Carefully Notice to User This End
187. ct edition that you have licensed which you may elect to purchase in addition to your Software license The Support Period hereinafter defined covered by such SMP shall be delineated at such time as you elect to purchase a SMP Your rights with respect to support and maintenance as well as your upgrade eligibility depend on your decision to purchase SMP and the level of SMP that you have purchased a If you have not purchased SMP you will receive the Software AS IS and will not receive any maintenance releases or updates However Altova at its option and in its sole discretion on a case by case basis may decide to offer maintenance releases to you as a courtesy but these maintenance releases will not include any new features in excess of the feature set at the time of your purchase of the Software In addition Altova will provide free technical support to you for thirty 30 days after the date of your purchase the Support Period for the purposes of this paragraph a and Altova in its sole discretion on a case by case basis may also provide free courtesy technical support during your thirty 30 day evaluation period Technical support is provided via a Web based support form only and there is no guaranteed response time b If you have purchased SMP then solely for the duration of its delineated Support Period you are eligible to receive the version of the Software edition that you have licensed and all maintenance releases and updates fo
188. culation will also be placed Use the Return key to add new lines and insert a horizontal line below the space you create see screenshot Main template Summary of News Total number of news items 2 Typein the static text Total number of news items as shown in the screenshot above 3 Apply local styling of your choice to the static text Do this as described in the section Formatting the Content 4 Place the cursor after the colon and select Insert Auto Calculation Value This pops up the Edit XPath Expression dialog screenshot below Alternatively you can right click and select the command in the context menu _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 68 Quick Start Tutorial Using Auto Calculations W Edit XPath expression x Expression count newsitem Select Schema Attribute or Element Select Operator Select Function Selection presswatch newsitems E E adjust date to timezone dal a hot elements adjust date to timezone dal E presswatch adjust dateT ime to timezon selection adjust dateT ime to timezon F adjust time to timezoneftime E K newsitems adjust time to timezoneftime newsitem avofanyAtomicT ype E team base uri nodes base uri T All Global Elements booleanfitem ojj ceiling numeric I Absolute XPath ail 5 Inthe schema tree note that the context node is newsitems which is highlighted Now in the Expressio
189. cumentation and the terms of this Software License Agreement are your property h Reverse Engineering Except and to the limited extent as may be otherwise specifically provided by applicable law in the European Union you may not reverse engineer decompile disassemble or otherwise attempt to discover the source code underlying ideas underlying user interface techniques or algorithms of the Software by any means whatsoever directly or indirectly or disclose any of the foregoing except to the extent you may be expressly permitted to decompile under applicable law in the European Union if it is essential to do so in order to achieve operability of the Software with another software program and you have first requested Altova to provide the information necessary to achieve such operability and Altova has not made such information available Altova has the right to impose reasonable conditions and to request a reasonable fee before providing such information Any information supplied by Altova or obtained by you as permitted hereunder may only be used by you for the purpose Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Appendices License Information 411 described herein and may not be disclosed to any third party or used to create any software which is substantially similar to the expression of the Software Requests for information from users in the European Union with respect to the above should be directed to the Altova Custom
190. d Last Children elements If you create the Name element as a combo box and select the Last Child element in the combo box then in Authentic View you will get as many combo boxes as there are Name elements and each combo box will have the Last child as its dropdown menu entry In order to get a single combo box with all the Last elements in the dropdown menu list you must create the single NameList element as the combo box and select the Last element in the XPath expression Accessing the Edit Combo Box dialog If you are creating a new combo box when you create the node as a combo box the Edit Combo Box dialog pops up To access the Edit Combo Box dialog afterwards do the following 1 2 3 Select the combo box in the design In the Properties entry helper select the Authentic group of properties see screenshot below lE Le Z Properties For Authentic additional validation combobox CONGR combobox event editable inherit HTML user Info Click the Edit button of the the combobox property This pops up the Edit Combo Box dialog Using the Edit Combo Box dialog The Edit Combo Box dialog is shown below _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 152 Content Editing Procedures Using Data Entry Devices Edit Combo Box f J for Element Location Use schema enumerations Cancel Use list of values C Use XPath expression p To define the entries and values
191. d by another by clicking the Edit button L and browsing for the required stylesheet The media to which an external CSS stylesheet is to be applied can be selected by pressing the dropdown box of the Media item of an external stylesheet and there selecting the required media from the list of options Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Presentation Procedures Working with CSS Styles 203 Defining CSS Styles Globally Global styles are defined for the entire SPS design in the Style Repository and are listed in the Style Repository under the Global heading They are passed to Authentic View and the HTML output document as CSS rules In the HTML document these CSS rules are written within the html head style element In the Style Repository a global style is a single CSS rule consisting of a selector and CSS properties for that selector Creating a global style therefore consists of two parts e Adding a new style and declaring the CSS selector for it e Defining CSS properties for the style or selector Adding a global style To add a global style to the SPS design do the following 1 InDesign View select the Global item in the Style Repository window screenshot below ENE o o Lit ft ay External Global 2 Click the Add button at the top left of the Style Repository toolbar see screenshot above A global style is inserted into the Global tree with a selector which selects all HTML ele
192. d by the Software and such use of any trademark does not give you any right of ownership in that trademark XMLSpy Authentic StyleVision MapForce Markup Your Mind Axad Nanonull and Altova are trademarks of Altova GmbH registered in numerous countries Unicode and the Unicode Logo are trademarks of Unicode Inc Windows Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows NT Windows 2000 and Windows XP are trademarks of Microsoft W3C CSS DOM MathML RDF XHTML XML and XSL are trademarks registered in numerous countries of the World Wide Web Consortium W3C marks of the W3C are registered and held by its host institutions MIT INRIA and Keio Except as expressly stated above this Software License Agreement does not grant you any intellectual property rights in the Software Notifications of claimed copyright infringement should be sent to Altova s copyright agent as further provided on the Altova Web Site LIMITED TRANSFER RIGHTS Notwithstanding the foregoing you may transfer all your rights to use the Software to another person or legal entity provided that a you also transfer each of this Software License Agreement the Software and all other software or hardware bundled or pre installed with the Software including all copies updates and prior versions and all copies of font software converted into other formats to such person or entity b you retain no copies including _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 412 Appendices
193. d entities If the SPS is DTD based and uses unparsed entities then for the dynamic part of an image address the URI declared as the value of the unparsed entity can be used For details of how to use unparsed entities see Unparsed Entity URIs Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Reference Insert Menu 321 Paragraph Format The Paragraph command inserts an HTML paragraph lt p gt element around the selected component A component is considered selected for this purpose when the entire node is selected by clicking either of its tags or when static text is selected If the cursor is placed within static text the paragraph element is inserted start and end tags at this point The Format command allows you to assign a predefined format to the selected node The available predefined formats can also be selected from the combo box in the toolbar _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 322 Reference Insert Menu Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering command allows you to create a list either static or dynamic The list items of a static list are entered in the SPS while those of dynamic lists are taken from sibling nodes in the XML document Clicking the Bullets and Numbering command pops up the Bullets and Numbering dialog screenshot below in which you select the required list item marker for example bullet circle or square Clicking OK creates the list with that type of list
194. d in Authentic View or a near equivalent Note that the data entry devices accept input to the XML document and therefore will not work in the HTML output General mechanism Given below is a list of the data entry devices available in StyleVision together with an explanation of how data is entered in the XML document for each device Data Entry Device Data in XML File Input Field Text Box Text entered by user Multiline Input Field Text entered by user Combo box User selection is mapped to a value Check box User selection is mapped to a value Radio button User selection is mapped to a value Button User selection is mapped to a value The text values entered in the input fields are entered directly into the XML document as XML content For the other data entry devices the Authentic View user s selection is mapped to a value StyleVision enables you to define the list of options the user will see and the XML value to which each option is mapped Typically you will define the options and their corresponding values in a dialog General usage To create a data entry device do the following 1 Drag a node from the Schema Sources window into Design View and drop it at the desired location 2 From the context menu that appears select the data entry device you wish to create the node as 3 For some data entry devices a dialog pops up In these cases enter the required information in the dialog and click OK To reopen and
195. d in StyleVision but must be created in Authentic View by the user XML tables can only be enabled in StyleVision Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Content Editing Procedures Working with Tables 163 Creating Dynamic Tables Creating a dynamic SPS table A dynamic SPS table is created by dragging an element from the XML tree into the Design window On dropping the element into the desired location the following context menu appears Create Contents Create Paragraph Create Table Create Bullets and Numbering Create Image Create Input Field Create Multiline Input Field Create Combo Box Create Check Box Create Radio Button Create Button Click Create Table This brings up the following dialog Create dynamic table i x foreach Person Table Growth Top Down Left Right m Header Footer IV Create Header IV Create Footer J Summary for Numeric fields r Display cells as Contents C Combo Box Field Multiline Field Check Box Radio Button Select attributes elements LeaveT otal LeaveUsed LeaveLeft Cancel The child elements and attributes of the element that has been dragged into the Design window are displayed In the Select attributes element list and can be created as columns of the table Deselect the child nodes that you do not want and select any attribute element you want to include as co
196. d to the temporary internal XML document and to the generated XML document The dynamic table option is available when the structure of all rows in the table are identical When created in the SPS the rows of the dynamic table are represented by a single row in the design because each row has the same structure The table data will be copied to the XML file The dynamic table can grow top down rows are arranged vertically relative to each other or left right rows become columns and extend from left to right If you indicate that the first row column is a header then i a header row containing the column headers as static text is included in the design and ii the schema element attribute nodes take the header texts as their Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH High Level Procedures HTML Import 131 6 names If the first row column is not indicated as a header then no header row is included in the design After you have selected the required option s click Convert to finish Converting a list to elements attributes To convert a list to schema nodes do the following 1 2 3 5 Select the HTML list by highlighting some text in it Drag it to the node in the schema tree as a sibling or child of which you want to create it Drop the node when the Create as Sibling symbol or Create as Child symbol appears In the context menu that now pops up screenshot below select the command C
197. date Or xs dateTime datatype element that is created as contents or as an input field will have the Date Picker automatically inserted within the element tags and after the contents placeholder or input field _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 350 Reference Authentic Menu Auto Add DB Controls This is a toggle command that switches the Auto Add DB Controls feature on and off When the Auto Add DB Controls is on then whenever a DB table element is dropped into the design the DB Controls panel shown below is inserted immediately before the Row child element of that DB table element The DB Controls panel enables the Authentic View user to navigate the rows of the DB table in Authentic View The first leftmost button navigates to the first record the second button navigates to the previous record the third button is the Goto button it pops up a dialog screenshot below that prompts you for the number of the record to which you wish to go the fourth button navigates to the next record and the fifth button navigates to the last record Go To Record OK Go to record fi of 8 Cancel When the Auto Add DB Controls toggle is turned off the DB Controls panel is not inserted when a DB table is dropped into the Design document Note You can manually insert navigation buttons by placing the cursor anywhere between the start and end tags of the DB table and selecting the required option from the Insert
198. del of a table element that follows the HTML model would not correspond with the CALS table model which is different Given below is a screenshot of the CALS HTML Table Properties dialog for the same schema as above with the table model type set to CALS Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Content Editing Procedures Working with Tables 169 x Schema lt ML1 F V Enable XML tables for this schema in Authentic Cancel Type CALS Description Default User defined Table element Column element Header element Cell with nested table entrytbl Column specification colspec Notice the following e The default CALS table elements that do not exist in the schema are colored red Those CALS table model elements that do exist in the table element s content model appear black including row e The entry element has been mapped to ce11 this causes both entry and ce11 to be displayed in black If you wish to use the CALS table model you should alter the schema to properly include the missing elements and attributes Once you have selected the appropriate table model click OK XML tables are now ready to be used in Authentic View Note The following general points about XML tables should be noted e The table element can only be inserted at locations in the XML document where the schema allows the table element e You as the person who designs the SPS only enables XML tables It is the Authentic View
199. dialog in which you _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 290 Reference Toolbars Table The Table toolbar contains commands to structure and format Static SPS Tables in Design View These commands are shown in the screenshot below which is that of the menu for adding and removing Table toolbar buttons Insert Table Delete Table Append Row Insert Row Delete Row Append Column Insert Column Delete Column Join Cell Right Join Cell Left Join Cell Above Join Cell Below Split Cell Horizontally Split Cell Vertically HEG View Cell Bounds Reset Toolbar Table operations The Insert Table button inserts a static table anywhere in the SPS design Placing the cursor in a static or dynamic table and clicking Delete Table deletes that table Row and Column operations Rows and columns in any SPS table static or dynamic canSPS be inserted appended or deleted with reference to the cursor location Rows and columns are inserted before the current cursor location or appended after all rows columns The row column in which the cursor is can also be deleted These operations are achieved with the Insert Row Column Append Row Column or Delete Row Column buttons Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Reference Toolbars 291 Cell operations An SPS table cell in which the cursor is located can be joined to any one of the four cells around it The joining operation is similar to that of spa
200. dures Auto Calculations 187 The XPath expression for the Auto Calculation must include at least one value that is related to an XML node i e a dynamic value For example Price 1 2 This expression involves the element Price and is therefore dynamic If the XPath expression contains a static value for example string Nanonull Inc then the Update XML Node feature will not work Any one of the nodes used in the XPath expression must be modified in Authentic View not in any other view So if the XPath expression is Price 1 2 and the Auto Calculation is set to update the vaTPrice node then the price element must be modified in Authentic View in order for the vATPrice node to be updated Should you use the Auto Calculation or the updated node contents for display If there are no conditional templates involved you can use either the Auto Calculation or the contents of the updated node for display It is immaterial which one you choose because the node update happens immediately after the Auto Calculation is evaluated and there is no factor to complicate the update You should however be aware that there is a different source for the content displayed in each of the two cases Hiding the Auto Calculation You may find yourself in the situation where you wish to use an Auto Calculation to make a calculation in order to update a node with the value of the Auto Calculation In this case one of the following scenarios arise You wis
201. e TextType mixed true gt lt xs choice minOccurs 0 maxOccurs unbounded gt lt xs element ref bold gt lt xs element ref italic gt lt xs choice gt lt xs complexType gt lt xs element name para type TextType gt The para element is of mixed content and may contain bold and italic child elements The boldand italic elements may themselves contain bold and italic child elements In such a structure text state icons can be created for the bold and italic elements Procedure for creating text state icons The procedure for creating text state icons can be divided into two broad steps e Assign a bitmap image file the text state icon to the element to be marked up using the text state icon e Define formatting in a global template for the element to be marked up Assuming the schema structure listed above text state icons for the bold and italic elements would be created as follows Examples of text state icons are in the files Images xml and Images sps in the folder lt sEXAMPLES gt Images in the application folder 1 Select the menu command Authentic Text State Icons The Text State Icons dialog screenshot below appears Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Content Editing Procedures Using Graphics 175 Text State Icons In order to make user editing experience in Authentic more comfortable you can define in this dialog toolbar buttons for specific Schema eleme
202. e design select Bullets and Numbering and then select the desired list format 5 Apply text formatting to the contents of the list When you are done the design should look something like this _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 74 Quick Start Tutorial Using Conditions div gt Source source content source lt div div gt Relevance lt aiv metainto relevance e E relevance metainfo lt newsitem Now in Authentic View check the results for different selections of relevance use the combo box to change the selection Making the selected relevance element bold Some news items have more than one relevance element In such cases the design would be improved if the relevance that matches the user selection were visually highlighted while the others were not You can do this in the following way 1 2 Select the relevance element in the design Insert a condition giving it an XPath expression of presswatch selection byrelevance This creates a condition with a single branch screenshot below div gt Relevance lt civ metainto relevance 211 JOMCIe Select the contents placeholder and give it a local formatting in the Styles entry helper of bold font group and yellow background color co or group Right click the condition and from the context menu select Condition Copy Branch In the Edit XPath Expression dialog that pops up check the Otherwise check bo
203. e model In order for users of Authentic View to be able to insert XML tables the following two conditions must be fulfilled e Anelement must exist in the schema DTD or XML Schema with a content model corresponding either to the HTML or CALS table model e XML tables must be enabled in the StyleVision Power Stylesheet Note The purpose of XML tables is to give the user of Authentic View the option of entering data as a table in Authentic View This data will be displayed as a table in Authentic View but will not automatically be displayed as a table in HTMLoutput This is because no default processing for the XML table elements is defined In order to obtain table formatting in the HTML output you must manually define your own templates to provide processing for the XML table elements and add these templates to the generated XSLT files If you wish to have a table in your HTML output we recommend that you use static and or dynamic SPS tables Defining the table content model in the schema The table element in the schema must have a content model corresponding to either the HTML or the Exchange model subset of the CALS table model The content model of the table element in your schema must correspond exactly with either of these two table models i e all elements and attributes defined in the table model must be correspondingly present in the element content model For information about the CALS table model see the CALS table model at OASIS Fo
204. e AltovaXML package This section describes the engine s implementation specific aspects of behavior It starts with a section giving general information about the engine and then goes on to list the implementation specific behavior of XSLT 2 0 functions For information about implementation specific behavior of XPath 2 0 functions see the section XPath 2 0 and XQuery 1 0 Functions Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Appendices XSLT Engine Information 381 General Information The Altova XSLT 2 0 Engine conforms to the World Wide Web Consortium s W3C s XSLT 2 0 Candidate Recommendation of 8 June 2006 Note the following general information about the engine Backwards Compatibility The Altova XSLT 2 0 Engine is not backwards compatible Depending on the Altova product you are using the following options are available e If you wish to run an XSLT 1 0 transformation using AltovaXML then you should use the Altova XSLT 1 0 Engine of this package e If you are running an XSLT transformation or carrying out an action involving an XSLT transformation within the XMLSpy StyleVision Authentic or MapForce products the correct built in Altova XSLT Engine 1 0 or 2 0 is automatically selected by the application This selection is based on the value of the version attribute of the stylesheet or transform element of the stylesheet Namespaces Your XSLT 2 0 stylesheet should declare the following namespaces in order
205. e Repository Properties Styles Docking and floating the Design Entry Helper windows Design Entry Helper windows can be docked in the StyleVision GUI or can be made to float on your screen To dock a window drag the window by its title bar and drop it on any one of the four inner or four outer arrowheads that appear when you start to drag The inner arrowheads dock the dragged window relative to the window in which the inner arrowheads appear The four outer arrowheads dock the dragged window at each of the four edges of the interface window To make a window float i double click the title bar or ii drag the title bar and drop it anywhere on the screen except on the arrowheads that appear when you start to drag Alternatively you can also use the following mechanisms To float a docked window click the Menu button at the top right of a docked window see screenshot below and select Floating This menu can also be accessed by right clicking the title bar of the docked window orphans Auto Hide color page break aftte Hide common page break before details page break inside effects widows To dock a floating window right click the title bar of the floating window and select Docking from the menu that appears the window will be docked in the position in which it was last docked Auto Hiding Design Entry Helper windows A docked window can be auto hidden When a Design Entry Helper window is auto hidden it is minimized
206. e can be ambiguity about which global element is the document element Assigning a Working XML File resolves such ambiguity because a valid XML document will by definition have only one document element XML document is used in two senses i to refer to a specific XML document ii to refer to any XML data source including DB sources from which XML data documents are generated for use with an SPS Which sense is intended should be clear from the context _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 18 Introduction Setting up StyleVision 3 4 Setting up StyleVision After downloading StyleVision from the Altova website double click the executable exe file to run the setup program The setup program will install StyleVision at the desired location The Altova XSLT Engines 1 0 and 2 0 are built into StyleVision and are used for all internal transformations You therefore do not need to install an XSLT Engine additionally to your StyleVision installation You will however need to have the following components installed e Internet Explorer 5 5 or later for Authentic View and HTML Preview Internet Explorer 6 0 and later has better XML support and is recommended Command line utility StyleVisionBatch A command line utility styleVisionBatch exe is included in the installation This utility can be used to call the file generation functionality of StyleVision from the command line StyleVisionBatch is located
207. e defined on a single component overrides all other styles defined at higher levels of the SPS for that component In the design select the headline element and assign it a color of navy color property in the color group of properties The locally defined property color navy overrides the global style for the header Class color green Select the div component surrounding the source element In the Styles entry helper with the 1 paragraph item in the Styles For column selected set the color property in the co or group of properties to gray In the font group of properties set font weight to bold These values are applied to the static text Remember that in the last section the static text Source Was assigned a font style value of italic The new properties font weight boldand color gray are additional to the font style italic property Now in Design View select the content placeholder of the source element In the Styles For column with 7 content selected set the color property in the color group of properties to black In the font group of properties set font weight tO normal The new properties are set on the contents placeholder node of the source element and override the properties defined on the div component see screenshot below Completing the formatting To complete the formatting in this section select the div component on the synopsis element and in the Predefined Formats combo box in the toolbar select p
208. e moved by dragging their handles to the required location Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH User Interface Main Window 21 4 1 Main Window The Main Window illustration below is where the SPS design Authentic View XSLT stylesheets and output previews are displayed i Main Window Open inactive document Buttons to scroll Active document document tabs left right Design v an JME T yO Dect sps Doczsps SPS documents in the Main Window e Multiple SPS documents can be open in StyleVision though only one can be active at any time The names of all open documents are shown in tabs at the bottom of the Main Window with the tab of the active document being highlighted e To make an open document active click its tab Alternatively use the options in the Windows menu e If so many documents are open that all document tabs are not visible in the document tab bar then click the appropriate scroll button at the right of the document tab bar see illustration above to scroll the tabs into view e To close the active document click the Close Document button in the menu bar at the top right of the application window or select File Close Document views A document is displayed in the following views one of which can be active at a time e Design View in which you design the SPS and edit JavaScript functions for use in that SPS The view can be toggled between the design d
209. e not supported and if supplied are ignored Days and weeks are returned as numbers in the case of single digit numbers there is no preceding zero The component specifier F is returned as anumber Weeks of the month are reckoned from Monday to Friday The component specifier P returns am or pm in English function available The function tests for the availability of XSLT 2 0 functions not for the availability of XPath 2 0 functions unparsed text The href attribute accepts i relative paths for files in the base uri folder and ii absolute paths with or without the file protocol _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 384 Appendices XSLT Engine Information XPath 2 0 and XQuery 1 0 Functions XPath 2 0 and XQuery 1 0 functions are evaluated by e the Altova XPath 2 0 Engine which i is a component of the Altova XSLT 2 0 Engine and ii is used in the XPath Evaluator of Altova s XMLSpy product to evaluate XPath expressions with respect to the XML document that is active in the XMLSpy interface e the Altova XQuery 1 0 Engine This section describes how XPath 2 0 and XQuery 1 0 functions are handled by the Altova XPath 2 0 Engine and Altova XQuery 1 0 Engine Only those functions are listed for which the behavior is implementation specific or where the behavior of an individual function is different in any of the three environments in which these functions are used that is in XSLT 2 0 in XQuery 1 0 and i
210. e text content of a node can be directly inserted with the markup of one of StyleVision s predefined formats To do this drag the node from the Schema Sources window and drop it at the desired location In the menu that pops up select Create Paragraph screenshot below Create Contents Create Paragraph X Create Bullets and Numbering Create Table The predefined format can be changed by selecting the predefined format tag and then choosing some other predefined format from the Format combo box in the toolbar or using the menu command Insert Format _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 144 Content Editing Procedures Inserting XML Content as Text Adding Elements in Authentic View When creating elements in the design the way you create the elements determines how Authentic View will respond to user actions like pressing the Tab key and clicking the add prompt The basic issue is what elements are created in Authentic View when an element is added by the user For example when the user adds an element say by clicking the Insert Element icon in the Elements Entry Helper what child elements are created automatically The most important point to bear in mind is that Authentic View follows the structure specified in the underlying schema In order to ensure that Authentic View implements the schema structure correctly there are a few design rules you should keep in mind These are explained below
211. e text content of the selection is retained as static text In the schema tree in the Schema Sources entry helper such an XML node is indicated by parentheses containing an ellipsis e The inserted node tags are inserted with the necessary path that is with ancestor node tags that establish a path relative to the containing node The path will be absolute or relative depending on the context of the node in the design e How to create nodes from table and list selections are described in Creating Tables and Lists as Elements Attributes Adding and deleting nodes in the schema You can add additional nodes which are not based on an HTML selection to the user defined schema Do this by right clicking on a node and selecting the required command from the context menu Alternatively you can use the toolbar icons of the Schema Sources entry helper To delete a node select the node and then use either the context menu or the toolbar icon Note however that when a node is deleted some paths in the design could be invalidated Modifying the design You can modify the structure of the design by dragging components around and by inserting static and dynamic components Styles can also be modified using the various styling capabilities of StyleVision _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 130 High Level Procedures HTML Import Creating Tables and Lists as Elements Attributes Tables and lists in the HTML document can be co
212. e the search function Replace Ctri H The Replace command is enabled in Authentic View and enables you to search for a text string and replace it with another text string _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 314 Reference Edit Menu Edit DB Filter Clear DB Filter The Edit DB Filter command allows you to create and edit a filter for a database table a DB Filter A DB Filter determines what data from the selected database table is imported and displayed A DB Filter consists of one or more criteria When you specify criteria you use an expression which is a combination of operators or gt and values text or numbers Additionally criteria can be joined by the logical operators AND or OR To create or edit a DB Filter do the following 1 Select the top level data table element for which you wish to create or edit a DB Filter Do this by clicking either the element tag in Design View or the element name in the schema tree 2 Select Edit Edit DB Filter or click the toolbar icon for the command This pops up the Edit Database Filters dialog Edit Database Filters as first character in value signifies parameter Append AND Append OR Delete Parameters Cancel 3 To add criteria use the Append AND and Append OR buttons To move a criterion up or down use the arrow buttons To delete a criterion use the Delete button 4 Specify the criteria for the DB Filter Each criterion consists
213. e with Unicode and what writing systems are supported by the fonts available on your PC installation Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Appendices Technical Data 403 Right to Left Writing Systems Please note that even under Windows NT 4 0 any text from a right to left writing system such as Hebrew or Arabic is not rendered correctly except in those countries that actually use right to left writing systems This is due to the fact that only the Hebrew and Arabic versions of Windows NT contains support for rendering and editing right to left text on the operating system layer _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 404 Appendices Technical Data Internet Usage Altova applications will initiate Internet connections on your behalf in the following situations If you click the Request evaluation key code in the Registration dialog Help Registration the three fields in the registration dialog box are transferred to our web server by means of a regular http port 80 connection and the free evaluation key code is sent back to the customer via regular SMTP e mail If you use the Open URL dialog box to open a document directly from a URL File Open URL that document is retrieved through a http port 80 connection This functionality is available in XMLSpy and Authentic Desktop If you open an XML document that refers to an XML Schema or DTD and the document is specified through a URL
214. eVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Reference Insert Menu 331 After completing the XPath expression click OK to finish inserting the Auto Calculation Updating an XML node with an Auto Calculation A node in an XML document can be updated with the result of an Auto Calculation How to do this is described in the section Updating Nodes with Auto Calculations _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 332 Reference Insert Menu Condition The Condition command enables you to insert a condition at the cursor point or around the selection A condition consists of one or more branches with each branch containing a specific set of processing rules In this way different sets of processing rules can be specified for different branches For example if the content of a node is the string Stop the branch can test this and specify that the contents of the node be colored red a second branch can test whether the contents of the node is the string Go and if yes color the contents of the node green a third branch can specify that if the contents of the node is neither the string Stop nor the string Go the contents of the node should be colored black To insert a condition do the following 1 Place the cursor at the desired location in the design or select the component around which the condition is to be inserted 2 Select the menu command Insert Condition or right click and select the context menu command Insert
215. ecification New developments recommended by the W3C s XML Schema Working Group are continuously being incorporated in the Altova Parser so that Altova products give you a State of the art development environment _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 400 Appendices Technical Data Altova XSLT and XQuery Engines Altova products use the Altova XSLT 1 0 Engine Altova XSLT 2 0 Engine and Altova XQuery 1 0 Engines Documentation about implementation specific behavior for each engine is in the section Engine Information in Appendix 1 of the product documentation should that engine be used in the product These three engines are also available in the AltovaXML package which can be downloaded from the Altova website free of charge Documentation for using the engines is available with the AltovaXML package Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Appendices Technical Data 401 Unicode Support Unicode is the new 16 bit character set standard defined by the Unicode Consortium that provides a unique number for every character e no matter what the platform e no matter what the program e no matter what the language Fundamentally computers just deal with numbers They store letters and other characters by assigning a number for each one Before Unicode was invented there were hundreds of different encoding systems for assigning these numbers No single encoding could contain enough characters fo
216. ed only for global elements A global template may be defined for a global element Once defined a global template can be used for that element wherever that element occurs in the document Alternatively to the global template processing for a global element may be defined in a local template A local template is the template that defines how an element global or non global is processed within the main template The local template applies to that particular occurrence of the element in the main template Instead of the local template a global template can be applied to a given occurrence of an element in the main template One of the assigned schema sources is designated the main schema the document node of the Working XML File associated with the main schema is used as the starting point for the main template Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Introduction Terminology 17 main template output static items SPS component template Template XML File Working XML File XML document The main entry point template In StyleVision this template matches the document element and is the first to be evaluated by the XSLT processor In the Schema Sources window it is listed as the child of the document node The main template defines the basic output document structure and defines how the input document s are to be processed It can contain local templates and can reference global templates
217. ed technologies and products at the Altova website The About StyleVision command displays the splash window and version number of your product Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Chapter 12 Appendices 376 Appendices 12 Appendices These appendices contain i information about the XSLT Engines used in StyleVision ii information about the conversion of DB datatypes to XML Schema datatypes iii technical information about StyleVision and iii licensing information for StyleVision Each appendix contains the sub sections listed below XSLT Engine Information Provides implementation specific information about the Altova XSLT Engines which are used by StyleVision to generate output e Altova XSLT 1 0 Engine e Altova XSLT 2 0 Engine e XPath 2 0 and XQuery 1 0 Functions DatatypesDB2XSD When DB fields are converted to XML nodes the DB datatypes are converted to XML Schema datatypes This appendix lists the mappings for the following source DBs MS Access MS SQL Server MySQL Oracle ODBC ADO Sybase Technical Data Provides technical information about StyleVision OS and memory requirements Altova XML Parser Altova XSLT and XQuery Engines Unicode support Internet usage License Information Contains information about the way StyleVision is distributed and about its licensing Electronic software distribution License metering Copyright e e e e End User License Agreement Altov
218. edit the properties of a data entry device select the data entry device not the node containing it and edit its properties in the Properties entry helper Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Content Editing Procedures Using Data Entry Devices 149 Note e Data can be entered in data entry devices only in Authentic View e Data entry devices can also be created by changing the current component type of a node to a data entry device To do this right click the node and select Change to e Inthe HTML output the entry selected by the user is displayed in the output Changing the value of a data entry device in the HTML document does not change the text value in either the XML document or HTML document _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 150 Content Editing Procedures Using Data Entry Devices Input Fields You can insert an Input Field or a Multiline Input Field in your SPS when you drop a node from the Schema Sources window into Design View The text that the Authentic View user enters into these fields is entered into the XML node for which the field was created Editing the properties of input fields You can modify the HTML properties of input fields by selecting the input field and then modifying its HTML properties in the Properties entry helper see screenshot below aia EE Le Properties For Authentic editfield canman event accesskey align alt HTML dat
219. eees 349 11 8 5 Auto Add DB Controls 0 0 ccceccccsccssceeseseeeeeeeeeeeesseeeaeecaeecaeecsaecaeenaeenaeenaeens 350 11 8 6 Table Markup ccccccccsccesecesecesecseesseeseeeseeeseseessecsaeeeaeecaeecaaecaeceaeeeaeenaeees 351 1128 7 Define DTD Entities ispiciai anna ecaasavicaeavadens 352 11 8 8 Validate XMM yes ccciss2 acc secsevesncsscevicestes deacess edadesicvecnersszeics OEE 353 Properties MG ts vceccceestesacesscedsecexe desce Aisi savtnsst sacecesessatevs tuedadsvaecsinesh secaivessietivatseeedeetecede 354 11 9 1 Bullets and Numbering 000 0 ccc eeccceccesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseecsaeenaeceaeenaeenaeees 355 11 9 2 Edit DB Filters Clear DB Filter ooo ccc cccsessceessscesecsseeeecssaeeeeseaaes 356 11 9 3 Predefined Format Strings ccceccccescseseeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeceeceeesaeceaeeeaeenseees 357 LOOMS MeD aicsascascssstee cxeasietateceuriacedgsxedave ae E Eo EE a L E e Ea EO a a E aS 359 TRIO I Spelling resien R E E E EE A EAE 360 11 10 2 Spelling Options 0 0 cccceccescesecesecsseceeeeeeeeeeceeeseesseeeseeeseeeseecsaeeseeeeseenseeeaeees 361 11 103 Custom Ze ionii E E E E A EE E leueeseneala teed eavietere 364 VV OA Options isscascccssceascssavisccasssesocasaaesdccanaed degavah ciuhcavecosasaah a dotcasaa osneaaea denis sakecasadeicens 369 Window Meni sissscciccssvevicceavedostsavh besaszsd osnaaaetdenea caddies satatcease ds deanaveideaandedscaaaveudeasastsceass 370 Help MGI serenana eg ahadss coset esneased densa taidea
220. een help manual for StyleVision with the Table of Contents displayed in the left hand side pane of the Help window The Table of Contents provides a good overview of the entire Help document Clicking an entry in the Table of Contents takes you to that topic The Index command opens the onscreen help manual for StyleVision with the Keyword Index displayed in the left hand side pane of the Help window The index lists keywords and lets you navigate to a topic by double clicking the keyword If a keyword is linked to more than one topic you are presented with a list of the topics to choose from The Search command opens the onscreen help manual for StyleVision with the Search dialog displayed in the left hand side pane of the Help window To search for a term enter the term in the input field and press Return The Help system performs a full text search on the entire Help documentation and returns a list of hits Double click any item to display that item Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Reference Help Menu 373 Registration Order Form When you start StyleVision for the first time you are presented with the Registration dialog box You must enter your unique license key code in this dialog to register your product with Altova Registering your product is required to activate your license and unlock your software Eligibility for technical support depends upon the type of license you have purchased so registration is re
221. egory Remove Item Expand All Collapse All Expand from This Point Collapse to This Point Expand Collapse All to This Level Global Templates Applies to certain categories such as Global Templates Removes the selected item from the Design Tree Expands all expandable items in all categories of the Design Tree Collapses the entire Design Tree to the top level item which is the location of the SPS file Expands all expandable items in the selected item Collapses all items within the selected item up to the selected item Expands or collapses all categories to the level of the selected item The Global Templates item lists all the global templates in the SPS including the main template These templates are displayed as trees with expandable collapsible nodes see screenshot below EE Ey NanonullOrg Sps R Namespaces Gal Parameter i meil Schema sources B Scripts ERA Global Templates Main template iE global template n1 bold O global template n1 italic B template n1 italic content L Page Layout Any component in any of the template trees can be removed by selecting it and clicking the Remove button in the toolbar ES or the Remove command in the context menu The component is removed from the design and the tree Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH User Interface Design Entry Helpers 35 Layout The Layout item enables you to set the
222. ell in which the cursor is to the cell above The contents of both cells are concatenated in the new cell All property values of the cell on top are passed to the new cell This command applies to both static and dynamic tables Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Reference Table Menu 339 Split Cell Horizontally Vertically JE The Split Cell Horizontally command creates a new cell to the right of the cell in which the cursor is The contents of the original cell stay in the original cell All properties of the original cell are passed to the new cell This command applies to both static and dynamic tables Lt The Split Cell Vertically command t creates a new cell below the cell in which the cursor is The contents of the original cell remain in the upper cell All properties of the original cell are passed to the new cell This command applies to both static and dynamic tables _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 340 Reference Table Menu View Cell Bounds The View Cell Bounds command toggles the display of table boundaries borders on and off for tables that have a table border value of 0 This command applies to both static and dynamic tables Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Reference Table Menu 341 Vertical Alignment of Cell Content Commands to set the vertical alignment of cell content are available as icons in the toolbar Place the cursor anywhere in
223. elow Alternatively in the Menu select Hide to display the Menu right click the title bar of the window or click the Menu button in the title bar of the window To make a hidden or closed window visible again select the name of the Design Entry Helper in the View menu The Design Entry Helper window is made visible in the position at which it was docked or floating when it was was hidden _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 30 User Interface Design Entry Helpers Schema Sources The Schema Sources window screenshot below enables you to do the following Specify the schema or DB on which the SPS will be based Specify the Working XML File and Template XML File for the schema source Select multiple root elements document elements for a schema Drag nodes from a schema tree and drop them into the design These nodes represent the XML content that is to be included in the output e Lists all global elements in the schema source A global element can be created as a global template 1 18 18 gt BB Schema sources fal XML C Program Files Altova Style Vision2006 Examples NanonullOrg xsd 208 XML Eal Working NanonullOrg xml Hl Template E Z Root elements E n1 0rgChart n1 CompanyLogo n1 Name n1 Office E T All Global Elements n1 Department iE n1 Desc n1 EMail n1 Name Adding a schema A schema is added by clicking the dropdown arrow of the Add
224. emplate is used while the other is not used This is because for the document element of each XML instance document there is only one template in the SPS which matches that document element For example the document element E1ement a will be matched by the template which selects Element a but not by that which selects Element B In this connection it is important to remember that if multiple global elements are defined in the schema an XML document with any one of these global elements as its document element is valid assuming of course that its substructure is valid according to the schema To set up the SPS to use multiple root elements document elements click the button to the right of the Root elements entry of the schema The following dialog pops up _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 94 High Level Procedures Creating the SPS Structure Select Root Elements Please select the active root elements K O O DU K OrgChart x Cancel 4 The dialog lists all the global elements in the schema Select the global elements that should be available as root elements document elements and click OK The schema tree would then look something like this TA WE Schema sources fl XML C Program Files Altova StyleVision2006 Examples NanonullOrg xsd sth XML Ea Working NanonullOrg xml Hl Template E Z Root elements n1 Department iE n1 OrgChart n1 Person
225. en defined in the Insert Edit Hyperlink dialog click OK to finish Linking to bookmarks To link to a bookmark do the following 1 Inthe Static tab of the Insert Hyperlink dialog click the Bookmark button This pops up the Select Place in Document dialog screenshot below Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Content Editing Procedures Bookmarks and Hyperlinks 181 Select Place in Document l x Select an existent place in the document OK Cancel 2 This dialog lists all the bookmarks defined in the SPS Select the bookmark you wish to target and click OK The bookmark is entered as a fragment identifier in the URI input field When the XML document is transformed with an XSLT stylesheet the fragment identifier will be the target of the hyperlink in the output document Linking to external resources URIs that locate external resources can be built in the following ways e By entering the URI directly in the Static tab of the Insert Hyperlink dialog For example in the file lt sEXAMPLES gt LinksEtc Vacations sps the Copyright Altova GmbH text at the bottom of the design links to the Altova home page http www altova com This address has been entered directly in the Address input field of the Static tab e By selecting a node in the XML document source in the Dynamic tab of the Insert Hyperlink dialog The node in the XML source can provide a text string that is either i the URI to be targe
226. enshot above When changes made to this file in Authentic View are saved with the File Save Authentic XML Data command the modifications are written back to the DB The non editable XML file is updated if necessary each time an output view is newly accessed or when the XML data is saved In StyleVision you can define top level filters to restrict the data imported into the non editable XML File i e for the output views and the reports A DB Query is used within Authentic View to restrict the list of records displayed in Authentic View It is used only during editing If editing changes have been saved to the DB then the next time an output view window is accessed the non editable XML file is updated with the modified contents of the DB and the refreshed file is displayed in the preview A DB based SPS is created in the same way as the standard schema based SPS by dragging and dropping nodes into the Design Window inserting static stylesheet components assigning display properties etc These mechanisms are described in this documentation Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH High Level Procedures Working with Databases 105 Connecting to a DB and Setting up the SPS The first step in building an SPS is connecting to a database DB This loads the DB information into StyleVision enabling StyleVision to generate the required XML Schema and XML files Connecting to a DB consists of two steps e Browsing for the D
227. enshot below is used to edit and assign XPath expressions for e Conditions in Conditional Templates the Edit XPath Expression dialog appears when you select the Insert Condition command or when you select a condition and select the Edit button EV for the Element item in the Properties Entry Helper e Auto Calculations the Edit XPath Expression dialog appears when you click the Build button in the Auto Calculation dialog W Edit XPath expression x Expression count n1 Department Select Schema Attribute or ElemerSelect Operator Select Function Selection n1 Orgchart nt O Oper Description Function Returns Description any equal boolean any boolean argument con Schema sources any not equal ceilling number number smallest integ number less concat string string concatenatior H XML C Prograt number greater concat string string concatenatior E Z Root elements number less or equal contains strin boolean tests whether OrgChart number greater oreg count nodes number number of noc A 0 org number add falsef boolean Boolean false CompanyLoc number subtract floorfnumber number largest integer Name number multiply idfany nodes selects eleme i number divide lana string boolean Whether lang 0 Office number modulo last number contest size Name boole logical AND local namef string local part of tF i MEX Dann F boole logical OR local namefno string local part of
228. ent MK Desc amp Office In the screenshot above the Desc element has been created as contents The output will display the text content of Desc If Desc has descendant elements such as Bold and Italic then the text content of the descendant elements will also be output as part of the contents of Desc Note that attribute nodes of Desc are not considered its child nodes and the contents of the attribute nodes will therefore not be output as part of the contents of Desc Attribute nodes have to be explicitly inserted in order to be processed In the sub sections of this section we describe other aspects of inserting XML content as text e How the text content of a node can be marked up with a predefined format directly when the node is inserted e How the structure of the source schema determines the effect of Authentic View usage e How descendant nodes not explicitly included within a node can be included for processing See Rest of Contents _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 142 Content Editing Procedures Inserting XML Content as Text Note You can create an empty template rule by deleting the contents placeholder of a node An empty template rule is useful if you wish to define that some node not be processed i e produce no output Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Content Editing Procedures Inserting XML Content as Text 143 Inserting Content with a Predefined Format Th
229. entic CALS HTML Tables This pops up the CALS HTML Table Properties dialog screenshot below _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 168 Content Editing Procedures Working with Tables CALS HTML Table Properties Schema lt ML1 X OK IV Enable XML tables for this schema in Authentic Cancel Type HTML Description Default User defined Table element table Table caption caption Table group Table header thead tfoot tbody tr row Column element td cell Header element th header Cell with nested table Column specification With the relevant schema selected check the Enable XML tables in Authentic check box Then select the table model type either HTML or CALS The screenshot above shows the default names for the HTML table model If an element in the table model in your schema matches a default element name the default element name is colored black otherwise red If a corresponding element exists in your schema for a default element in the CALS HTML table model then you can map your schema element to the default by entering its name in the User Defined column for that default element The screenshot above indicates the following about the schema e There is an element called table with a content model the same as the HTML table model all default names appear black e The elements corresponding to the default tr td and th are row cell and header respectively The content mo
230. entic View and for final output it also provides mechanisms in Authentic View for inputting data into the XML file or DB D ment Creation Pr Document Design Content Editing STYLEVISION XML Power Document Stylesheet SPS e Content editing This SPS created in the document design stage is linked to the XML document to be edited The XML document must be valid according to the schema on which the SPS is based An XML document which is linked to an SPS is presented graphically in the Authentic View of an Altova product as the Authentic View of that XML document When a new Authentic XML document is created it can be assigned an SPS and then be edited in Authentic View using the document template Template XML File and controls specified in the SPS If an existing XML document is opened and assigned an SPS the existing data is displayed in Authentic View according to the design in the SPS and the document can be edited in Authentic View The user of Authentic View is not expected to be knowledgeable about either XML or the schema being used for the document The document display in Authentic View should make content editing as easy and non technical as possible It is therefore the task of the person who designs the SPS to produce a user friendly Authentic View display For detailed information about using Authentic View see the Authentic View documentation in the user manual of XMLSpy or Authentic Desktop SPSs for standard indus
231. entic View user will be able to modify only the last two digits of the four digit year value the first two digits remain unchanged in the XML document Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Additional Editing Procedures Working with Dates 227 9 4 Working with Dates If the source document contains nodes that take date values using the xs date or xs dateTime datatypes in the underlying XML Schema makes available the powerful date and time manipulation features of XPath 2 0 see examples below StyleVision supports the xs date Of xs dateTime datatypes by providing 1 A graphical date picker to help Authentic View users enter dates in the correct lexical format of the datatype for that node 2 Awide range of date formatting possibilities via the Input Formatting feature These StyleVision features are described in the sub sections of this section Using the Date Picker and Formatting Dates In the rest of the introduction to this section we show how XPath 2 0 can be used to make calculations that involve dates Note Date and time data cannot be manipulated with XPath 1 0 However with XPath 1 0 you can still use the Date Picker to maintain data integrity and use Input Formatting to provide date formatting Date calculations with XPath 2 0 Data involving dates can be manipulated with XPath 2 0 expressions in Auto Calculations Given below are a few examples of what can be achieved with XPath 2 0 expressions e
232. er a user defined schema is created screenshot below with a root element document element called Root H EE Schema sources IEA USER1 User E Z Root elements Root T All Global Elements Note that there is no global element in the All Global Elements list SPS structure and design The SPS contains a single template the main template which is applied to the document node of a temporary internal XML document This XML document has the structure of the Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH High Level Procedures HTML Import 127 user defined schema which was created in the Schema Sources window In Design View at this point the HTML document components within the main template are included in the SPS as static components The representation of these HTML components in Authentic Viewwill be as non editable non XML content The XSLT stylesheets will contain these HTML components as literal result elements The schema at this point has only the document element Root consequently the temporary internal XML document contains only the document element Root with no child node When you create HTML selections as elements and attributes in the user defined schema you can do this in either of two ways 1 By converting the selection to an element or attribute In the design the node tags are inserted with a content placeholder within the tag In the schema an element or attribute is created I
233. er Support Department i Other Restrictions You may not loan rent lease sublicense distribute or otherwise transfer all or any portion of the Software to third parties except to the limited extent set forth in Section 3 or otherwise expressly provided You may not copy the Software except as expressly set forth above and any copies that you are permitted to make pursuant to this Software License Agreement must contain the same copyright patent and other intellectual property markings that appear on or in the Software You may not modify adapt or translate the Software You may not directly or indirectly encumber or suffer to exist any lien or security interest on the Software knowingly take any action that would cause the Software to be placed in the public domain or use the Software in any computer environment not specified in this Software License Agreement You will comply with applicable law and Altova s instructions regarding the use of the Software You agree to notify your employees and agents who may have access to the Software of the restrictions contained in this Software License Agreement and to ensure their compliance with these restrictions you agree that you are solely responsible for the accuracy and adequacy of the software for your intended use and you will indemnify and HOLD harmless ALTOVA from any 3rd party suit to the extent based upon the accuracy and adequacy of the software in your use without limitation The Software i
234. er and not reference it Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Additional Editing Procedures Unparsed Entity URIs 235 9 6 Unparsed Entity URIs If you are using a DTD and have declared an unparsed entity in it you can use the URI associated with that entity for image and hyperlink targets in the SPS This is useful if you wish to use the same URI multiple times in the SPS This feature makes use of the XSLT function unparsed entity uri to pass the URI of the unparsed entity from the DTD to the output and is therefore only available in the outputs HTML not in Authentic View Using this feature requires that the DTD XML document and SPS documents be appropriately edited as follows 1 Inthe DTD i the unparsed entities must be declared and ii the notations for the unparsed entity types must be declared 2 Inthe XML document the relevant nodes must be given values that are the names of the required unparsed entities 3 In the SPS when images and hyperlinks are inserted they must correctly access the dynamic node values as unparsed entities _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 236 Additional Editing Procedures Unparsed Entity URIs Declaring an Unparsed Entity Declaring an unparsed entity consists of two parts e Declaring a name a URI and a type for the unparsed entity in the DTD e Declaring a notation for that entity type in the DTD Both these steps require the editing of
235. er dictionary is selected OK Cancel Editing the Custom Dictionaries list The listed custom dictionaries are part of the current dictionary e To add an existing custom dictionary to the list click the Add button then browse for the required dictionary and select it e To remove a custom dictionary from the list and therefore from the current dictionary select the dictionary to be removed and click the Remove button This causes the dictionary to be removed from the list It is however not deleted and can be added to the list subsequently e To create anew custom dictionary and add it to the list click the New button open the folder in which the new dictionary is to be created and give the new dictionary a name This file must have a t1x suffix When you start a spell check all dictionaries listed in the Custom Dictionaries list box are searched If you want to limit the search to specific dictionaries use the Remove command to remove form the list those dictionaries you do not want searched The default user dictionary is the custom dictionary to which unknown words encountered in a spell check are added when you click the Add to Dictionary command during the spell check Select the default user dictionary by clicking the check box next to the dictionary you wish to make the default user dictionary Modifying the contents of a custom dictionary To modify the content of a custom dictionary click the custom dict
236. er of such an entity is displayed in its escaped form i e amp amp External entities are not resolved in Authentic View except in the case where an entity is an image file and it is entered as the value of an attribute of type ENTITY or ENTITIES Such entities are resolved when the document is processed with an XSLT generated from the StyleVision Power Stylesheet _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 278 Authentic View Editing in Authentic View Images in Authentic View Authentic View is based on Internet Explorer and is able to display most of the image formats that your version of Internet Explorer can display The following commonly used image formats are supported GIF JPG PNG BMP WMF Microsoft Windows Metafile EMF Enhanced Metafile SVG for PDF output only Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Authentic View Editing in Authentic View 279 Keystrokes in Authentic View Enter Carriage Return Key In Authentic View the Return key is used to append additional elements when it is in certain cursor locations For example if the chapter of a book may according to the schema contain several paragraphs then pressing Return inside the text of the paragraph causes a new paragraph to be appended immediately after the current paragraph If a chapter can contain one title and several chapters pressing Enter inside the chapter but outside any paragraph element includi
237. erated from an MS Access database DB the MS Access DB datatypes are converted to XML Schema datatypes as listed in the table below MS Access Datatype XML Schema Datatype XS char xs string bi r OLE Object xs base64Binary Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Appendices Datatypes in DB Generated XML Schemas 391 MS SQL Server When an XML Schema is generated from an MS SQL Server database DB the MS SQL Server DB datatypes are converted to XML Schema datatypes as listed in the table below C CS e Ce C bi m fees O O m o Gee a CS it real floai inary integer araLlin bigin char t int int _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 392 Appendices Datatypes in DB Generated XML Schemas MySQL When an XML Schema is generated from a MySQL database DB the MySQL DB datatypes are converted to XML Schema datatypes as listed in the table below My SQL Datatype XML Schema Datatype oo O fe e a Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Appendices Datatypes in DB Generated XML Schemas 393 Oracle When an XML Schema is generated from an Oracle database DB the Oracle DB datatypes are converted to XML Schema datatypes as listed in the table below CA BE INTERVAL YEAR TO MONTH BLOB xs baseo64Binary _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleV
238. erated the XML Schema you can use the full range of StyleVision features to design an SPS for the DB Note The XML Schema that is generated from the DB will not be altered by any DB Filter that may be built subsequently Network shares and UNC paths Any folder on your computer s hard drive can be marked as a share When this has been done any other computer on the network can access it and even write to it depending on how the share has been set up A share can therefore be used on a remote machine exactly as if it were a local folder When working with an SPS based on a DB which is on a hard drive such as an MS Access DB the folder in which the DB is located must be marked as a share A UNC path is then used in the connection string to point to the DB This enables the SPS to connect correctly to the DB when used by clients such as Authentic Browser on other machines There are two parts to setting up the network share mechanism for a DB based SPS e The folder in which the DB is located must be set up for sharing In Windows 2000 and Windows XP the sharing settings are accessed by right clicking the folder and selecting Sharing and Security You must also enable Advanced File Sharing My Computer Tools Folder Options then uncheck Simple File Sharing e Accessing the share and the DB from the remote location To do this in a DB based SPS you have to set up the connection string with a UNC path The format of a UNC pa
239. erted within an element When the cursor is placed within an element then the allowed child elements of that element can be inserted Note that allowed child elements can be part of an elements only content model as well as a mixed content model text plus child elements An allowed child element can be inserted either when a text range is selected or when the cursor is placed as an insertion point within the text e When a text range is selected and an element inserted the text range becomes the content of the inserted element e When an element is inserted at an insertion point the element is inserted at that point After an element has been inserted it can be cleared by clicking either of the two Clear Element icons that appear in the Elements Entry Helper for these inline elements Which of the two icons appears depends on whether you select a text range or place the cursor in the text as an insertion point see below Apply Element If you select an element in your document by clicking either its start or end tag in the Show large markup view this icon indicates that the element in the Entry Helper can be applied to the selected original element The applied element replaces the original element e Ifthe applied element has a child element with the same name as a child of the original element and an instance of this child element exists in the original element then the child element of the original is retained in the new e
240. es Working with CSS Styles 211 Setting CSS Property Values Style properties are defined in the Styles Entry Helper screenshot below for the selected component or components The selection is made in two steps First the component is selected in the SPS This causes the descendant component types and any associated predefined formats to appear in the Styles For column of the Styles Entry Helper see screenshot below Second In the Styles For column the descendant component type is selected In the screenshot below the paragraph component type the predefined format is selected Now style properties can be defined for the predefined format If in the screenshot below the 3 comboboxes entry had been selected style properties could have been defined for all three combo boxes in one go Ekli Styles For CAS Attribute value E box font contents checkbox color font family common font size comboboxes paragraph details font style effects font variant font font weight IE numbering paged media text ul Style property groups The available style properties are CSS properties and are defined in 11 groups _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 212 Presentation Procedures Working with CSS Styles text Text properties such as text align text decoration and text transform as well as other text related properties such as letter spacing and word spac
241. es nanonull gif absolute URI e Inthe Dynamic tab as an XPath expression that selects a node containing either i a URI absolute or relative or ii an unparsed entity name For example the entry image location would select the location attribute of the image element that is the child of the context node that is the node within which the image is inserted The location node in the XML document would contain the image URI How to use unparsed entities is described in the section Unparsed Entity URIs e Inthe Static and Dynamic tab an XPath expression in the Dynamic part can be prefixed and or suffixed with static entries text For example the static prefix could be c XYZCompany Personnel Photos the dynamic part could be concat First Last and the static suffix could be png This would result in an absolute URI something like C XYZCompany Personnel Photos JohnDoe png Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Content Editing Procedures Using Graphics 173 Accessing the image for output The following points should be noted e For HTML output the URI of the image is passed to the HTML file and the image is accessed by the browser So if the URI is relative the HTML file must be saved to a location where it correctly accesses the image file e Whether the URI is relative or absolute the image must be physically accessible to the process that renders it Editing image properties To edit an image right
242. es to the first record the second button navigates to the previous record the third button is the Goto Record button which pops up the Goto Record dialog screenshot below it pops up a dialog that prompts you for the number of the record to which you wish to go the fourth button navigates to the next record and the fifth button navigates to the last record Go To Record OK Go to record fi of 8 To manually insert the navigation controls in the Design document which is useful if you wish to insert the controls at some other location than the default location then do the following Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH High Level Procedures Working with Databases 121 Turn the Auto insert DB Controls toggle off 2 Place the cursor at the location where you wish the navigation controls to appear but within the DB table element s start and end tags 3 Right click and from the popup menu select Insert DB Control Navigation or Insert DB Control Navigation Goto Inserting a DB Query button for Authentic View The DB Query button enables the Authentic View user to submit a DB query This helps the user to build conditions for the records to be displayed in Authentic View Query buttons can be inserted for individual DB tables anywhere between e The start tag of the DB table element and the start tag of the DB table element s child Row element e The end tag of the DB table element and
243. est inter number less concat string string concatenatior HG XML C Prograt number greater concat string string concatenatior E 7 Root elements number less or equal contains strin boolean tests whether E orgchart number greater oreg count nodes number number of noc number add falsef boolean Boolean false CompanyLoc number subtract floor number number largest integer Name n number multiply id any nodes selects eleme offi i number divide lang string boolean Whether lang ag e number modulo last number contest size Name boole logical ND local namef string local part of tr Mm AX Dann of boole logical OR local name no string local part of tr a gt nodes union of nod namef string name of a cor b namealnadas strina name of the I Absolute XPath In the Expression pane enter the XPath expression for the Auto Calculation via the keyboard Alternatively enter the expression by double clicking nodes operators and or functions in the entry helper panes of the dialog It is important to be aware of the context node at the insertion point the context node is highlighted in the schema sources tree when the dialog pops up Click OK to finish The condition is created with its first branch the XPath expression you entered is the XPath expression of the first branch If the condition was inserted at a text insertion point the first branch is empty there is no template w
244. ettlement negotiations Altova shall pay actual damages costs and attorney fees awarded against you or payable by you pursuant to a settlement agreement in connection with a Claim _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 414 Appendices License Information to the extent such direct damages and costs are not reimbursed to you by insurance or a third party to an aggregate maximum equal to the purchase price of the Software If the Software or its use becomes the subject of a Claim or its use is enjoined or if in the opinion of Altova s legal counsel the Software is likely to become the subject of a Claim Altova shall attempt to resolve the Claim by using commercially reasonable efforts to modify the Software or obtain a license to continue using the Software If in the opinion of Altova s legal counsel the Claim the injunction or potential Claim cannot be resolved through reasonable modification or licensing Altova at its own election may terminate this Software License Agreement without penalty and will refund to you on a pro rata basis any fees paid in advance by you to Altova THE FOREGOING CONSTITUTES ALTOVA S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY FOR INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY INFRINGEMENT This indemnity does not apply to infringements that would not be such except for customer supplied elements 6 SUPPORT AND MAINTENANCE Altova offers multiple optional Support amp Maintenance Package s SMP for the version of Software produ
245. ews The Output View tab illustration below displays i the XSLT for HTML stylesheet generated from the SPS design and ii a preview of the HTML output produced by transforming the Working XML File with the generated XSLT stylesheet In the HTML Output View tab the view can be switched between the XSLT for HTML stylesheet and the HTML output preview by clicking the dropdown button in the HTML Output View tab and selecting the XSLT option or the output preview option as required r Main Window HTML Output View active XSLT stylesheet in view Click to switch to HTML Preview Design Authentic XSLTHTML Dectsps Domes J aD XSLT view The XSLT view displays the XSLT for HTML generated from the currently active SPS The stylesheet is generated afresh each time the XSLT view is selected A stylesheet in an Output View tab is displayed with line numbering and expandable collapsible elements click the and icons in the left margin to expand collapse elements The stylesheet in XSLT view cannot be edited but can be searched select Edit Find and text from it can be copied to the clipboard with Edit Copy Note The XSLT stylesheets generated from the SPS can be separately generated and saved using the File Save Generated Files command _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 26 User Interface Main Window HTML preview HTML preview displays the output produced by transforming the Work
246. f XML files based on the imported HTML file consists of the following steps 1 Creating New SPS via HTML Import When an HTML file is imported into StyleVision a new SPS document is created The HTML document is displayed in Design View with HTML markup tags A user defined XML Schema with a document element called Root Is created in the Schema Sources window This is the schema on which the SPS is based The HTML document content and markup that is displayed in Design View at this point is included in the SPS as static content Creating the Schema and SPS Design Create the schema by i dragging components from the HTML document to the required location in the schema tree in the Schema Sources window and optionally ii adding your own nodes to the schema tree In the Design Window HTML content that has been used to build nodes in the schema tree will now be displayed with schema node tags around the content HTML content that has no corresponding schema node will continue to be displayed without schema node tags In the Design Document assign formatting to nodes refine processing rules or add static content as required These modifications will have an effect only on the SPS and the generated XSLT It will not have an effect on either the generated schema or XML file After you have completed the schema tree and the design of the SPS you can generate and save the following e an XML Schema corresponding to the schema tree you h
247. f how each of these data entry devices is used see Data Entry Devices Predefined formats Predefined formats are shown in mauve tags which can be expanded collapsed by double clicking p gt content lt p The screenshot above shows tags for the predefined format p para expanded at left and collapsed at right To apply a predefined format highlight the items around which the predefined format is to appear by clicking a component and or marking text and insert the predefined format XPath objects StyleVision features two mechanisms that use XPath expressions e Conditional templates ZEE asain U5 Te lt Ceeaion Condition tags are blue The start tag contains cells The leftmost cell contains a question mark Other cells each contain either i a number starting with one for each when condition and or ii an asterisk for the optional otherwise condition A condition branch can be selected by clicking it The number of the selected condition branch is highlighted in the start tag and the template for that branch is displayed within the start and end tags of the condition The XPath expression for the selected condition branch is also highlighted in the Design Tree Note that tags for conditions cannot be expanded collapsed e Auto Calculations Office Summary EUGELT Auto Calculations are represented in Design View by the AutoCalc object see screenshot above The XPath expression for the selected Aut
248. f the price paid if any or ii repair or replacement of the Software that does not meet Altova s Limited Warranty and which is returned to Altova with a copy of your receipt This Limited Warranty is void if failure of the Software has resulted from accident abuse misapplication Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Appendices License Information 413 abnormal use Trojan horse virus or any other malicious external code Any replacement Software will be warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period or thirty 30 days whichever is longer This limited warranty does not apply to Evaluation and or Pre release Software b No Other Warranties and Disclaimer THE FOREGOING LIMITED WARRANTY AND REMEDIES STATE THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES FOR ALTOVA OR ITS SUPPLIER S BREACH OF WARRANTY ALTOVA AND ITS SUPPLIERS DO NOT AND CANNOT WARRANT THE PERFORMANCE OR RESULTS YOU MAY OBTAIN BY USING THE SOFTWARE EXCEPT FOR THE FOREGOING LIMITED WARRANTY AND FOR ANY WARRANTY CONDITION REPRESENTATION OR TERM TO THE EXTENT WHICH THE SAME CANNOT OR MAY NOT BE EXCLUDED OR LIMITED BY LAW APPLICABLE TO YOU IN YOUR JURISDICTION ALTOVA AND ITS SUPPLIERS MAKE NO WARRANTIES CONDITIONS REPRESENTATIONS OR TERMS EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WHETHER BY STATUTE COMMON LAW CUSTOM USAGE OR OTHERWISE AS TO ANY OTHER MATTERS TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW ALTOVA AND ITS SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND CON
249. f the schema In the Open dialog that pops up browse for the XML file StyleVision2006 Examples Tutorials QuickStart xml and click Open The Working XML File is now assigned and the filename is entered in the line for the Working XML File entry see screenshot below Schema sources fal XML1 C Program Files Altova StyleVision2006 Examples Tutorials QuickStart xsd sth XML e Working QuickStart xml H Template E Z Root elements presswatch 4 T All Global Elements Specifying the encoding of output In the Encoding tab of the Options dialog Tools Options set the HTML encoding to Unicode Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Quick Start Tutorial Creating and Setting Up a New SPS 49 UTF 8 Saving the SPS document After you have set up the SPS as described above save it as MyQuickStart sps in the StyleVision2006 Examples Tutorials folder Do this by clicking the menu command File Save Design or Ctrl S and then entering the file name in the Save Design dialog that pops up _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 50 Quick Start Tutorial Inserting Dynamic Content from XML Source 5 2 Inserting Dynamic Content from XML Source This section introduces mechanisms to insert data from nodes in the XML document In it you will learn how to drag element and attribute nodes from the schema tree into the design and create these nodes as contents When a node is created as c
250. f the user interface which provides an overview of the StyleVision GUI e A tutorial section which is a hands on exercise to familiarize you with StyleVision features e High Level Procedures which describes usage at a broad level for example schema sources interaction with databases and command line options e Content Editing Procedures which explains how static and dynamic components are created and edited in the SPS e Presentation Procedures which explains how SPS components are formatted and laid out e Additional Editing Procedures which explains how a range of additional SPS editing features are used e Editing in Authentic View which describes how XML documents are edited in Authentic View The StyleVision GUI contains an Authentic View preview tab in which you can immediately test the Authentic View output e Importing HTML which describes how an XML Schema and XML document can be created that is based on the structure and content of an HTML document e A reference section containing descriptions of all symbols and commands used in StyleVision e Appendices containing information about the Altova XSLT Engine information and the conversion of DB datatypes to XML Schema datatypes technical data about StyleVision and license information How to use We suggest you read the Introduction and User Interface sections first in order to get an overview of StyleVision features and general usage Doing the tutorial next would
251. fault value will be used each time the parameter is referenced and it is overridden only if a new value is passed for that parameter on the command line To declare a parameter do the following 1 Inthe Edit Parameters dialog append or insert a new parameter by clicking the Append _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 234 Additional Editing Procedures User Declared Parameters or Insert buttons A new line appears 2 Enter the name of the parameter Parameter names must begin with a letter and can contain the characters A to Z a to z 0 to 9 and the underscore 3 Enter a default value for that parameter The value you enter is accepted as a text string You can insert any number of parameters and modify existing parameters at any time while editing either the SPS or Authentic View Note The Edit Parameters dialog contains all the user defined parameters in an SPS Referencing declared parameters Parameters can be referenced in XPath expressions by prefixing a character before the parameter name For example you could reference a parameter in the XPath expression of an Auto Calculation e g concat www company com If your SPS is DB based then you can also use parameters as the values of DB Filter criteria The DB parameters however are declared and edited in the Edit Parameters dialog Note While it is an error to reference an undeclared parameter it is not an error to declare a paramet
252. ference Edit Menu Find Find Next Replace The Find Ctrl F command 8b tows you to find words or fragments of words in the Design View JavaScript Editor Authentic View and XSLT for HTML stylesheet Design View and Authentic View Clicking the Find command in Design View or Authentic View pops up the following dialog x Find what ES MV Match whole word only Cancel Match case Note the following e In Authentic View the dynamic data XML data is searched not text from the static XSLT input e To match the entry with whole words in the XML document check Match whole word only For example an entry of soft will find only the whole word soft it will not find for example the soft in software e To match the entry with fragments of words leave the Match whole word only check box unchecked Doing this would enable you for example to enter soft and software e To make the search case insensitive leave the Match case checkbox unchecked This would enable you to find say Soft with an entry of soft XSLT for HTML and JavaScript Editor Clicking the Find command in the XSLT for HTML or JavaScript Editor tab pops up the following dialog Fina 6h lhl Find what Name v gt Find Next Options I Match whole word only JV Match case Find Previous Cancel Regular expression Advanced gt gt The following points should be noted e To enter a regular expression as the search
253. fields font font weight image a ho IE paragraphs numbering tables paged media bodies text 1 1 4 5 1 6 3 5 5 5 rows ul ho columns footer header po N cells _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 208 Presentation Procedures Working with CSS Styles In the Styles For column the selected component types are organized into the following categories each category separated from the next by a line Note Textual components These include static text strings entered directly in the SPS texts Auto Calculations autocalcs dynamic text which is included in the SPS using the contents placeholder contents and horizontal lines inserted directly in the SPS lines Data entry devices These include input fields editfields multiline input fields multiline editfields combo boxes comboboxes check boxes checkboxes radio buttons radiobuttons and buttons buttons See Using Data Entry Devices Images These are images inserted in the SPS via the Insert Image command Bookmarks and links Both bookmarks and hyperlinks are indicated as links See Bookmarks and Hyperlinks Predefined formats All predefined formats such as div p h1 and pre are indicated as paragraphs See Predefined Formats Table components These include the structural components of a table from the table component type down to the cell component type Each
254. fine the validity of the XML value of the node or Auto Calculation An XML value that falls outside this defined range is invalid If the XML value of the node is invalid this is made known to the Authentic View user by means of an error message when the XML document is validated F8 The error message that is displayed is the text you enter into the Error message field of the Additional Validation setting Setting Additional Validation To set additional validation do the following 1 Select the component for which additional validation is required 2 Inthe Properties entry helper select the Authentic group of properties and click the Edit button of the Additional Validation property screenshot below This pops up the Additional Validation dialog lE Le Authentic add children mandatory additional validation Number not within allowed range editable yes mixed markup large markup Show add Name whe XML Element is mis user Info Enter your order number es 3 Inthe Additional Validation dialog screenshot below add a row for an Additional Validation entry by clicking the Add button near the top left of the pane Add validation E r Additional validation with xPath valid when all Path results are true XPath expression Number not within allowed range i lt 500 and gt 1000 4 Inthe XPath expression column enter an XPath expression to define the validity range of the XML
255. for you to be able to use the type constructors and functions available in XSLT 2 0 The prefixes given below are conventionally used you could use alternative prefixes if you wish Namespace Name Namespace URI XML Schema types http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema XPath 2 0 functions http www w3 org 2005 xpath functions Typically these namespaces will be declared on the xsl stylesheet Of xsl transform element as shown in the following listing lt xsl stylesheet version 2 0 xmins xsl http www w3 org 1999 XSL Transform xmlns xs http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema xmlns fn http www w3 org 2005 xpath functions lt xsl stylesheet gt The following points should be noted e The Altova XSLT 2 0 Engine uses the XPath 2 0 and XQuery 1 0 Functions namespace listed in the table above as its default functions namespace So you can use XPath 2 0 and XSLT 2 0 functions in your stylesheet without any prefix If you declare the XPath 2 0 Functions namespace in your stylesheet with a prefix then you can additionally use the prefix assigned in the declaration e When using type constructors and types from the XML Schema namespace the prefix used in the namespace declaration must be used when calling the type constructor for example xs date e With the CRs of 8 June 2006 the untypedAtomic and duration datatypes dayTimeDuration and yearMonthDuration which were formerly in the XPath Datatypes namespace typically prefixed xat
256. formats such as yy and yy the base year specifies a cut off for a century For example the base year field option could be used in the definition DD MM YY base 1940 If the user enters a value that is equal to or greater than the last two digits of the base year which are considered together as a two digit positive integer then the century is the same as that of the base year If the value entered by the user is less than the integer value of the last two digits then the century is the century of the base year plus one For example if you set base 1940 then if the Authentic View user enters 50 the value entered in the XML document will be 1950 if the user enters 23 the value entered in the XML document will be 2023 Note the following points e Although two digits are commonly used as the short year format one digit and three digit short year formats can also be used with a base year e Datatypes for which short year formats can be used are xs date xs dateTime xs gYear and xs gYearMonth e If the Input Formatting is being set for an Auto Calculation component make sure that the correct datatype is selected in the Input Formatting dialog The selected date datatype should be that of the result to which the Auto Calculation evaluates e If the yy field type is used the default base year is 1930 Explicitly setting a base year overrides the default e If the yy field type is used without any base year being set then the Auth
257. formatted by selecting it and using a predefined format and or properties in Styles entry helper This formatting is visible in the design and in the output it will be applied to the contents of the node Replacing contents If another node from the schema tree is dropped into a node containing a contents placeholder then the existing contents placeholder is replaced by the new node Deleting contents The contents placeholder can be deleted by selecting it and pressing the Delete key on the keyboard Note You can create an empty template rule by deleting the contents placeholder of a node An empty template rule is useful if you wish to define that some node have no template applied to it i e produce no output Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Reference Insert Menu 325 Rest of Contents The Rest of Contents command inserts the rest of contents placeholder for that node This placeholder represents the content of unused child nodes of the current node it corresponds to the xsl apply templates rule of XSLT applied to the unused elements and text nodes of the current element Note that templates are not applied for child attributes the cest of contents placeholder can also be inserted for an element by placing the cursor inside the element tags right clicking and selecting Insert Rest of Contents Use the rest of contents placeholder in situations where you wish to process one child element in
258. from DB based SPS StyleVisionBatch v DB sps OutXSLT DB xslt e HTML file from DB based SPS StyleVisionBatch v DB sps OutHTML DB html e Combinations of DB data output on a single command line StyleVisionBatch v DB sps OutDBSchema DB xsd OutXSLT DB xslt StyleVisionBatch v DB sps OutDBXML DB xml OutXSLT DB xslt OutHTML DB html1 Parameter Usage For the XSLT transformation parameters can be passed to the XSLT stylesheet from the command line _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 138 High Level Procedures Command Line Interface StyleVisionBatch e Parameters passed to XSLT stylesheet generated from the SPS tyleVisionBatch v Test sps OutHTML Test html Smyparam MyText tyleVisionBatch v Test sps inpXML External xml OutHTML Test html myparam My Text tyleVisionBatch v Test sps OutHTML Test html OutFO Test fo myparam MyText tyleVisionBatch v Tes tyleVisionBatch v Tes sps OutHTML Test html Smyparam 2006 sps OutHTML Test html Smyparam 2006 A eae ct ct e Parameters passed to specified XSLT stylesheet tyleVisionBatch v Test sps inpXSLT External xslt OutHTML Test html myparam MyText tyleVisionBatch v Test sps inpXSLT External xslt OutHTML Test html myparam My Text S S Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Chapter 7 Content Editing Procedures 140 Content Editing Procedures
259. from and to Authentic View then the values of nodes are read afresh and Auto Calculations are executed 5 The second Auto Calculation is now carried out If this Auto Calculation is intended to update a node then as is usual for node updates a node used in the XPath expression will have to be changed before the update takes place The time lag between the updating of Node a and the evaluation of the second Auto Calculation with the updated value of Node a could be confusing for the Authentic View user To ensure that this situation does not occur it is best that the XPath expression of the second Auto Calculation contain the XPath expression of the first Auto Calculation not the updated node itself As a result the second Auto Calculation will execute with the input to the first Auto Calculation and perform that Auto calculation as part of its own Auto Calculation This enables it to be evaluated independently of the contents of Node a Example The first Auto Calculation calculates the VAT amount of a product using the nodes for i the net price and ii the VAT rate it updates the VAT amount node The second Auto Calculation calculates the gross price which is the sum of net price and VAT amount it updates the gross price node e The Auto Calculation to calculate the VAT amount is NetPrice VATRate div 100 When the VAT rate of the product is entered the Auto Calculation is executed and updates the vATAmount node e If the Au
260. ftware remain in your possession or control The terms and conditions set forth in Sections 1 g h i 2 5 b c 9 and 10 survive termination as applicable RESTRICTED RIGHTS NOTICE AND EXPORT RESTRICTIONS The Software was developed entirely at private expense and is commercial computer software provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS Use duplication or disclosure by the U S Government or a U S Government contractor or subcontractor is subject to the restrictions set forth in this Agreement and as provided in FAR 12 211 and 12 212 48 C F R 12 211 and 12 212 or DFARS 227 7202 48 C F R 227 7202 as applicable Consistent with the above as applicable Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Computer Documentation licensed to U S government end users only as commercial items and only with those rights as are granted to all other end users under the terms and conditions set forth in this Software License Agreement Manufacturer is Altova GmbH Rudolfsplatz 13a 9 A 1010 Vienna Austria EU You may not use or otherwise export or re export the Software or Documentation except as authorized by United States law and the laws of the jurisdiction in which the Software was obtained In particular but without limitation the Software or Documentation may not be exported or re exported i into or to a national or resident of any U S embargoed country or ii to anyone on the U S Treasury Department s list of Specially Designated Nationals or
261. ght of the Formatted radio button select the date datatype to which the Auto Calculation will evaluate You can now select a predefined date format from the drop down list of the definition combo box available options depend on the selected datatype or define your own format in the input field of the combo box See Input Formatting Syntax for details about the syntax to use when defining your own format Applying Input Formatting to the output The Input Formatting that you define applies to Authentic View Additionally some Input Formatting definitions not all can also be applied to HTML output To do this check the Apply Same Format to XSLT Output check box If this option is not checked or if it is not _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 232 Additional Editing Procedures Working with Dates available then only Authentic View will display the Input Formatting the output will display the value in its lexical format for nodes or in the case of Auto Calculations in the format to which the Auto Calculation evaluates Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Additional Editing Procedures User Declared Parameters 233 9 5 User Declared Parameters In an SPS user declared parameters are declared globally with a name and a default string value Once declared they can be used in XPath expressions anywhere in the SPS The default value of the parameter can be overridden for individual XSLT
262. gn color and size properties for the line 3 With the line selected in Design View in the Styles entry helper select the line component and then the box group of properties Define a margin bottom property of 12pt 4 Check the output in HTML Preview Now insert a horizontal line at the end of each news item To do this the cursor would have to be placed immediately before the end tag of the newsitem element This will cause the line to be output at the end of each newsitem element Inserting static text You have already added static text to your design When you pressed the Enter key to obtain new lines in the section Inserting Dynamic Content from XML Source whitespace static text was added In this section you will add a few static text characters to your design The SPS you have designed up to this point will produce output which looks something like this _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 58 Quick Start Tutorial Inserting Static Content Summary of News Items NanoNull Inc Launches Version 2 0 of NanoPower 2006 04 01BostonUSA Nanonull Inc today launched version 2 0 of its market leading NanoPower line of hardware and software The highlights of the new version of NanoPower are improved chip design capabilities in NanoSoft the software used to design computer chips and higher precision sand filtering processes in NanoMeld the hardware in which the transformation from sand to silicon chips is
263. h to display the result just once You cannot hide the Auto Calculation since it would then not be evaluated If there is no conditional template involved it is best to display the Auto Calculation and not display the contents of the updated node You wish not to display the result merely to update the node The best way to handle this scenario is to apply text formatting to the Auto Calculation so that it is invisible on the output medium for example by applying a white color to an Auto Calculation on a white background _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 188 Content Editing Procedures Auto Calculations Auto Calculations Based on Updated Nodes If you wish to create an Auto Calculation second Auto Calculation that uses a node updated by another Auto Calculation first Auto Calculation the SPS applies the following procedure 1 Anode used in the XPath expression of the first Auto Calculation is modified 2 All node values in the XML document are read and all Auto Calculations are executed 3 Assuming that the first Auto Calculation is executed correctly it updates the specified XML node call it Node a The second Auto Calculation which is based on Node A will be executed but will use the value of Node a before Node a was updated This is because the value of Node A was read before it was updated and has not been read since then 4 Ifthe document is now edited in any way or if document views are changed
264. hat design component is selected The table below lists SPS components and the property groups they have The following points about component types should be noted e Template components are the main template global templates and all schema nodes in the design e Content components are the content and rest of contents placeholders These represent the text content of a node or nodes from the XML document e A text component is a single string of static text A single string extends between any two components other than text components and includes whitespace if any is present e Data entry devices are input field multiline input fields combo boxes check boxes radio buttons and buttons and refer to the data entry device as well as its contents if any e A table component refers to the table structure in the design Note that it contains sub components which are considered components in their own right The sub components are row column cell header and footer e A paragraph component is any predefined format Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH User Interface Design Entry Helpers 41 The table below contains descriptions of each property group Authentic Common HTML These are SPS specific properties that are available for all component types What properties within the group are available are component specific For example when an Auto Calculation is selected the xpath property conta
265. he HTML preview you will see a string of text screenshot below AllAndrewBentincka bentinck nanonull comNadiaEdwardsn edwar This string is the result of the application of the built in templates to the selection and team elements The built in template for elements processes child elements The built in template for text nodes outputs the text in the text node The combined effect of these two built in templates is to output the text content of all the descendant nodes of the selection and team elements The text all comes from selection byrelevance and is followed by the text output of team member descendant nodes first last email in document order Note that the ia attribute of member is not output because as an attribute it is not considered a child of member Creating a global template for selection Since the content of selection is not required in the output you should create an empty global template for selection so that its contents are not processed Do this as follows 1 In Design View right click selection in the Global Elements tree in the Schema Sources entry helper 2 Inthe context menu that pops up select Make Global Remove Global A global template for selection is created screenshot below selection Auna 3 Inthe global template click the contents placeholder and press the Delete key of your keyboard The contents placeholder is deleted 4 Check the HTML preview The text a11 is no longer present i
266. he elements of the selected table model If an element name in the Default column is displayed in red this indicates that either no corresponding schema element exists or that a corresponding schema element exists but has not been mapped to the table model element in the latter case you must enter the name of the corresponding schema element into the User Defined column Caution If all the element names are displayed in black be aware that this does not necessarily mean that the table structure of the schema corresponds exactly with the selected table model There may still be additional elements in the table structure of the schema that could cause errors You should carefully check your schema for this Also check the attributes of the schema elements for exact correspondence and naming Absent or wrongly named attributes will cause validation errors if the Authentic View user uses table formatting properties that use these attributes Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Reference Authentic Menu 347 Assign Template XML File The Assign Template XML command assigns an XML file to the SPS SPS When the SPS is opened in Authentic View it displays the data present in the assigned XML file according to the design of the SPS The XML file therefore provides the starting data of a new XML file In effect it provides the data for an template XML file which is based on the SPS and can be saved under any name We therefore call
267. he number of Employee elements in an office element with count Employee or sum the values of all price elements in each Invoice element with sum Price or join the FirstName and LastName elements of a Person element with concat FirstName LastName In this way you can generate new data from dynamically changing data in the XML document and send the generated data to the output e Calculations based on the dynamic structure of the document For example you can use the position function of XPath to dynamically insert row numbers in a dynamic table or to dynamically number the sections of a document This has the advantage of automatically generating information based on dynamically changing document structures e Inserting data from external XML documents The doc function of XPath 2 0 provides access to the document root of external XML documents and thus enables node content from the external XML document to be inserted in the SPS design e The value of nodes in the XML document can be changed by updating them with the value of an Auto Calculation For example the node addressee could be updated with an XPath expression like concat Title FirstName LastName e The Auto Calculation feature is also a useful way to display the contents of some node at another location _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 184 Content Editing Procedures Auto Calculations Editing and Moving Au
268. he second Auto Calculation screenshot below Total number of news items AutoCalc Period covered by news items AutoCalc Select by relevance 2 Drag the byrelevance node from the Schema Sources entry helper screenshot below and drop it after the newly entered static text TEE ERCI sll z E Root elements presswatch E selection byrelevance bydate bysource newsitems E team T All Global Elements a 3 Inthe context menu that appears select Create Combo Box This pops up the dialog shown below Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Quick Start Tutorial Using Conditions 71 Edit Combo Box x for Element byrelevance DK Use schema enumerations Cancel C Use list of values Visible Entry Use XPath expression distinct values televance Bi 4 In the Edit Combo Box dialog screenshot above select Use XPath Expression and enter the XPath expression distinct values relevance This expression selects unique values of all relevance elements in the XML document 5 Click OK to finish The combo box is inserted and the design will look something like this Total number of news items AutoCalc Period covered by news items AutoCalc Select by relevance selection 4 Path Poyretevance R selection SX ML 6 Switch to Authentic View When you click the dropdown arrow of the combo box notice
269. he use of legacy character sets Unicode enables a single software product or a single web site to be targeted across multiple platforms languages and countries without re engineering It allows data to be transported through many different systems without corruption _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 402 Appendices Technical Data Windows NT4 0 2000 XP Altova s XML products provide full Unicode support To edit an XML document you will also need a font that supports the Unicode characters being used by that document Windows NT typically includes support for all common single byte writing systems in its Arial Times and Courier New fonts and will additionally include all required fonts for the writing system in your own country i e if you install the Japanese version of Windows NT you will automatically have fonts that support the Katakana Hiragana and Kanji writing systems as well as the input methods and dictionaries to enter Kanji and to switch between Katakana and Hiragana If you wish to edit any document from a foreign writing system you may want to install additional Windows NT components for that writing system or purchase special Unicode fonts for these writing systems such fonts are available from all leading type vendors Please note that most fonts only contain a very specific subset of the entire Unicode range and are therefore typically targeted at the corresponding writing system Consequently you m
270. here there are sub expressions the context node may change Note that the current function is an XSLT function not an XPath function and cannot therefore be used in StyleVision s Auto Calculations and Conditional Templates To select the current node in an expression use the for expression of XPath 2 0 In a well formed XML document the outermost element is known as the document element It is a child of the document node and in a well formed XML document there is only one document element In the GUI the document element is referred to as the root element The document node represents and contains the entire document It is the root node of the tree representation of the document and it is represented in an XPath expression as In the Schema Sources window of StyleVision it is represented by the legend Root elements StyleVision specific terms Terms that refer to StyleVision mechanisms concepts and components dynamic items global element global template local template main schema Items that originate in XML data sources Dynamic items may be text tables and lists also images and hyperlinks when the URIs are dynamic An element in the Global Elements list in the Schema Sources window In an XML Schema all elements defined as global elements will be listed in the Global Elements list In a DTD all elements are global elements and are listed in the Global Elements list Global templates can be defin
271. hout the written permission of the publisher Products that are referred to in this document may be either trademarks and or registered trademarks of the respective owners The publisher and the author make no claim to these trademarks While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this document the publisher and the author assume no responsibility for errors or omissions or for damages resulting from the use of information contained in this document or from the use of programs and source code that may accompany it In no event shall the publisher and the author be liable for any loss of profit or any other commercial damage caused or alleged to have been caused directly or indirectly by this document Published 2006 _ 2006 Altova GmbH Table of Contents 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 4 2 5 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 De StyleVision 2006 3 About this Documentation 6 Introduction 10 WhatIs an SPS Rentan N cages Sabedau ibn cots dad cel N 11 PROGUCEF CAMPOS acs seen cus vestantvaniecostdbedsshncatscnds dbedecvespeteneussevecvelanstecsanedeaviegeanecadvededvescusthes 13 TSIM OO Gayot csi dnc e E E E E cocegssueisetes Ave E EE 15 Setting up StyleVision ccccecscecsceessecssecssecssecesecesecnseceseceeeeseeeseeeseeeeeseeeseeeeeeteeesaeenaees 18 User Interface 20 Maii WIDOW sete ctictec Sense fan eh ag eavente eve oe i Ee dna canada RAEE EEEE 21 AV Design View cescssedidcsaccorticchetectsaseadecsantadslececdavesteiecadec
272. iage return and or linefeed inserted by pressing the Return key then separate list items are created for each text fragment separated by a CR LF e With the cursor placed in a text fragment click Insert Bullets and Numbering select the marker type and click OK That text fragment till the CR LF separators on either side is created as a list item _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 158 Content Editing Procedures Creating Lists Dynamic Lists Dynamic lists display the content of a set of sibling nodes of the same name with each node represented as a single list item in the list The element the instances of which are to appear as the list items of the list is created as the list The mechanism and usage are explained below General usage mechanism e Any element can be created as a list e When an element is created as a list the instances of that element are created as the items of the list For example if in a department element there are several person elements i e instances and you wanted to create a list of all the persons in the department then you must create the person element as the list e Once the list has been created for the element you can modify the appearance or content of the list or list item by inserting additional static or dynamic content such as text Auto Calculations dynamic content etc Creating a dynamic list Create a dynamic list as follows 1 Drag the element to be
273. ibute nodes are not selected they are not child nodes that is they are not on the child axis of XPath e If a global template of a child element is used in the parent template then the child element does not count as having been used locally As a result the rest of contents placeholder will also select such child elements However if a global template of a child element is copied locally then this usage counts as local usage and the child element will not be selected by the rest of contents placeholder Note You can create an empty template rule by deleting the contents placeholder of a node An empty template rule is useful if you wish to define that some node not be processed i e produce no output _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 148 Content Editing Procedures Using Data Entry Devices 7 2 Using Data Entry Devices Nodes in the XML document can be created as data entry devices such as input fields and combo boxes Data entry devices are intended for easier editing in Authentic View For example an input field makes it clear to the Authentic View user that input is expected in this location while a combo box lists as well as restricts the values a user can enter When data is entered into a data entry device the data is inserted into the XML document as element content or as an attribute s value In the HTML output the data entry device is rendered as an object that is the same as that displaye
274. ic View toolbar icons Authentic View main window Authentic View entry helpers Authentic View context menus _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 246 Authentic View Interface Overview of the GUI The Authentic Preview provides you with menu commands toolbar icons and context menus with which to edit the XML document that is displayed in the Main Window Menu bar The menus available in the menu bar are described in detail in the User Reference section of your product documentation Toolbar The symbols and icons displayed in the toolbar are described in the section Authentic View toolbar icons Main window This is the window in which the Working XML document is displayed and edited It is described in the section Authentic View main window Status Bar The Status Bar displays the XPath to the currently selected node In the Authentic Preview of StyleVision the XPath to the currently selected node is indicated in the Schema Tree where the currently selected node is highlighted in gray The XPath in Authentic Preview is not displayed in a status bar Context menus These are the menus that appear when you right click in the Main Window The available commands are context sensitive editing commands i e they allow you to manipulate structure and content relevant to the selected node Such manipulations include inserting appending or deleting a node adding entities or cutting and pasting content Alt
275. icle Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH High Level Procedures Creating the SPS Structure 99 8 1 B lll z Schema sources HE SUSER1 User E Z Root elements E Article D Author Title Para Bold Italic T All Global Elements 5 To move the elements Bold and Italic and the attribute rp to the level of children of Para select each individually and drag to the Para element When a bent downward pointing arrow y appears drop the dragged node It will be created as a child of Para screenshot below 700l D lll z Schema sources E SUSER1 User E Z Root elements E Article Author Title o Para ID Bold Italic T All Global Elements 6 When any element other than the document element is selected adding a new element or attribute adds the new node at the same level as the selected element Drag a node element or attribute into an element node to create it as a child of the element node _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 100 High Level Procedures Creating the SPS Structure Editing node names and deleting nodes To edit the name of an element or attribute double click in the name and edit the name To delete a node select it and click the Remove icon in the toolbar Alternatively select Remove from the context menu Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH High Level Procedu
276. ies 215 Authentic View and SPS 89 and standard industry schemas 89 and Working XML File 23 Attributes entry helper 251 changing view to 247 context menus 251 255 description of 23 document creation process 89 document display 249 editing dynamic tables 247 Elements entry helper 251 Entities entry helper 251 entry helpers in 246 251 formatting text in 247 inserting tables 345 interface 244 main window in 246 249 markup display in 247 249 menu bar in 246 overview of GUI 246 project window in 246 save edits 304 SPS Tables 258 status bar in 246 tables SPS and XML 257 toolbar buttons for 286 toolbar icons 247 toolbar in 246 usage of important features 256 usage of XML tables 259 XML table icons 263 XML tables 259 XPath to selected node 246 Auto Hide feature of Design Entry Helpers 27 Auto add Date Picker 349 Auto Calculation command for inserting in design 330 _ 2006 Altova GmbH 420 Index Auto Calculation updating node with value of 330 Auto Calculations and conditions 194 based on result of other Auto Calculations 188 creating editing formatting 184 formatting of date results 230 hiding 186 how to use 183 in Quick Start tutorial 67 moving 184 symbol in Design View 293 updating nodes in XML document with value of 186 188 B Background Information 397 backwards compatibility of XSLT 2 0 Engine 381
277. in Authentic View Clicking the Define DTD Entities button pops up the Define DTD Entities dialog See Authentic Define Entities for details of usage Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Reference Toolbars 287 Format The Format toolbar screenshot below contains commands that assign commonly used inline and block formatting properties to the item s selected in the SPS Predefined HTML formats The HTML format selected from the dropdown list is applied to the selection in Design View For example a selection of div applies HTML s lt div gt element around the current selection in Design View Text properties The bold italic and underline inline text properties can be directly applied to the current selection in Design View by clicking on the appropriate button Alignment Alignment properties left aligned centered right aligned and justified can be directly applied to the selection in Design View Lists Lists can be inserted at the cursor insertion point or the selection in the SPS can be converted to a list _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 288 Reference Toolbars Standard The Standard toolbar contains buttons for commands that provide important file related and editing functionality These buttons are listed below with a brief description For a fuller description of a command click the command to go to its description in the Reference section New from Ctrl N Crea
278. in the StyleVision application folder Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Chapter 4 User Interface 20 User Interface 4 User Interface The StyleVision GUI illustration below consists of the following parts e A menu bar Click on a menu to display the items in that menu All menus and their items are described in the User Reference section The menu bar also contains the Minimize Restore and Close Active Document buttons e A toolbar area The various toolbars and the command shortcuts in each toolbar are described in the User Reference section e A tabbed Main Window which displays one or more open SPS documents at a time In this window you can edit the design of the SPS edit the content of Authentic View and preview the XSLT stylesheets and output e The Design Entry Helpers the Schema Sources Design Tree Style Repository Properties and Styles windows which can be docked within the application GUI or made to float on the screen e A status bar which displays application status information Menu Bar Toolbars a Minimize Restore and Style Repository Close Active Document buttons Main Window Active document Scroll document tabs Active view of active document Design Authentic ae N l Doct sps Doc2ss J lt Status Bar The Main Window and Design Entry Helpers are described in more detail in the sub sections of this section Note The menu bar and toolbars can b
279. in the element content to select it appears in the combo box The Attributes Entry Helper shown in the figures below has a para element in the combo box Clicking the arrow in the combo box drops down a list of all the para element s ancestors up to the document s root element which in this case is OrgChart Attributes para Desc Office OrgChart Below the combo box a list of valid attributes for that element is displayed in this case for para If an attribute is mandatory on a given element then it appears in bold In the example below there are no mandatory attributes Attributes ax para v xsktype Entities _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 254 Authentic View Interface To enter a value for an attribute click in the value field of the attribute and enter the value This creates the attribute and its value in the XML document Please note Entering a value for an attribute will have an effect in the Authentic View display only if such an effect has been specified in the StyleVision Power Stylesheet Entities Entry Helper The Entities Entry Helper allows you to insert an entity in your document Entities can be used to insert special characters or text fragments that occur often in a document such as the name of a company To insert an entity place the cursor at the point in the text where you want to have the entity inserted then double click the entity in the Entities Entr
280. ing Cursor style setting for user interface Note The visibility display float and position properties are not applied in Design View and Authentic View Entering property values Property values can be entered in one two or three ways depending on the property Entered directly in the Value column To do this select a property double click in its Value column enter the value using the keyboard and press Enter or click anywhere in the GUI By selecting a value from the dropdown list of the combo box for that property Click the down arrow of the combo box to drop down the list of property value options In the screenshot below the options for the background repeat property are displayed Select the required value from the dropdown list By using the Entry Helper at the right hand side of the Value column for that property Two types of entry helper are available and these are available only for properties to which they are relevant i a color palette for selecting colors in the screenshot below see color and background color properties and ii a dialog for browsing for files in the screenshot below see the background image property Group Attribute background background attachment common background color details background image effects background position font background repeat IE color numbering paged media text ul Modifying or deleting a property value If a property value
281. ing components These components are each of a particular component type In the selection you make all components of a single component type are listed together by component type for example 50 texts in the screenshot below autocalcs color font family Arial fa contents ine common font size Spt 10pt smaller v checkbox details font style E comboboxes effects font variant j editfields font weight E image IE paragraphs numbering tables paged media bodies text rows Ul columns footer header cells 2 After making the selection in Design View you select the component type in the Styles For column If there is more than one component for that component type then styles will be applied to all these components How to make a selection for local styling is described in Selecting SPS Components to Style After selecting the components to style in the Styles For column of the Styles window the styles for that selection are defined in the Property Definitions column How to do this is described in the section Setting CSS Property Values Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Presentation Procedures Working with CSS Styles 207 Selecting SPS Components to Style Any component in the SPS design except node tags can be selected for the definition of a style Components that can be styled are i a static SPS component such as an Auto Calculation or a text
282. ing XML File e An XSLT file which is automatically generated from the currently active SPS file Save Generated DB Schema When you connect to a DB in order to create a DB based SPS StyleVision generates and loads a temporary XML Schema based on the DB structure The Save Generated DB Schema command enables you to save this generated XML Schema Save Generated DB XML Data The Save Generated DB XML Data command generates and saves an XML file that contains data from the DB in an XML structure conformant with the structure of the XML Schema generated from the DB If DB Filters have been defined in the StyleVision Power Stylesheet these are applied to the data import Save Generated User Defined Schema This command is activated when the SPS involves a user defined schema The schema you create in the Schema Sources entry helper is saved as an XML Schema with the xsd extension Save Generated User Defined XML Data The data in the imported HTML file that corresponds to the user defined schema is saved as an XML file The corresponding data are the nodes in the HTML document in Design View that have been created as XML Schema nodes _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 306 Reference File Menu Edit Schema Definition in XMLSpy This command opens the schema file in XMLSpy so that you can edit it After you have edited and saved the modifications to your schema you must reload the SPS so that the schema in the SPS
283. ing XML File with the XSLT for HTML The output is generated afresh each time HTML preview is clicked Note that it is the saved version of the Working XML File that is transformed not the temporary version that is edited with Authentic View This means that any modifications made in Authentic View will be reflected in HTML preview only after these modifications have been saved to the Working XML File File Save Authentic XML Data If no Working XML File is assigned when HTML preview is selected in the HTML View tab you will be prompted to assign a Working XML File For DB based SPSs there is no need to assign a Working XML Eile since a temporary non editable XML file is automatically generated when the DB is loaded and this XML file is used as the Working XML File Note The output files generated from the SPS can be separately generated and saved using the File Save Generated Files command Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH User Interface Design Entry Helpers 27 4 2 Design Entry Helpers The Design Entry Helpers are GUI components that help you design the SPS and provide information about individual SPS design components They are enabled when the Design View of a document is active and are disabled when Authentic View or Output View HTML View is active There are five Design Entry Helpers isted below each of which is described in a sub section of this section Schema Sources Design Tree Styl
284. ing dates in the correct lexical format for nodes of xs date and xs dateTime datatype 4 April M TWT FS Today No Timezone The lexical format is entered appropriately according to the datatype e For xs date the format of the entry is yyyy MM DD HH MM where the timezone component prefixed by is optional according to the XML Schema specification A value for the timezone component can be selected in the Date Picker e For xs dateTime the format of the entry is yyyY MM DDTHH MM SS HH MM The timezone component prefixed by is optional according to the XML Schema specification A value for the timezone component can be selected by the user Inserting and deleting a Date Picker in the design A Date Picker can be inserted in the SPS design for any node that is of datatype xs date or xs dateTime and when that node is created either as contents or as an input field A Date Picker can be inserted in one of two ways e By default when a node of datatype xs date Or xs dateTime is created in the SPS To set this default toggle the Auto Add Date Picker feature ON Do this by selecting de selecting the command Authentic Auto add Date Picker Alternatively click the icon in the toolbar When the Auto Addition of the Date Picker is switched on the Date Picker is inserted when any element of datatype xs date Of xs dateTime is created as either contents or an input field or changed to either of these two components e By cli
285. ings dialog determines the order in which these format strings appear in the Input Formatting dialog The customized format strings appear above the supplied predefined formats To edit a custom format string double click the entry in the Predefined Format Strings dialog e To delete a custom format string select it and click the Delete button in the dialog Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Reference Tools Menu 359 11 10 Tools Menu The Tools menu contains the spell check command and commands that enable you to customize StyleVision The description of the Tools menu commands is organized into the following sub sections e Spelling e Spelling Options e Customize e Options _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 360 Reference Tools Menu Spelling The Spelling ShifttF7 command runs a spelling check on the SPS in Design View or the document in Authentic View depending on which is active On clicking this command the dialog shown below appears Words that are not present in the selected dictionary are displayed in document order and one ata time in the Not in Dictionary field of the dialog and highlighted in the Design Document Spelling English U S f x Not in Dictionary Ignore Once Suggestions Ignore All Add to Dictionary Change Change All Recheck Document Options You can then select an entry from the list in the Suggestions pane and click
286. ins the XPath expression that determines the value of the Auto Calculation and the Format property enables you to define Input Formatting for the result of the Auto Calculation Similarly when the contents placeholder is selected if the datatype of the node is a numeric datatype then the Format property is available it is not available if the node datatype is non numeric The Common property group is available for all component types except the Template component type It contains the following properties class dir id lang and title Contains properties that enable JavaScript functions to be defined for the following client side HTML events onclick ondblclick onkeydown onkeypressed onkeyup onmousedown onmousemove onmouseout onmouseover onmouseup Available for the following component types data entry devices image link table paragraphs Note that there are different types of data entry devices and paragraphs and that tables have sub components These properties are HTML properties that can be set on the corresponding HTML elements img table p div etc The available properties therefore vary according to the component selected Setting property values Property values can be entered in one two or three ways depending on the property see screenshot below e Entered directly in the Value column To do this select a property double click in its Value column enter the value using the keyboard and p
287. ion User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Content Editing Procedures Auto Calculations 185 above in which you can edit the XPath expression Properties common Format event Update XML node in Authentic user Info XPath count n1 Departmentin1 Person ah Formatting Auto Calculations You can apply predefined formats and CSS styles to Auto Calculations just as you would to normal text select the Auto Calculation and apply the formatting Moving Auto Calculations You can move an Auto Calculation to another location by clicking the Auto Calculation to select it and dragging it to the new location You can also use cut copy and paste to move copy an Auto Calculation Note however that the XPath expression will need to be changed if the context node in the new location is not the same as that in the previous location Summary of important points Note the following points e An Auto Calculation can be inserted anywhere in the Design Document e The point at which you insert the Auto Calculation determines the context node for the XPath evaluation e In Authentic View an Auto Calculation is re evaluated each time any value relevant to the calculation that is any node included in the XPath expression changes e An Auto Calculation result is non editable in Authentic View or any other output view e Any node in the XML document can be updated with the result of the Auto Calculation _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova
288. ion string building for DB 105 Content editing procedures 140 Content model effect of ambiguity on design 144 _ 2006 Altova GmbH Index 421 Contents command for inserting in design 324 Contents placeholder in Quick Start tutorial 50 inserting node as contents 141 Context menus in Authentic View 251 255 Context node in XPath dialog 297 Copy command 310 Copyright information 405 count function in XPath 1 0 378 count function in XPath 2 0 see fn count 385 Cover Enterprise Edition creation of 33 Creating new SPS document in Quick Start tutorial 47 Criteria in DB Filters 115 CSS styles in Quick Start tutorial 61 see also Styles 43 CSS stylesheets also see Styles 200 external stylesheets 200 import precedence of external 200 media applied to 200 Custom dictionaries for SPS spell checks 361 Customize dialog for customizing StyleVision 317 Customizing StyleVision 364 Cut command 310 D Database see under DB 3 toolbar buttons for editing 288 Databases see also DB 265 see under DB 102 Data entry devices 148 symbol in Design View 293 Datatypes conversion of DB to XML Schema 389 in DB Filters 115 in XPath 2 0 and XQuery 1 0 385 see also XML Schema datatypes 390 Date formatting of 219 Date Picker adding by default to date nodes 349 and XSD datatypes 228 command for inserting in design 326 description of use 228 inserting in SPS 228
289. ionary to be modified and click Modify This opens the dictionary editor shown below for the dictionary custom t1x Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Reference Tools Menu 363 Word Nanonull Dictionary Vereno You can now add words to the dictionary and delete words To add a word place the cursor in the Word input field enter the word and click Add To delete a word select the word in the Dictionary pane and click Delete _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 364 Reference Tools Menu Customize The customize command lets you customize StyleVision to suit your personal needs Commands The Commands tab of the Customize dialog allows you to place individual commands in the menu bar and the toolbar Commands Toolbars Keyboard Menu Options Categories Commands Save Generated FO File Save Generated PDF File Save Generated DB Schema HTML Import Save Generated DB XML Data Properties Tools Window Unle To add a command to the menu bar or toolbar select the command in the Commands pane of the Commands tab and drag it to the menu bar or toolbar When the cursor is placed over a valid position an I beam appears and the command can be dropped at this location If the location is invalid a check mark appears When you drop the command it is created as an icon if the command already has an associated icon otherwise the comma
290. is output the news item template if the user selection is A11 After you have completed this section save the design Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Quick Start Tutorial Using Global Templates and Rest of Contents 77 5 7 Using Global Templates and Rest of Contents Global templates are useful for specifying the processing of an element globally This enables the rules of the global template defined in one location to be used at multiple locations in the stylesheet A global template can be used in two ways e The rules of the global template can be copied to the local template e A local template in the main template can pass processing of that node to the global template after completing which processing resumes in the main template in this case the global template is said to be invoked or used There are two mechanisms that are used to invoke a global template from the main template e A local template references a global template e A rest of contents instruction in the main template applies templates to the descendant elements of the current element that is to the rest of contents of the current element If a global template exists for one of the descendant elements the global template is applied for that element Otherwise the built in template for elements is applied In this section you will create a design for the team members template using the rest of contents instruction and a global
291. ision User Manual 394 Appendices Datatypes in DB Generated XML Schemas ODBC When an XML Schema is generated from an ODBC database DB the ODBC DB datatypes are converted to XML Schema datatypes as listed in the table below ODBC Datatype XML Schema Datatype SQL CHAR SQL VARCHAR n S XS SUNY _LONGVARCHAR xs string wn 10 Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Appendices Datatypes in DB Generated XML Schemas 395 ADO When an XML Schema is generated from an ADO database DB the ADO DB datatypes are converted to XML Schema datatypes as listed in the table below adChar _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 396 Appendices Datatypes in DB Generated XML Schemas Sybase When an XML Schema is generated from a Sybase database DB the Sybase DB datatypes are converted to XML Schema datatypes as listed in the table below Sybase Datatype XML Schema Datatype ae a f f a fee ee Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Appendices Technical Data 397 12 3 Technical Data This section contains useful background information on the technical aspects of your software It is organized into the following sections OS and Memory Requirements Altova XML Parser Altova XSLT and XQuery Engines Unicode Support Internet Usage _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User M
292. ision offers the option of selecting multiple root elements document elements This means that within the main template there can be local templates for each of the active document elements The one that is executed during processing will be that for the element which is the document element of the XML instance document being processed Global templates A global template is defined for a global element It specifies instructions for the selected schema element and is invoked by a call from the main template The processing model is similar to that of declarative programming languages in that a single template is defined and invoked multiple times Global templates are invoked in two situations e When an element in the main template has been set to reference its global template done by right clicking and selecting Make Global Template e When a rest of contents is inserted within an element in a local template and the rest of the contents of that element includes an element for which a global template exists Global templates are useful if an element occurs within various elements or in various locations and a single set of instructions is required for all occurrences For example assume that a para element must be formatted the same no matter whether it occurs in a chapter section appendix OF blockquote element An effective approach would be to define a global template for para and then ensure that in the main template the global te
293. it as soon as the check mark icon appears below the mouse pointer To reset a context menu 1 Select the context menu from the combo box and 2 Click the Reset button just below the context menu name A prompt appears asking if _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 368 Reference Tools Menu you are sure you want to reset the context menu To close a context menu window e Click on the Close icon at the top right of the title bar or e Click the Close button of the Customize dialog box Menu animations The menu animation option specifies the way a menu is displayed when a menu is clicked Select an option from the drop down list of menu animations Menu shadows If you wish to have menus displayed with a shadow around it select this option All menus will then have a shadow Options The Options tab allows you to customize additional features of the toolbar i x Commands Toolbars Keyboard Menu Options Toolbar M Show ScreenTips on toolbars MV Show shortcut keys in ScreenTips Tl Large Icons Screen Tips for toolbar items will be displayed if the Show Screen Tips option is checked The Screen Tips option has a sub option for whether shortcuts where available are displayed in the Screen Tips or not Toolbar items can also be displayed as large icons To do this check the Large Icons option Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Reference Tools Menu 369 Options
294. it is also retrieved through a http port 80 connection once you validate the XML document This may also happen automatically upon opening a document if you have instructed the application to automatically validate files upon opening in the File tab of the Options dialog Tools Options This functionality is available in XMLSpy and Authentic Desktop If you are using the Send by Mail command File Send by Mail in XMLSpy the current selection or file is sent by means of any MAPI compliant mail program installed on the user s PC Note All Internet communication is initiated only when directly requested by you from you This functionality is important in an XML development environment since XML is after all a technology closely related to the Internet Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Appendices License Information 405 12 4 License Information This section contains e Information about the distribution of this software product e Information about the copyrights related to this software product e The End User License Agreement governing the use of this software product Please read this information carefully It is binding upon you since you agreed to these terms when you installed this software product _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 406 Appendices License Information Electronic Software Distribution This product is available through electronic software distribution
295. item marker Bullets and Numbering A x Plain Bullets Numbering To create a static list place the cursor at the location in the design where the list is required and click the Bullets and Numbering command Select the list item marker you want and click OK An empty list item is created at that point with the selected marker Type in the required text for that list item Press Enter to create a new list item in that list To create a dynamic list select Bullet and Numbering from the context menu that pops up when you drop a node into the design Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Reference Insert Menu 323 Horizontal Line The Horizontal Line command inserts a horizontal line at the cursor insertion point This command is not available when an SPS component is selected To set properties for the horizontal line select the line in the design and in the Properties entry helper select line and specify values for properties in the ine group see screenshot below aia EB be Properties For line Authentic align template coman color 004080 J amp event noshade HTML size width You can specify the following properties for the line its color size thickness width in the design alignment and the noshade property _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 324 Reference Insert Menu Contents The Contents command inserts a contents placeh
296. ithin it see screenshot below lf the condition was inserted with a component selected the condition is created around the component and that component becomes the template of the first branch To select the entire condition click the cell with the question mark To select the first Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Content Editing Procedures Condition Templates 191 branch click the cell with the number one After creating a condition with one branch which may or may not have a template within it you can create as many additional branches as required Creating additional branches Additional branches are created one at a time An additional branch is created via the context menu screenshot below and can be created in two ways i without any template within it Add New Branch and ii with a copy of an existing template within the new branch Copy Branch Move Branch Up Move Branch Down Add New Branch Copy Branch Delete Branch To create a new branch right click any branch of the condition and select Condition Add New Branch from the context menu The Edit XPath Expression dialog will pop up After entering an XPath expression and clicking OK a new empty branch is added to the condition This is indicated in the design by a new cell being added to the condition the new cell has a number incremented by one over the last branch prior to the addition To create a copy of an existing b
297. ity and country 3 Drag the dateline element into the design and drop it at the beginning of the newly created empty line screenshot below Main template content REE content RE 4 Switch to HTML Preview and look carefully at the output of dateline screenshot below Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Quick Start Tutorial Inserting Dynamic Content from XML Source 53 NanoNull Inc Launches Version 2 0 of NanoPower 2006 04 01 NanoNull Inc Jumps 3 on Release of New NanoPower Version 2006 04 01 NanoNull Shares Up 10 on Month Following New NanoPower Version 2006 04 25 NanoDiamonds Project to Go Ahead 2006 05 06 Design Authentic Preview HTMI 4 Notice that while the contents of the date children of dateline elements have been output no contents have been output for the place children of dateline This is because the place data is contained in the attributes city and country and attribute contents are not output when the attribute s parent element is processed 5 InDesign View go to the menu command Authentic Auto Add Date Picker and toggle it off to deactivate the auto addition of the date picker The icon will have no border when toggled off This step is required if the date picker is not to be inserted automatically when a node of type xs date Or xs dateTime is inserted into the design which you will do in the next step 6 Drag the date element from the Schema Sources e
298. ity is then enter a command such as styleVisionBatch v Test sps OutXSLT Test xslt and press Enter to execute the command e Aseries of commands can be entered in a batch file for batch processing For example ECHO OFF CLS StyleVisionBatch v Test sps inpXSLT EN xslt OutHT StyleVisionBatch v Test sps inpXSLT DE xslt OutHT StyleVisionBatch v Test sps inpXSLT FR xslt OutHT TestEN html TestDE html TestFR html seg E When the batch file is processed the commands are executed and the files generated _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 134 High Level Procedures Command Line Interface StyleVisionBatch StyleVisionBatch Syntax The syntax for the command line interface utility StyleVisionBatch is StyleVisionBatch lt Stylevision exe gt lt options gt where StyleVisionBatch lt Stylevision exe gt lt options gt StyleVisionBatch options is the CLI utility which is located in the StyleVision application folder is the StyleVision executable file it needs to be specified only if the StyleVision executable is not named stylevision exe or is not located in the same folder as StyleVisionBatch exe If specified the name must end iN exe One or more of the options listed below StyleVisionBatch options may be entered in any order In the listing below they are organized into groups so as to provide a better overview e Utility
299. ken from a node in the source document or a combination of both static and dynamic parts e Static bookmarks can be inserted These serve as anchors that can be linked to with a hyperlink e Parameters can be declared globally for the entire SPS A parameter is declared with a name and a string value and can be used in XPath expressions in the SPS The parameter value you declare is the default value and can be overridden by a value passed from the command line e With the Input Formatting feature the contents of numeric XML Schema datatype nodes can be formatted as required for Authentic View display and in the case of some formats optionally for output Input Formatting can also be used to format the result of an Auto Calculation e JavaScript functions can be used in the SPS to provide user defined functionality for Authentic View and HTML output e A number of predefined HTML formats are available via the GUI and can be applied to individual SPS components e A large number of CSS text formatting and layout properties can be applied to individual SPS components via the Styles entry helper e Additionally CSS styles can be defined for HTML selectors at the global level of an SPS and in external CSS stylesheets These style rules will be applied to Authentic View and HTML output thus providing considerable formatting and layout flexibility Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Introduction Terminology 15 3 3 Ter
300. l 92 High Level Procedures Creating the SPS Structure 6 2 Creating the SPS Structure The structure of the SPS is defined in its main template The main template consists of components which may be dynamic content taken from the XML document or static content inserted directly in the SPS A dynamic component is most commonly the text content of a node or nodes but may also have a structure in the SPS as when an element from the XML document is inserted as a dynamic table or a dynamic list Static components are usually single items such as a text string or a horizontal line but some components such as static tables and static lists may have a substructure The main factors that influence the structure of the SPS are e The schema sources and what schema trees they make available for use in the design e The use of and interaction between main template and global templates These factors are discussed in the sub sections of this section Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH High Level Procedures Creating the SPS Structure 93 Schema Sources The schema sources are the starting point of the design and design structure can be influenced by i choices you make during schema selection and ii the root elements you select in the schema Schema selection The selection of the schema is done in the Schema Sources entry helper using the Add Schema button screenshot below eee ele Add XML Schema D
301. l You have learned the most important aspects of creating an SPS e How to create the structure of the document main template and global templates e How to insert dynamic and static content in the design using a variety of dynamic and static SPS components e How to use CSS styles in external stylesheets in global style rules and in local style rules e How to use Auto Calculations to derive additional information from the available XML data e How to use conditions to filter the XML data and how to obtain different outputs depending on values in the XML data For a more detailed description of these features see the corresponding sections in the following four sections High Level Procedures Content Editing Procedures Presentation Procedures Additional Editing Procedures These sections also contain descriptions of several other StyleVision features not encountered in the Quick Start tutorial Using the SPS After completing the SPS you should also try out the two main uses of SPS e Editing XML documents in the Authentic View of XMLSpy or Authentic Desktop These two products provide a full feature Authentic View in which you can try out the entry helpers and context menu To edit QuickStart xm1 in Authentic View in XMLSpy or Authentic Desktop associate the XML file with MyQuickStart sps and switch to Authentic View e Generating XSLT stylesheets for transforming the XML file to HTML output The XSLT stylesheets can be
302. le In the SPS one DB Filter can be created for each top level data table in the XML Schema i e for the data tables that are the children of the DB element Each time a DB Filter is created or modified the data from the DB is re loaded into the temporary non editable XML file that is generated for the DB In this way DB Filters help you to keep the XML file down to an optimal size and to thus make processing for report generation more efficient Note Using a DB Filter modifies the data that is imported into the temporary non editable XML File If you save an SPS with a DB Filter and then generate an XML File from the SPS the generated XML File will be filtered according to the criteria in the DB Filter Creating a DB Filter 1 Inthe Design Document or Schema Tree select the top level data table element for which you wish to create a DB Filter either by clicking the start or end tag of the element or by selecting the element in the schema tree 2 Select Edit Edit DB Filters or click the icon in the toolbar The following dialog is displayed Edit Database Filters i as first character in value signifies SS a Append AND Append OR Append OR beet elete Parameters OK Cancel OK 3 Click the Append AND or Append OR button This appends an empty criterion for the filter shown below _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 116 High Level Procedures Working with Databases Edit D
303. lement gt parent gt eT gt contents G1 parent parent gt e2 gt contents lt e2 paren parent gt e3 gt contents lt ed lt parend J Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Content Editing Procedures Inserting XML Content as Text 147 Rest of Contents The rest of contents placeholder applies templates to all the remaining child elements of the element for which the template has been created As an example consider the following e An element parent has 4 child elements childi to child4 e Inthe template for element parent some processing has been explicitly defined for the child1 and chiid4 child elements This results in only the childi and child4 child elements being processed The elements child2 and child3 will not be processed Now if the rest of contents placeholder is inserted within the template for parent then not only will childi and child4 be processed using the explicitly defined processing rules in the template Additionally templates will be applied for the child2 and chil1d3 child elements If global templates for these are defined then the global templates will be used Otherwise the built in default templates for element attribute and text nodes will be applied Important It is important to note what nodes are selected for rest of contents e As described with the example above all child element nodes and child text nodes are selected by the rest of contents placeholder e Attr
304. lement Name If the value is unchecked then the value false is entered as the XML value of Name as defined in the dialog Note When anew Name or check box element is created in Authentic View its XML value is empty it is not the Unchecked Value The Unchecked Value is entered only after the check box has first been checked and then unchecked To have a default value in a node create a Template XML file that contains the default value Accessing the Edit Check Box dialog If you are creating a new check box when you create the node as a check box the Edit Check Box dialog pops up To access the Edit Check Box dialog afterwards do the following 1 Select the check box in the design 2 Inthe Properties entry helper select the Authentic group of properties see screenshot below Properties BB ke Properties For Group Attribute Value Authentic additional validation common checkbox event editable inherit HTML user Info _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 154 Content Editing Procedures Using Data Entry Devices 3 Click the Edit button of the checkbox property This pops up the Edit Check Box dialog Note You can modify the HTML properties of a check box by selecting it and then modifying its HTML properties in the Properties entry helper Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Content Editing Procedures Using Data Entry Devices 155 Buttons There
305. lement s content Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Authentic View Interface 253 e If the applied element has no child element with the same name as that of an instantiated child of the original element then the instantiated child of the original element is appended as a sibling of any child element or elements that the new element may have e If the applied element has a child element for which no equivalent exists in the original element s content model then this child element is not created directly but Authentic View offers you the option of inserting it If a text range is selected rather than an element applying an element to the selection will create the applied element at that location with the selected text range as its content Applying an element when the cursor is an insertion point is not allowed Clear Element when range selected This icon appears to the left of the inline element within which the selected text range is Clicking the icon clears that inline element but not the selected text range Clear Element when insertion point selected This icon appears to the left of the inline element within which the cursor is Clicking the icon clears that inline element but not its contents Attributes Entry Helper The Attributes Entry Helper consists of a drop down combo box and a list of attributes The element that you have selected you can click the start or end tag or place the cursor anywhere
306. local styling you like Total number of news items AutoCalc Period covered by news items AutoCalc The HTML preview will look something like this Total number of news items 4 Period covered by news items 4 2006 to 5 2006 After you are done save the file _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 70 Quick Start Tutorial Using Conditions 5 6 Using Conditions If you look at QuickStart xm1 you will see that each newsitem element has a metainfo child element which in turn can contain one or more relevance child elements In the SPS design you can create a combo box that has a dropdown list which you can populate with unique relevance element values When the Authentic View user selects an item from the dropdown list in the combo box that item can be passed as a value to a node in the XML document A condition can test what the user selection is by looking up that node and provide appropriate processing displays for each user selection In this section you will create a conditional template that displays those news items that have a relevance element that matches the user selection Creating the combo box to select unique node values In the XML document the node that will contain the user selection is presswatch selection byrelevance This is the node you will create as the combo box Do this as follows 1 Insert the static text Select by relevance atthe head of the document and just below t
307. ltova GmbH Quick Start Tutorial Inserting Static Content 59 box font color font family common font size details font style effects font variant E E f2 font font weight IE numbering paged media text ul The static text that is the string Source will be give an italic style in the design and will look like this synopsis gt content synopsis Source source gt content source The output will look like this in HTML Preview Summary of News Items NanoNull Inc Launches Version 2 0 of NanoPower 2006 04 01 Boston USA Nanonull Inc today launched version 2 0 of its market leading NanoPower line of hardware and software The highlights of the new version of NanoPower are improved chip design capabilities in NanoSoft the software used to design computer chips and higher precision sand filtering processes in NanoMeld the hardware in which the transformation from sand to silicon chips is executed Source NewTech Online If you think there is too little vertical space between the source item and the horizontal line separating two newsitem elements then in the design insert a blank line between the source and the horizontal line by pressing Enter After you are done save the file _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 60 Quick Start Tutorial Inserting Static Content In this section you have learned how to insert static content and format it In the next
308. ltova StyleVision User Manual 300 Reference File Menu 11 3 File Menu The File menu contains commands for working with SPSs and related files The following commands are available New to create a new SPS from a variety of sources Open Close to open and close the active file Save Design Design As All which are commands to save the active SPS and all open SPS files Save Authentic XML Data enabled in Authentic View it saves changes to the Working XML File Save Generated Files to save output files that can be generated using the SPS Edit Schema Definition in XMLSpy to open the schema in Altova XMLSpy Encoding to set the encoding of the output documents Print Preview Print enabled in Authentic View and output view these commands print what is displayed in the previews Most Recently Used Files Exit respectively to select a recently used file to open and to exit the program Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Reference File Menu 301 New Placing the cursor over the New command pops out a submenu screenshot below that enables you to create a new SPS document of one of four types New from XML Schema DTD New From DB New from HTML file New empty e Anew SPS based on an XML Schema or DTD New from XML Schema DTD The selected schema is added to the Schema Sources tree in the Schema Sources entry helper and in Design View the SPS is created with an emp
309. lumns In the figure above the elements shares LeaveTotal LeaveUsed and LeaveLeft have been deselected Note that columns are created only for child elements and attributes but for no descendant on a lower level _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 164 Content Editing Procedures Working with Tables Table grows down or right When a table grows top down this is what it would look like name street city state zip poname gt fipostreet gt fpo city gt fipo state gt po zip gt contents contents contents contents contents lt ipozip When a table grows left right it looks like this f Paname gt c ontents lt ipoxname fipo street gt contents lpo city gt contents ipo state gt ontents lt ipaistate fpazip gt c ontents poz Headers and footers Columns can be given headers which will be the names of the column elements To include headers check the Create Header check box To include footers check the Create Footer check box Footers can only be created for tables that grow top down The footer of numeric columns will also sum each of these columns if the Summary for Numeric Fields check box is checked Header and footer cells can be joined and split and rows can be inserted appended and deleted this gives you considerable flexibility in structuring headers and footers Additionally headers and footers ca
310. lved against the base URI from the static context which is the URI of the XSLT stylesheet or the base URI given in the prolog of the XQuery document The relative URI the first argument is appended after the last in the path notation of the base URI notation If the value of the first argument is the zero length string the base URI from the static context is returned and this URI includes the file name of the document from which the base URI of the static context is derived e g the XSLT or XML file The base URI from the static context is the base URI of the XSLT stylesheet or the base URI specified in the prolog of the XQuery document When using XPath Evaluator in the XMLSpy IDE the base URI from the static context is the URI of the active XML document e The ASCII character set only is supported Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Appendices Datatypes in DB Generated XML Schemas 389 12 2 Datatypes in DB Generated XML Schemas When an XML Schema is generated from a database DB the datatypes specific to that DB are converted to XML Schema datatypes The mappings of DB datatypes to XML Schema datatypes for commonly used DBs are given in this Appendix Select from the list below MS Access MS SQL Server e o o o o o o O fed Q OD _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 390 Appendices Datatypes in DB Generated XML Schemas MS Access When an XML Schema is gen
311. m Application Frame Menus Context Menus Show Menus for Select context menu Default Menu z Insert z Edit Text Reset Default application menu ppears when no documents are open toolbar buttons into the menu window JV Menu shadows To customize a menu 1 Select the menu bar you want to customize Default Menu currently 2 Click the Commands tab and drag the commands to the menu bar of your choice To delete commands from a menu 1 Click right on the command or icon representing the command and 2 Select the Delete option from the popup menu or 1 Select Tools Customize to open the Customize dialog box and 2 Drag the command away from the menu and drop it as soon as the check mark icon appears below the mouse pointer To reset either of the menu bars 1 Select the Default Menu entry in the combo box 2 Click the Reset button just below the menu name A prompt appears asking if you are sure you want to reset the menu bar To customize a context menu a right click menu 1 Select the context menu from the combo box 2 Click the Commands tab and drag the commands to the context menu that is now open To delete commands from a context menu 1 Click right on the command or icon representing the command and 2 Select the Delete option from the popup menu or 1 Select Tools Customize to open the Customize dialog box and 2 Drag the command away from the context menu and drop
312. marks in the SPS design and ii external resources such as web pages or email messages In this section we first discuss link content and then the targets of links Creating hyperlinks A hyperlink can be created around text static or dynamic nodes images conditional templates Auto Calculations and blocks of content or nodes it cannot be created around a data entry device such as an input field or combo box though it can be created around a node or conditional template in which that data entry device is To create a hyperlink select the required component in the design then click the menu command Insert Hyperlink or right click and select Insert Hyperlink or use the shortcut CTRL K This pops up the Insert Hyperlink dialog screenshot below in which you specify the target of the link Insert Hyperlink Selection Go to top Above field shows the current Document selection Static Dynamic Static and Dynamic Static Address Use above field to ent Absolute Path Browse Bookmark ppe presi Ba j The target of a link can be either e A bookmark in the same SPS design in which case the URI is a fragment identifier or e An external resource the URI can be static directly entered dynamic taken from a node in an XML document a combination of static and dynamic parts or the value of an unparsed entity How these two kinds of targets are defined is explained below After the URI has be
313. ment and all its descendant elements Deleting columns rows and tables To delete a column row or table place the cursor in the column row or table to be deleted and click the menu item Table Delete Column Table Delete Row or Table Delete Table respectively If you have nested tables the table immediately containing the cursor will be deleted when the Table Delete Table command is used Toolbar table editing icons The table editing icons in the second row of the toolbar are shortcuts to the Table menu commands These commands allow you to insert delete edit the structure of and assign formatting properties to the dynamic table These icons can also be used for static tables They cannot be used for XML tables since XML tables cannot be created in StyleVision but must be created in Authentic View by the user XML tables can only be enabled in StyleVision Creating dynamic tables in global templates You can also create dynamic tables in global templates The process works in the same way as for the Root Template given above The important point to note is that in a global template a dynamic table can only be created for descendant elements of the global template node it cannot be created for the global template node itself For example if you wish to create a dynamic table for the element authors within a global template then this dynamic table must be created within the global template of the parent element of authors
314. ment is included in the SPS by dragging the required XML data node from the relevant schema tree in the Schema Sources Entry Helper and dropping this node at the desired place in the SPS 2 Anexternal XML document that is accessible to the application StyleVision or an Authentic View product By using the doc function of XPath 2 0 in an Auto Calculation content from external XML document sources can be accessed An XML document accessed via the doc function in an XPath expression does not need to be referenced via the Schema Sources associations 3 The SPS itself Text and other content such as images and tables can be inserted directly in the SPS using the keyboard and other GUI features Such input is independent of the XML document 4 Manipulated dynamic XML source data with the manipulations being achieved using XPath 1 0 and XPath 2 0 expressions Manipulations are typically achieved with Auto Calculations 5 For the HTML output JavaScript functions can be used to generate content Structure of output In the SPS design the structure of the output can be controlled by using either i a procedural approach in which the output structure is specified in an entry level template StyleVision s main template and can be independent of the structure of the XML document ii a declarative approach in which template rules are declared for various nodes StyleVision s global templates thus generating an output that follows the
315. ments the star selector is the default selector for each newly inserted global style 3 With the star selector highlighted which it is when the style is added see screenshot below enter the required selector B reo V lE be e a 3 External E Global Eley box border color border bottom 4 Now set the CSS property values for the selector How to do this is explained in the section Setting CSS Property Values 5 To add another global style repeat steps 1 to 4 The new global style will be added to the Global tree after all previously added global styles Note e Global styles can also be inserted before a selected global style in the Global tree by clicking the Insert button in the Style Repository window The Add and Insert buttons are also available via the context menu that appears when you right click a global style or the Global item in the Style Repository window e A global style with a selector that is an HTML element can be inserted by right clicking _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 204 Presentation Procedures Working with CSS Styles an item in the Global tree then selecting Add Selector HTML HTMLElementName Editing and deleting global styles Both a style s selector as well as its properties can be edited in the Style Repository window e To edit a selector double click the selector name then place the cursor into the text field and edit e For information
316. minology This section lists terms used in the StyleVision GUI and in this documentation Terms are organized into the groups listed below and within each group they are listed alphabetically Altova product related terms General XML terms and concepts XSLT and XPath terms StyleVision specific terms Note Ifa link below points to a term already in the viewport the screen display will not change when the link is clicked in such cases look for the target term in the current display Altova product related terms A list of terms that relate to Altova products Authentic View An XML document editor view available in the following Altova products Altova XMLSpy Altova StyleVision Altova Authentic Desktop Altova Authentic Browser For more details about Authentic View and Altova products visit the Altova website SPS The abbreviated form of StyleVision Power Stylesheet it is used throughout this documentation to refer to the design document created in StyleVision and saved as a file with the sps extension For a detailed description see What Is an SPS General XML terms Definitions of certain XML terms as used in this documentation schema A schema with lowercase s refers to any type of schema Schemas supported by StyleVision are XML Schema capitalized and DTD XML Schema In this documentation XML Schema capitalized is used to refer to schemas that are compliant with the W3C s XML Schema specification XML Schema i
317. mixed content This stripping has an effect on the value returned by the fn position fn last fn count and fn deep equal functions For any node selection that selects text nodes also boundary whitespace only text nodes would typically also be included in the selection However since the XML Infoset used by the Altova engines has boundary whitespace only text nodes stripped from it these nodes are not present in the XML Infoset As a result the size of the selection and the numbering of nodes in the selection will be different than that for a selection which included these text nodes The fn position fn last fn count and fn deep equal functions therefore could produce results that are different from those produced by some other processors A situation in which boundary whitespace only text nodes are evaluated as siblings of other elements arises most commonly when xsl1 apply templates is used to apply templates When the n position fn last and fn count functions are used in patterns with a name test for example para 3 which is short for para position 3 boundary whitespace only nodes are irrelevant since only the named elements para in the above example are selected Note however that boundary whitespace only nodes are relevant in patterns that use the wildcard for example 10 Numeric notation On output when an xs double is converted to a string scientific notation for example 1 0 12
318. mplate for the para element is processed wherever required for example by including chapter para in the main template and specifying that para reference its global template or by including chapter title and then including rest of contents _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 102 High Level Procedures Working with Databases 6 3 Working with Databases When a DB is used as the basis of an SPS that is as the main schema of an SPS the SPS can be used in the following ways To edit the DB in Authentic View To generate an XML Schema having a structure based on the DB To generate an XML file with data from the DB To design and generate XSLT stylesheets for HTML output To generate DB reports based on the SPS design in HTML format These reports can be previewed in StyleVision When a DB is a subsidiary schema in an SPS then data from the DB can be included in the design document but the DB itself cannot be edited in Authentic View It is the XML document or DB associated with the main schema that can be edited General procedure This section describes the procedure for working with DBs in StyleVision After an introductory sub section which provides an overview of how DBs work in StyleVision the sub sections of this section describe the various steps in the work procedure e Connecting to a DB and Setting up the SPS Specifying what tables in the DB to load into StyleVision e The DB Schem
319. mputer up to the Permitted Number of computers The Permitted Number of computers shall be delineated at such time as you elect to purchase the Software During the evaluation period hereinafter defined only a single user may install and use the software on one computer If you have licensed the Software as part of a suite of Altova software products collectively the Suite and have not installed each product individually then the Software License Agreement governs your use of all of the software included in the Suite If you have licensed SchemaA gent then the terms and conditions of this Software License Agreement apply to your use of the SchemaA gent server software SchemaA gent Server included therein as applicable and you are licensed to use SchemaA gent Server solely in connection with your use of Altova Software and solely for the purposes described in the accompanying documentation In addition if you have licensed XMLSpy Enterprise Edition or MapForce Enterprise Edition or UModel your license to install and use a copy of the Software as provided herein permits you to generate source code based on i Altova Library modules that are included in the Software such generated code hereinafter referred to as the Restricted Source Code and ii schemas or mappings that you create or provide such code as may be generated from your schema or mapping source materials hereinafter referred to as the Unrestricted Source Code In addition t
320. n Entry Helper windows To auto hide a window in a docked window click the Auto Hide button the drawing pin icon at the top right of the window screenshot below Alternatively in the Menu select Auto Hide to display the Menu right click the title bar of the window or click the Menu button in the title bar of the docked window Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH User Interface Design Entry Helpers 29 The window will be auto hidden To switch the Auto Hide feature for a particular window off place the cursor over the tab so that the window rolls out and then click the Auto Hide button screenshot below Alternatively in the Menu deselect Auto Hide to display the Menu right click the title bar of the window or click the Menu button in the title bar of the window Style Repository te EO V ia EE te LS f huoysadary aS Note When the Auto Hide feature of a Design Entry Helper window is off the drawing pin icon of that window points downwards when the feature is on the drawing pin icon points left Hiding closing Design Entry Helper windows When a Design Entry Helper window is hidden it is no longer visible in the GUI in either its maximized form docked or floating or in its minimized form as a tab at an edge of the GUI which is done using the Auto Hide feature To hide a window click the Close button at the top right of a docked or floating window screenshot b
321. n 2006 Altova StyleVision 2006 Professional Edition is an application for graphically designing and editing StyleVision Power Stylesheets A StyleVision Power Stylesheet SPS can be used for the following purposes To control a graphical WYSIWYG view of XML documents in Authentic View which is an XML document editor available in the following Altova products Altova XMLSpy Altova StyleVision Altova Authentic Desktop and Altova Authentic Browser To enable the editing of databases DBs via Authentic View and to generate database reports in HTML format To generate XSLT stylesheets based on the SPS design Both XSLT 1 0 and XSLT 2 0 are supported The XSLT stylesheets can be used outside StyleVision to transform XML documents into outputs such as HTML To generate directly from within StyleVision HTML output from an XML document In the case of DB based SPSs StyleVision can additionally generate for each SPS an XML Schema based on the DB and an XML instance document that adheres to this schema and contains data from the DB StyleVision also enables you to import an HTML document and create an XML document from it Copyright 1998 2006 Altova GmbH All rights reserved Use of this software is governed by and subject to an Altova software license agreement XMLSpy MapForce StyleVision SemanticWorks SchemaAgent UModel Diff Dog Authentic Altova XML and ALTOVA are trademarks and or registered trademarks of Altova GmbH
322. n Returns Description any equal boolean any boolean argument con Schema sources a any not equal ceiling number number smallest inteq number less concat string string concatenatior HB XML C Prograt number greater concat string string concatenatior E 7 Root elements number less or equal contains strin boolean tests whether E C Orgchart number greater or eq count nodes number number of noc number add false boolean Boolean false CompanyLoc number subtract floor number number largest integer Name number multiply idfany nodes selects eleme i number divide lang string boolean Whether lang E Office number modulo last number context size Name boole logical AND local namef string local part of tF Tm EX Dann Fa boole logical OR local name no string local part of tr al nodes union of nod string name of 4 cor string name of tha Absolute XPath gt gt The context node for the expression being built is highlighted in the schema tree in the pane at extreme left You can enter the XPath expression directly in the text box or you can double click an item in any of the three panes to insert that item Nodes inserted from the schema tree in the left hand pane are inserted relative to the context node if the Absolute XPath check box is unchecked or as an absolute expression starting from the document node if the Absolute XPath check box is checked Altova Styl
323. n a separate tab While designing the SPS Authentic View and output views can be displayed by clicking the respective tabs This enables you to quickly preview the output and test Authentic View features When an SPS is associated with an XML source document or source DB the source document can be edited directly in the Authentic View of StyleVision DB reports can either be viewed in StyleVision or saved as an HTML file Both XSLT versions 1 0 and 2 0 are supported XSLT 2 0 provides powerful data access and manipulation features In the Enterprise Edition multiple output formats HTML RTF and PDF are generated from a single SPS design Both XSLT files and output files can be generated and saved either directly from within the GUI or by calling StyleVision from the command line HTML documents can be converted to XML SPS design features Given below is a list of the main StyleVision features specific to designing the SPS The SPS can contain static text which you enter in the SPS and dynamic text which is selected from the source document Dynamic content is inserted in the design by dragging and dropping nodes from the schema source Dynamic content can be inserted as text or in the form of a data entry device such as an input field or combo box When inserted as a data entry device such as a combo box additional possibilities are available For example the value of the node can be selected by the Authentic View user f
324. n contain any type of static or dynamic content including conditional templates and auto calculations Note Headers and footers must be created when the dynamic table is defined You do this by checking the Create Header and Create Footer options in the Create Dynamic Table dialog Appending or inserting a row within a dynamic table does not create headers or footers but an extra row The difference is significant Real headers and footers are added to the top and bottom of a table respectively If a row is inserted or appended then the row occurs for each occurrence of the element that has been created as a dynamic table Nested dynamic tables You can nest one dynamic table within another dynamic table if the element for which the nested dynamic table is to be created is a child of the element that has been created as the containing dynamic table Do the following 1 Create the outer dynamic table so that the child element to be created as a dynamic table is created as a column 2 Inthe dynamic table in Design View right click the child element 3 Select Change to Table This pops up the Create Dynamic Table dialog 4 Define the properties of the nested dynamic table To nest a dynamic table in a static table drag the element to be created as a dynamic table into the required cell of the static table When you drop it select Create Table from the context menu that appears Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH
325. n text box either type in the expression count newsitem or build the expression using the entry helpers Double click the count function to enter it then place the cursor within the parentheses of the function and double click the newsitem node in the schema tree 6 Click OK to finish The Auto Calculation is inserted in the design at the cursor location screenshot below Format the Auto Calculation using local styles Main template Summary of News Total number of news items AutoCalc Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Quick Start Tutorial Using Auto Calculations 69 Your HTML output will look like this Summary of News Items Total number of news items 4 Displaying the period covered by news items The period covered by the news items can be obtained by getting the date of the earliest news item and the date of the latest news item This can be achieved with XPath expressions like those given below The first expression outputs the contents of the date node The second expression is a refinement outputting just the month and year values in the date node You can use either of these e concat min date to max date e concat month from date min date year from date min date to month from date max date year from date max date In the design insert the static text and Auto Calculation as shown in the screenshot below Apply whatever
326. n the XML document the selection is converted to the text content of the schema node which is created in the XML document The contents of the node created in the XML document will be inserted dynamically into the output obtained via the SPS 2 By surrounding the selection with an element or attribute In the design the selection is surrounded by the node tags no content placeholder is inserted This means that the selection is present in the SPS design as static content In the schema an element or attribute is created In the XML document the node is created but is empty The static text which is within the schema node tags in the design will be output no dynamic content will be output for this node unless a content placeholder for this node is explicitly inserted in the design The significance of the content placeholder is that it indicates locations in the design where data from the XML document will be displayed in the output and can be edited in Authentic View _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 128 High Level Procedures HTML Import Creating the Schema and SPS Design The schema is created by dragging selections from Design View into the user defined schema You do this one selection at a time The selection is dropped on a node in the schema tree relative to which the new node will be created either as a child or sibling You select the type of the node to be created element or attribute and
327. n the XPath Evaluator of XMLSpy Note that this section does not describe how to use these functions For more information about the usage of functions see the World Wide Web Consortium s W3C s XQuery 1 0 and XPath 2 0 Functions and Operators CR of 8 June 2006 Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Appendices XSLT Engine Information 385 General Information Standards conformance e The Altova XPath 2 0 Engine implements the World Wide Web Consortium s W3C s XPath 2 0 Candidate Recommendation of 8 June 2006 The Altova XQuery 1 0 Engine implements the World Wide Web Consortium s W3C s XQuery 1 0 Candidate Recommendation of 8 June 2006 The XPath 2 0 and XQuery 1 0 functions support in these two engines is compliant with the XQuery 1 0 and XPath 2 0 Functions and Operators CR of 8 June 2006 e The Altova XPath 2 0 Engine conforms to the rules of XML 1 0 Third Edition and XML Namespaces 1 0 Default functions namespace The default functions namespace has been set to comply with that specified in the standard Functions can therefore be called without a prefix Boundary whitespace only nodes in source XML document The XML data and consequently the XML Infoset that is passed to the Altova XPath 2 0 Engine and Altova XQuery 1 0 Engine is stripped of boundary whitespace only text nodes A boundary whitespace only text node is a child whitespace only text node that occurs between two elements within an element of
328. n the line of text output by the built in templates screenshot below AndrewBentincka bentinck nanonull comNadiaEdwardsn e Since the global template for selection is empty the child elements of selection are not processed Creating a global template for team member The objective is to create a table to display details of the members of the press monitoring team This table will be created in a global template for the team element Do this as follows 1 Create a global template for the element team right click team in the Global Elements list of the Schema Sources entry helper and select Make Global Remove Global 2 Inthe Global Elements list expand the team element and drag its member child element into the global template of team in the design 3 Inthe context menu that pops up when you drop the element into the global template of team select Create Table This pops up the Create Dynamic Table dialog Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Quick Start Tutorial Using Global Templates and Rest of Contents 79 screenshot below Create Dynamic Table i x Cancel for each member Table Growth Top Down Left Right Display cells as Contents C Combo Box Field Multiline Field Check Box Radio Button Header Footer IV Create Header Tl Create Footer M Summary for Numeric fields Select attributes elements department 4 Inthe attributes eleme
329. namic table for a DB table To create a dynamic table for a DB table do the following 1 Inthe schema tree select the top level DB table to be created as a dynamic table drag it into the design 2 When you drop it create is as contents and delete the contents placeholder If the Auto Add DB Controls feature is on your design will look something like this tal ie 3 Inthe schema tree select the Row element of the DB table you wish to create as a dynamic table 4 Drag it to a location inside the Addresses element 5 When you release the element select Create Table from the menu that pops up and select the DB fields you wish to create as columns of the dynamic table The DB table is created as a dynamic table Note You can also create a DB table in any other format such as contents Auto add DB Controls The Authentic Auto add DB Controls menu command or the toolbar icon toggles the auto insertion of navigation controls for DB tables on and off When the toggle is switched on this toolbar icon has a black border when the toggle is off the toolbar icon has no border If the Auto insert toggle is on DB Controls see screenshot below are automatically inserted when a DB table is dropped into the Design document It is dropped by default immediately before the Row Start tag These controls enable the Authentic View user to navigate the records of the DB table in Authentic View The first leftmost button navigat
330. nd is created as text After adding a command to the menu bar or toolbar you can edit its appearance by right clicking it and then selecting the required action To delete a menu bar or toolbar item with the Customize dialog open right click the item to be deleted and select Delete Note e The customization described above applies to the application and applies whether a document is open in StyleVision or not e To reset menus and toolbars to the state they were in when StyleVision was installed go to the Toolbars tab and click the appropriate Reset button Toolbars The Toolbars tab allows you to activate or deactivate specific toolbars to show text labels for toolbar items and to reset the menu bar and toolbars to their installation state Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Reference Tools Menu 365 Commands Toolbars Keyboard Menu Options Toolbars Authentic Reset Format Menu Bar Reset All Standard Table New Rename The StyleVision interface displays a fixed menu bar and several optional toolbars Authentic Format Standard and Table Each toolbar can be divided into groups of commands Commands can be added to a toolbar via the Commands tab A toolbar can be dragged from its docked position to any location on the screen Double clicking a toolbar s maximized or minimized title bar docks and undocks the toolbar In the Toolbars tab
331. nds required to edit XML tables are available as icons in the toolbar and are listed below Note that no corresponding menu commands exist for these icons and that they are not active in StyleVision For a full description of when and how XML tables are to be used see XML tables Insert table E The Insert Table command inserts a CALS HTML table at the current cursor position Delete table Append row The Delete table command deletes the currently active table 523l The Append row command appends a row to the end of the currently active table Append column B The Append column command appends a column to the end of the currently active table Insert row oo ES The Insert row command inserts a row above the current cursor position in the currently active table Insert column iii The Insert column command inserts a column to the left of the current cursor position in the currently active table Join cell left zm ain The Join cell left command joins the current cell current cursor position with the cell to the left The tags of both cells remain in the new cell the column headers remain unchanged Join cell right doin The Join cell right command joins the current cell current cursor position with the cell to the right The tags of both cells remain in the new cell the column headers remain unchanged Join cell below FA chal The Join cell below command joins the current cell
332. nds to an HTML element screenshot below When you apply a Predefined Format to a component in the Design that component is marked up as a component having the corresponding HTML semantics This has two effects e Formatting inherent to the selected predefined format is applied e The component is contained in the component type paragraph which makes it available for local styling by component type Assigning Predefined Formats Predefined formats can be assigned by clicking Insert Format and then the required format or by selecting the required format from the Format drop down list in the Toolbar shown below Inherent styles The predefined formats used in StyleVision have either one or both of the following two styling components e a text styling component e a spacing component For example the predefined para p format has a spacing component only it puts vertical space before and after the selected component and does not apply any text styling On the other hand the predefined Heading 1 h1 format has both a text styling component and a spacing component The following styling points about predefined formats should be noted e The spacing component of a predefined format applies for any type of SPS component but the text styling only if it can be applied For example if you select an image and apply a predefined format of Heading 1 h1 to it then the spacing component will take effect but the text styling compo
333. ne below appears Input Formatting J x m Formats for type date Unformatted Standard format YYYY MM DD Formatted z No errors in format Insert Field Field Options Go to Error V Apply same format to XSLT 1 0 output not all formatting options can be applied Note that the dialog contains the line Formats for type date and that the standard format for the xs date datatype is given For a node of some other datatype this information would be correspondingly different If the selected component was an Auto Calculation the following dialog appears Input Formatting x m Format for amp utoCalc field C Unformatted Cancel Formatted please choose data type No errors in format Insert Field Field Options MV Apply same format to XSLT 1 0 output not all 3 You now specify whether the display of the component s value is to be unformatted or formatted Do this by selecting the appropriate radio button If the value is unformatted it has the standard formatting for the datatype of the selected node or the datatype of Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Additional Editing Procedures Input Formatting Formatting Numeric Datatypes 221 the Auto Calculation result If you specify Input Formatting for an Auto Calculation you have to additionally select from a dropdown list the datatype of the expected result 4 Enter the
334. ne an entity 1 Click Authentic Define XML Entities This opens the Define Entities dialog OK Internal Nanonulll Inc We Internal Nanonull Europe 4G aR Cancel Internal Nanonull Partners Inc Internal http www nanonull com _ SYSTEM 3 SYSTEM Insert Delete 2 Enter the name of your entity in the Name field This is the name that will appear in the Entities Entry Helper 3 Enter the type of entity from the drop down list in the Type field The following types are possible An Internal entity is one for which the text to be used is stored in the XML document itself Selecting PUBLIC or SYSTEM specifies that the resource is located outside the XML file and will be located with the use of a public identifier or a system identifier respectively A system identifier is a URI that gives the location of the resource A public identifier is a location independent identifier which enables some processors to identify the resource If you specify both a public and system identifier the public identifier resolves to the system identifier and the system identifier is used 4 Ifyou have selected PUBLIC as the Type enter the public identifier of your resource in the PUBLIC field If you have selected Internal or SYSTEM as your Type the PUBLIC field is disabled 5 Inthe Value Path field you can enter any one of the following e f the entity type is Internal enter the text string you want as the value of your entity
335. nent will not e The text styling component of predefined formats does not apply to data entry devices e Only one predefined format applies to a component at any given time Defining additional styling for a predefined format Styles additional to the inherent styling can be defined for a predefined format by selecting it and applying a local style via the Styles entry helper The Return key and predefined formats In Authentic View when the Return key is pressed within the contents of an element having a _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 198 Presentation Procedures Predefined Formats predefined format the current element instance and its block are terminated and a new element instance and block are inserted at that point This property is useful for example if you want the Authentic View user to be able to create a new element say a paragraph type element by pressing the Return key Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Presentation Procedures Working with CSS Styles 199 8 2 Working with CSS Styles The SPS design document is styled with CSS rules Style rules can be specified e In external CSS stylesheets Note that some CSS selectors will not be applied to RTF and PDF outputs e In global stylesheets for the SPS which can be considered to be defined within the SPS and at its start In the HTML output these global styles are defined within the style child element of the head element
336. ng joining and splitting rows and columns Properties of the table as well as of individual columns rows and cells are defined using CSS styles and HTML properties for tables and its sub components The Table commands are available in the Table menu see list below and as icons in the Table toolbar The availability of various table commands depends on the current cursor position A static table can be inserted at any location in the SPS by clicking the Insert Table command A dynamic table is inserted by creating an element as or changing an element to a table To edit the table structure place the cursor in the appropriate cell column or row and select the required editing command To edit a formatting property place the cursor in the appropriate cell column row or table and in the Styles entry helper and or Properties entry helper define the required property for that table component The following commands are available in the Table menu Insert Table Delete Table Append Insert Row Column Delete Row Column Join Cell Left Right Below Above Split Cell Horizontally Vertically View Cell Bounds Vertical Alignment of Cell Content Headers and footers When you create a dynamic table you can specify whether you wish to include headers and or footers Footers are allowed only when the table grows top down You can create a header and footer in a static table by manually inserting a top and bottom row respectively
337. ng by XSLT 1 0 Engine 378 Window menu 370 Windows support for Altova products 398 Working XML File 30 86 and Authentic View 23 and Output Views 25 definition of 15 print preview 308 printing 308 validating in Authentic View 353 X XML data inserting in SPS design 141 XML document content symbol in Design View 293 XML document nodes symbol in Design View 293 XML file with data from DB 123 XML Parser about 399 XML Schema datatypes _ 2006 Altova GmbH Index 431 XML Schema datatypes in generation of XML Schema from ADO DB 395 in generation of XML Schema from MS Access DB 390 in generation of XML Schema from MS SQL Server DB 391 in generation of XML Schema from MySQL DB 392 in generation of XML Schema from ODBC DB 394 in generation of XML Schema from Oracle DB 393 in generation of XML Schema from Sybase DB 396 XML Schemas and DTDs as SPS source 95 XML tables 159 enabling in SPSs 167 inserting in SPSs 345 XML tables in Authentic View icons for editing 263 usage of 259 XPath 1 0 and dates 227 XPath 2 0 and dates 227 XPath 2 0 functions general information about 385 implementation information 384 see under fn for specific functions 385 XPath dialog description of 297 XPath functions in XPath dialog 297 XPath functions support see under fn for individual functions 387 XPath operators in XPath dialog 297 XPath version in SPS 87 X
338. ng unparsed entities For the dynamic part of a hyperlink address you can use the URI declared for an unparsed entity in the DTD if you are using a DTD For details of how to use unparsed entities see Using unparsed entity URIs Removing a hyperlink The link for the selected component can be removed by clicking the Remove Link button in the Insert Hyperlink dialog _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 330 Reference Insert Menu Auto Calculation An Auto Calculation uses an XPath expression to calculate a value This value is displayed at the point where the Auto Calculation is inserted An Auto Calculation can be inserted in the SPS as a text value input field or multiline input field When the cursor is placed over Insert Auto Calculation a menu pops out screenshot below enabling you to choose how the Auto Calculation should be inserted Take Calculation gt i Condition nput Field Multiline Input Field The value of the Auto Calculation will be displayed accordingly in Authentic View and the output document The XPath expression for the Auto Calculation On selecting how the Auto Calculation should be represented the Edit XPath Expression dialog screenshot below pops up E Edit XPath expression i x Expression count n1 Department m Select Schema Attribute or ElemerSelect Operator Select Function Selection n1 OrgChart n1 0 Oper Description Functio
339. ng within the title element causes a new chapter to be appended after the current chapter assuming that multiple chapters are allowed by the schema Please note The Return key does not insert a carriage return line feed i e it does not jump to a new line This is the case even when the cursor is inside a text node such as paragraph _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual Chapter 11 Reference 282 Reference 11 Reference This section contains a complete description of StyleVision toolbars Design View and menu commands It is divided into the following broad parts e A description of all the toolbars with their icons as well as a description of how to customize the views of the toolbars e Descriptions of symbols used in Design View and of the Edit XPath Expression dialog e All menu commands While the User Reference section contains a description of individual commands the mechanisms behind various StyleVision features are explained in detail in the various Procedures sections High Level Procedures Content Editing Procedures Presentation Procedures Additional Editing Procedures For command line usage see Command Line Interface StyleVisionBatch Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Reference Toolbars 283 11 1 Toolbars A number of StyleVision commands are available as toolbar shortcuts organized in the following toolbars Authentic Format Standard Table The ico
340. nking is not available in Authentic View To insert a hyperlink do the following 1 Select the SPS component or text fragment to be made into a hyperlink 2 Click the Hyperlink icon in the toolbar or select Insert Hyperlink or right click and select Insert Hyperlink 3 Inthe Insert Hyperlink dialog that appears specify the document or document fragment you wish to link to You do this by specifying a URI in one of the following forms e astatic address entered directly you can select an HTML file via the Browse button and a fragment in the current document via the Bookmark button Examples would be http www altova com static Web page URI U documentation index html via Browse button or top of page via Bookmark button e a dynamic address which comes from a node in the XML document you specify the node An example would be a node such as otherdocs docl e a combination of static and dynamic text for an address you specify the static text and the XML document node An example would be www altova com department name intropara 4 Click OK The hyperlink is created Note When specifying the node for a dynamic hyperlink entry you can enter the XPath expression as an absolute XPath expression by checking the Absolute Path check box If this check box is not checked the XPath expression for the node you select via the Schema button is entered as being relative to the currently selected component Usi
341. nning table cells in HTML The buttons to be used for these operations are Join Cell Right Left Above Below Also an SPS table cell in which the cursor is located can be split either horizontally or vertically using the Split Cell Horizontally and Split Cell Vertically buttons respectively SPS table cell content can be aligned vertically at the top in the middle and at the bottom The display of cell borders can be switched on and off with the View Cell Bounds toggle _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 292 Reference Design View 11 2 Design View The Design View is where the SPS is structured and where presentation properties are assigned It provides you with a graphical representation of your design The symbols that are used to denote the various components of the SPS are important for understanding the structure and layout of the SPS These symbols are explained in the Symbols sub section of this section A key mechanism used to access nodes in XML documents is XPath and a number of StyleVision features use XPath A dialog used in common by all these features is the Edit XPath Expression dialog in which you can build XPath expressions The Edit XPath Expressions dialog is explained in detail in the XPath Dialog sub section of this section Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Reference Design View 293 Symbols An SPS design will typically contain several types of component Each component is
342. nput Formatting definitions You can select one of these and modify them as required by adding prefix modifiers suffix modifiers and or field options o____ zereifno aig at postion 2 year base 1930 see Note below oo ay rusthave nathot2 C numbertteT i ___ Bayintteyear6366 Hour 0 to 23 must have length of 2 Hour 1 to 12 must have length of 2 ss_____ Second mostrave engo C Co _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 224 Additional Editing Procedures Input Formatting Formatting Numeric Datatypes Weekday sun mon Notes on field length and entry length The following points relating to the length of data components should be noted Length of date fields When fields such as mm DD HH hh mm and ss are used they must have a length of 2 in the definition When the y or y fields are used the number of y or y characters in the definition determines the length of the output For example if you specify yyy then the output for a value of 2006 would be 006 for a definition of yyyyyy it would be 002006 See also Base Year below Extending field length The asterisk symbol is used to extend the length of a non semantic numeric field integers decimals etc In the case of decimals it can be used on either or both sides of the decimal point For example the input formatting o 00 ensures that a number will have zeroes as specified in the formatting if these digit locations are empty a
343. ns Rows 3 Cancel JV Use the whole available width e You can select the dimensions of the table and specify whether the table should occupy the whole available width When you click OK an empty table with the specified dimensions as shown below is created You can now enter content into table cells using regular StyleVision features Cell content could be text or elements dragged from the XML tree or objects such as images and nested tables The figure below shows a table containing nested tables Telephone Faz Office Home Office Home Static SPS tables are especially well suited for organizing XML data that is randomly situated in the schema hierarchy Deleting columns rows and tables To delete a column row or table place the cursor in the column row or table to be deleted and click the menu item Table Delete Column Table Delete Row or Table Delete Table respectively If you have nested tables the table immediately containing the cursor will be deleted when the Table Delete Table command is used Toolbar table editing icons The table editing icons in the second row of the toolbar are shortcuts to the Table menu commands These commands allow you to insert delete edit the structure of and assign formatting properties to the static table These icons can also be used for dynamic tables They cannot be used for XML tables since XML tables cannot be create
344. ns in each toolbar are listed in the sub sections of this section each with a brief description of the corresponding command Positioning the toolbars A toolbar can float freely on the screen or can be placed in a toolbar area along any edge of the GUI Toolbars are most commonly placed along the top edge of the GUI just below the Menu bar However they can also be placed along the side or bottom edges of the GUI To position a toolbar in a toolbar area do the following 1 Grab the toolbar by its handle if the toolbar is already in a toolbar area or by its title bar if the toolbar is floating 2 Drag the toolbar to the desired toolbar area if it exists and drop it at the desired location in that toolbar area If no toolbar area exists at the edge along which you wish to place the toolbar dragging the toolbar to that edge will automatically create a toolbar area there when the toolbar is dropped To make a toolbar float freely grab it by its handle drag it away from the toolbar area and drop it anywhere on the screen except at an edge or in an existing toolbar area Switching the display of toolbars on and off The display of individual toolbars can be switched on and off using any of the following three methods e Inthe View Toolbars menu screenshot below select or deselect a toolbar to respectively show or hide that toolbar Insert Table Authentic Properties T v Schema Sources Design Tree B E Style
345. nsert a bookmark or anchor anywhere in the SPS A bookmark can be referenced by a Hyperlink To insert a bookmark do the following 1 Place the cursor at the location where you wish to create the bookmark 2 Select Insert Bookmark or right click and select Insert Bookmark Insert Bookmark x Bookmark name top_of_page Other bookmarks on this page E Goto Cancel 3 Inthe Insert Bookmark dialog enter a name for the bookmark in the Name field If there are more bookmarks on the page they are displayed in the Other Bookmarks on This Page pane 4 Click OK The bookmark is defined Note A bookmark is created for a single fixed location in the SPS The name of the bookmark is a static name that you give It does not come dynamically from the XML document You cannot assign a dynamic name to a bookmark You can edit the name of a bookmark after it has been created Do this by selecting the bookmark clicking the Edit button of the bookmark Properties entry helper link Authentic group link and editing the name of the bookmark in the text box of the Edit Bookmark dialog Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Reference Insert Menu 329 Hyperlink The Hyperlink command enables you to insert a link from any part of the output document HTML to an anchor within the output document or to an external document or document fragment Note that links are created only in the output document li
346. ntic View static tables and dynamic tables Static tables are fixed in their structure and in the content type of cells You as the user of Authentic View can enter data into the table cells but you cannot change the structure of these tables i e add rows or columns etc or change the content type of a cell You enter data either by typing in text or by selecting from options presented in the form of check box or radio button alternatives or as a list in a combo box After you enter data you can edit it Nanonull Inc Street 119 Oakstreet Suite 4876 Phone 1 321 555 5155 City Vereno Fax 1 321 5555155 9 State amp Zip DC 29213 E mail office nanonull com Please note The icons or commands for editing dynamic tables must not be used to edit static tables Dynamic tables have rows that represent a repeating data structure i e each row has an identical data structure not the case with static tables Therefore you can perform row operations append row insert row move row up move row down and delete row These commands are available under the Authentic menu and as icons in the toolbar shown below aeza To use these commands place the cursor anywhere in the appropriate row and then select the required command Administration Leave First Last Title Ext EMail Shares Total Used Left 25 4 21 Office Callahy Manager 581 v callaby nanonull com 1500 Accounts Frank Further
347. ntry helper and drop it create it as contents in between the start and end tags of the dateline element 7 Select the city attribute of the dateline place element screenshot below in the Schema Sources entry helper gt THE iE dateline date E place city courtry source synopsis 8 Drag the city attribute node into Design View and drop it create as contents just after the end tag of the date element _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 54 Quick Start Tutorial Inserting Dynamic Content from XML Source 9 Drag the country attribute node into Design View and drop it create as contents just after the end tag of the city attribute When you are done the SPS design should look something like this Main template xXML gt Renine gt content resin Eine gt ES content Cee HSE ERY content CE gt content eau Has eee The HTML Preview will look like this NanoNull Inc Launches Version 2 0 of NanoPower 2006 04 01BostonUS A NanoNull Inc Jumps 3 on Release of New NanoPower Version 2006 04 01New YorkUSA NanoNull Shares Up 10 on Month Following New NanoPower Version 2006 04 25New YorkUSA NanoDiamonds Project to Go Ahead 2006 05 06LondonUK Design Authentic Preview HTH 4 Notice that the values of the city and country attributes are now included in the output Adding more dynamic content The contents
348. nts Using text state icons in Authentic View The text state icons you create can be viewed when that SPS or XML document associated with that SPS is opened in any Authentic View except that of StyleVision screenshot below In the lt sExXAMPLES3 gt folder of the StyleVision application folder the file Images Images xml which is associated with the SPS file Images Images sps contains the bold and italic text state icons Help EEEE In our example the text state icons will be grayed out when the cursor is not inside a para element They will be enabled when you place the cursor inside a para element because the boldand italic elements are child elements of para To apply markup by using text state icons first highlight some text inside the para element in the example file and then click a text state icon The relevant markup will be inserted and the corresponding formatting will be _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 176 Content Editing Procedures Using Graphics applied Removing text state icons To remove a text state icon in the Text State Icons dialog Authentic Text State Icons screenshot of dialog above place the cursor in the row containing tetext state icon to be deleted and click the Delete button at the top right of the dialog Then click OK to finish Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Content Editing Procedures Bookmarks and Hyperlinks 177
349. nts which modify text styles like bold italic Cancel Bitmap file italic brip 2 Enter bold as the element for which the text state icon is being created 3 Enter bold bmp as the name of the bitmap image file that is to be associated with the element bold The file bold bmp must be saved in the sps Picts folder in your application folder This image will be used as the toolbar icon in Authentic View It is already present in the sps Picts folder so you do not have to create the bitmap 4 Now append a row in the dialog and add the italic element and italic bmp as the bitmap file for the italic icon This file is also present in the sps Picts folder 5 Click OK to finish and save the SPS The steps above assign bitmap image files to the elements to be marked up bold and italic Next formatting for the two elements must be defined in the global templates of these elements This would be done as follows 1 Inthe All Global Elements list in the Schema Sources window right click the bold element and select Make Global Remove from Global This creates a global template in the SPS 2 In Design View select the contents placeholder and assign it a formatting of bold In the Font group of the Styles window set font weight to bold 3 Repeat the previous two steps for the italic element but set font style to italic 4 Save the SPS Now formatting has been defined in global templates for the bold and italic eleme
350. nts list deselect team department and telephone see screenshot and click OK The dynamic table is created 5 Place the cursor in the dynamic table and in the Properties entry helper with table selected in the Properties For column specify table properties as shown in the screenshot below Authentic align common event bgcolor border HTML cellpadding cellspacing datafld dataformatas datasrc frame rules summary width 6 Set additional properties as required in the Properties and Styles entry helpers For example a background color can be set for the header row by placing the cursor in the header row and with row selected in the Properties For column of the Styles entry helper specifying a value for the background color property color group You can also edit the headers which are strings of static text Also if the contents placeholder _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 80 Quick Start Tutorial Using Global Templates and Rest of Contents of the team element is still present in the global template delete it The HTML preview of the table will look something like this Andrew Bentinck a bentinck nanonull com Nadia Edwards n edwards nanonull com Janet Ashe j ashe nanonull com Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Quick Start Tutorial That s It 81 5 8 That s It Congratulations for having successfully completed the tutoria
351. nts of the headline child elements of newsitem each as a text string NanoNull Inc Launches Version 2 0 of NanoPower NanoNull Inc Jumps 3 on Release of New NanoPower Version NanoNull Shares Up 10 on Month Following New NanoPower Version NanoDiamonds Project to Go Ahead Design Authentic Preview HTMI 4 You should also check the preview of Authentic View Inserting attribute contents When an element is inserted into the design as contents the contents of its attributes are not automatically inserted You must explicitly drag the attribute node into the design for the attribute s value to be output In your SPS now do the following 1 Place the cursor after the end tag of the headline element and press Enter This produces an empty line screenshot below Main template eaey content Fess 2 Inthe Schema Sources entry helper expand the dateline element screenshot below _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 52 Quick Start Tutorial Inserting Dynamic Content from XML Source 8 18 gt 18 S LE Root elements B presswatch 8 selection E newsitems EE newsitem headline E14 dateline oom date E place eity courtry source synopsis E metainto iE team iE T All Global Elements Notice that the dateline element has two child elements date and place and that the place element has two attributes c
352. nual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Chapter 8 Presentation Procedures 196 Presentation Procedures 8 Presentation Procedures In the SPS design a single set of styling features is defined for components These styles are converted to the corresponding style markup in the respective outputs HTML RTF and PDF in the Enterprise Edition HTML in the Professional Edition Styling of SPS components All styling of SPS components is done using CSS2 principles and syntax Styles can be defined in external stylesheets globally for the SPS and locally on a component The cascading order of CSS2 applies to the SPS and provides considerable flexibility in designing styles How to work with CSS styles is described in detail in the Working with CSS Styles sub section of this section Additionally in the SPS design certain HTML elements are available as markup for SPS components These predefined formats are passed to the HTML output The formatting inherent in such markup is therefore also used to provide styling to SPS components When CSS styles are applied to predefined formats the CSS styles get priority over the inherent style of the predefined format Predefined formats are described in the Predefined Formats sub section of this section Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Presentation Procedures Predefined Formats 197 8 1 Predefined Formats StyleVision provides a number of pre defined formats each of which correspo
353. nversion 125 Hyperlink command for inserting in design 329 Hyperlinks 177 and unparsed entities 180 creating and editing 180 linking to bookmarks 180 linking to external resources 180 locating via hyperlinks 235 removing and deleting 180 symbol in Design View 293 Icons _ 2006 Altova GmbH Index 425 Icons for formatting text in Authentic View 343 Icons in Authentic View 174 Image command for inserting in design 320 Image formats in Authentic View 278 Images accessing for output rendering 172 and unparsed entity URIs 172 in Quick Start tutorial 56 locating via unparsed entities 235 specifying URIs for 172 symbol in Design View 293 implementation specific behavior of XSLT 2 0 functions 383 implicit timezone and XPath 2 0 functions 385 Inline styles 210 Input fields 150 Input formatting defining format strings for 357 of dates 230 Insert column in SPS table 336 row in SPS table 336 Insert menu 319 Insert Auto Calculation 330 Insert Bookmarks 328 Insert Bullets and Numbering 322 Insert Condition 332 Insert Contents 324 Insert Date Picker 326 Insert Format 321 Insert Horizontal Line 323 Insert Hyperlink 329 Insert Image 320 Insert Page 327 Insert Paragraph 321 Insert Rest of Contents 325 Integer formatting of 219 Interface see GUI 20 Internet usage in Altova products 404 J JavaScript
354. nverted to element or attribute nodes in the XML Schema so that they retain the table or list structure in the schema Converting a table to elements attributes To convert a table to schema nodes do the following 1 Select the HTML table by highlighting some text in it 2 Drag it to the node in the schema tree as a sibling or child of which you want to create it 3 Drop the node when the Create as Sibling symbol or Create as Child symbol appears 4 Inthe context menu that now pops up screenshot below select the command Convert selected table list to elements or Convert selected table list to attributes according to whether you wish to create the contents of table cells as elements or attributes respectively Convert selection to elements Convert selection to attributes Surround selection with element Convert selected tableslist to elements Convert selected tablejlist to attributes 5 In the Convert Table dialog that pops up screenshot below select whether the table created in the SPS should be a static table or dynamic table Convert Table q x M Convert the selected table Toa static table Toa dynamic table Growing top down Growing left right JV First row column is a header s If the static table option is selected then for each cell in the table a schema node is created In the design each node is inserted with the content placeholder The data in the table cells is copie
355. o Calculation is highlighted in the Design Tree The dialog to edit the Auto Calculation is accessed via the Properties entry helper URI objects There are three URI based objects that can be inserted in a design e Images If an image is inserted in the SPS design and can be accessed by StyleVision it becomes visible in Design View If it cannot be accessed its place in the SPS is _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 296 Reference Design View marked by an image placeholder e Bookmarks Anchors n1 OrgChart EF gt lt A n1 CompanyLogo EDR EDR EFP n1 CompanyLago gt Bookmark tags are yellow and indicated with the character a screenshots above bookmark is created with the command Insert Bookmark and can be empty or contain content Content must always be inserted after the anchor is created Anchor tags can be expanded screenshot above left or collapsed screenshot above right e Links Link tags are yellow and indicated with the character a screenshots above A link is created with the command Insert Hyperlink The link item can be created before or after the link is created If an item is to be created as a link it should be selected and the link created around it Link tags can be expanded screenshot above left or collapsed screenshot above right Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Reference Design View 297 XPath Dialog The Edit XPath Expression dialog scre
356. o the rights granted herein Altova grants you a non exclusive non transferable limited license to compile into executable form the complete generated code comprised of the combination of the Restricted Source Code and the Unrestricted Source Code and to use copy distribute or license that executable You may not distribute or redistribute sublicense sell or transfer to a third party the Restricted Source Code unless said third party already has a license to the Restricted Source Code through their separate license agreement with Altova or other agreement with _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 410 Appendices License Information Altova Altova reserves all other rights in and to the Software With respect to the feature s of UModel that permit reverse engineering of your own source code or other source code that you have lawfully obtained such use by you does not constitute a violation of this Agreement Except as otherwise permitted in Section 1 h reverse engineering of the Software is strictly prohibited as further detailed therein b Server Use You may install one copy of the Software on your computer file server for the purpose of downloading and installing the Software onto other computers within your internal network up to the Permitted Number of computers If you have licensed SchemaA gent then you may install SchemaA gent Server on any server computer or workstation and use it in connection with your Softw
357. ocument and the JavaScript Editor by clicking the dropdown menu arrow and selecting Design or JavaScript as required e Authentic View which enables you to immediately see the Authentic View of an XML document the Working XML File The SPS is dynamically applied to the Working XML File thus enabling you to try out Authentic View e Output Views HTML output These views are a preview of the actual output format and of the XSLT stylesheet used to generate that output The view can be toggled between the output preview and the XSLT stylesheet by clicking the dropdown menu arrow and making the appropriate selection Each of the views listed above is available as a tab at the bottom of the Main Window in the Views Bar To select a view click on its tab The tab of the selected view is highlighted _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 22 User Interface Main Window Design View The Design View illustration below is the view in which the SPS is designed In Design View you create the design of the output document by i inserting content using the Entry Helpers the keyboard and the various content creation and editing features provided in the menus and toolbars and ii formatting the content using the various formatting features provided in the Entry Helpers and menus These aspects of the Design View are explained in more detail below r Main Window Active view of active document Click to switch to JavaS
358. of elements and attributes from the XML data source can be inserted anywhere in the design using the method described above To complete this section add the synopsis and source elements to the design so that the design now looks like this Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Quick Start Tutorial Inserting Dynamic Content from XML Source 55 Main template headline gt content headline HEE BBE content EED BEAD conte EET conte BEST EE synopsis gt content lt synopsis source gt content lt source Notice that the synopsis element has been placed before the source element which is not the order in which the elements are in the schema After you have added the synopsis and source elements to the design check the HTML preview to see the output This is an important point to note that the order in which nodes are placed in the main template is how you specify the structure of the output Another important point to note at this stage is the form in which a node is created in the design In the HTML preview you will see that all the nodes included in the design have been sent to the output as text strings Alternatively to being output as a text string a node can be output in some other form for example as a table or a combo box In this section you have by creating all the nodes as contents specified that the output form of all nodes are text strings In the section Using Conditions
359. of that group are displayed in the Attribute column If a value for a property is defined the value appears in the Value column List All All properties of all groups are listed in a single alphabetically ordered list The Attribute column is listed first followed by the Group column and then the Value column List Non Empty Esl Only properties that have values defined are listed The columns are ordered from left to right as follows Attribute Group and Value In this view it will not be possible to define a value for a new property because no undefined property is listed However this is a quick way to see all the defined properties for the selected _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 44 User Interface Design Entry Helpers component type and the displayed properties can be edited Views can also be changed by right clicking any item in the Property Definitions column selecting View Mode and then the required view Toggle Important and Reset toolbar icons Clicking the Toggle Important icon o sets the CSS value important on or off for the selected CSS rule Clicking the Reset icon resets the value of the selected property Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Chapter 5 Quick Start Tutorial 46 Quick Start Tutorial 5 Quick Start Tutorial The objective of this tutorial is to take you quickly through the the key steps in creating an effective SPS It starts with a section on
360. of three parts Field Name Operator Value The options for Field Names and Operators are available in combo boxes The value of the expression must be keyed in and may be a parameter indicated by a preceding character Clear DB Filter command The Clear DB Filter command deletes the filter after asking for and receiving a confirmation from you Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Reference EditMenu 315 Edit Stylesheet Parameters The Edit Stylesheet Parameters command enables you to declare and edit parameters and their default values The command is available in both the Design Document view and the Authentic Editor View When you click this command the Edit Parameters dialog shown below pops up Edit Parameters In this dialog enter parameter names without leading Default Value CA INY The following points should be noted e You can insert append edit and delete parameters for the entire stylesheet Parameter names must begin with a letter and can contain the characters A to Z a to z 0 to 9 and the underscore _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 316 Reference View Menu 11 5 View Menu The View menu screenshot below enables you to change the look of the GUI and to toggle on and off the display of GUI components You can switch the display of individual toolbars individual design entry helpers and the status bar on and off Toolbars
361. older at the cursor location point There contents placeholder can be inserted within two types of node element and attribute and it indicates that all children of the current node will be processed e If the current node is an element node the node s children element nodes and text nodes will be processed For the processing of children element nodes global templates will be used if these exist Otherwise the built in template rule for elements will be used For the processing of text nodes the built in template rule for text nodes will be used the effect of which is to output the text Effectively the built in template rule for elements outputs the text of all descendant text nodes It is important to note that the values of attributes will not be output when the contents placeholder is used unless a global template is defined for the attribute s parent element or one of its ancestors and the attribute is explicitly output using either the contents placeholder or any other content rendering component e If the current node is an attribute node the built in template rule for the attribute s child text node will be used This template copies the text of the text node to the output effectively outputting the attribute s value The contents placeholder can also be inserted for a node by placing the cursor inside the node tags right clicking and selecting Insert Contents Styling the contents The contents placeholder can be
362. on editable XML file is generated when the DB is loaded into StyleVision It is used as the Working XML File and for generating HTML output The editable XML file must be saved before changes made in Authentic View can be viewed in a preview Note e Inthe Authentic View of other Authentic View products only one temporary editable XML file is created when a DB based SPS is opened Modifications made in Authentic View are written to this file When the file is saved the information in the XML file is written to the DB e You can filter the data that goes into the non editable temporary XML File for report generation See Edit DB Filter for details e You do not have to specifically assign a Working XML File in order to see HTML previews The automatically generated non editable temporary XML file is used for this purpose Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH High Level Procedures Working with Databases 115 DB Filters Filtering DB Data The data that is imported into the temporary non editable XML file from the database DB can be filtered Note that the non editable XML file is used for report generation and the effect of a DB filter will therefore be seen only in the HTML preview not in Authentic Preview which displays the temporary editable XML file The DB filter DB Filter can be created either within the DB itself if this is supported in your DB application or it can be created within the SPS SPS fi
363. on is to be dropped according to whether the selection is to be created as a sibling or child of that node Selecting how the node is created When you drop the selection see previous section a context menu pops up screenshot below in which you make two choices i whether the node is to be created as an element or attribute ii whether the selection is to be converted to the node or whether the node is to simply surround the selection Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH High Level Procedures HTML Import 129 Schema Sources tS gt 1 BB Schema sources EA SUSER1 User E Z Root elements Tal Convert selection to elements Convert selection to attributes Surround selection with element The following points should be noted e When a selection is converted to a node element or attribute the node tags together with a contained content placeholder replace the selection in the design In the design and the output the text content of the selection is removed from the static content In the output the text of the selection appears as dynamic content of the node in the XML document e Ifan HTML node is converted to an XML node the XML node tags are inserted within the HTML node tags e When a selection including HTML node selections is surrounded by an XML node the XML node tags are inserted before and after the selection In the design and the output th
364. onal template then keep the Auto Calculation outside the condition if possible This ensures that the Auto Calculation is always visible no matter what branch of the condition is visible and that the node will always be updated when the Auto Calculation is triggered If the Auto Calculation were inside a branch that is not visible then it would not be triggered and the node not updated 2 Ifan Auto Calculation must be placed inside a condition ensure i that it is placed in every branch of the condition and ii that the various branches of the condition cover all possible conditions There should be no eventuality that is not covered by a condition in the Conditional Template otherwise there is a risk if the Auto Calculation is not in any visible template that the Auto Calculation might not be triggered 3 Remember the fundamental procedure Only Auto Calculations in visible conditions are evaluated Conditions are always evaluated even when no condition is visible Auto Calculations are evaluated before Conditional Templates 4 Ifyou require different Auto Calculations for different conditions ensure that all possible eventualities for every Auto Calculation are covered 5 Remember that the order in which conditions are defined in a conditional template is significant The first condition to evaluate to true is executed The otherwise condition is a convenient catch all for non specific eventualities Altova StyleVision User Ma
365. onary for SPS spell checks 361 Delete column from table in SPS 337 row from table in SPS 337 table in SPS 335 Delete command 310 Deleting a DB Filter 115 Design Entry Helper windows docking 27 floating 27 Design Entry Helpers Auto Hide 27 description of 27 Hide 27 switching display on and off 318 Design structure 92 Design Tree entry helper window 33 see also Design Entry Helpers 27 Design View 292 and JavaScript Editor 22 description of 22 symbols in SPS design 293 Dictionaries for SPS spell checks 361 Distribution of Altova s software products 405 406 408 Docking Design Entry Helper windows 27 Document element definition of 15 Document elements see Root elements 93 Document node definition of 15 Document views in GUI 21 Documentation overview of 6 Documents opening and closing 21 DTD declaring unparsed entities 235 declaring unparsed entities in 236 DTDs as SPS source 95 Dynamic SPS tables in Authentic View usage of 258 Dynamic content in Quick Start tutorial 50 Dynamic lists 156 158 Dynamic table toolbar buttons for editing 290 Dynamic tables 159 and global templates 163 difference from appended inserted rows 163 editing 247 headers and footers in 163 nested dynamic tables 163 see also Tables 166 E Edit menu 310 Edit Parameters dialog 315 Edit Xpath Expression dialog see XPath dialog 297 Elements adding in Authentic View and SPS
366. ontents the data in it is output as a string which is the concatenation of the content of that element s child text nodes and the text nodes of all descendant elements Inserting element contents In your SPS do the following 1 Inthe Schema Sources entry helper expand the schema tree up to the children of the newsitem element screenshot below 187 8 8 E Z Root elements a E presswatch selection iE newsitems E newsitem headline iE dateline source synopsis metainto team E T All Global Elements 2 Select the headline element drag it into Design View and when the arrow cursor turns to an insertion point drop it into the main template 3 Inthe context menu that pops up select Create Contents The start and end tags of the headline element are inserted at the point where you dropped the headline element and they contain the content placeholder The headline tags are surrounded by the start and end tags of the ancestor elements of headline screenshot below 4 Inthe design put elements on different lines by pressing Enter as shown in the screenshot below Main template hm SS Resane content eaae Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Quick Start Tutorial Inserting Dynamic Content from XML Source 51 Click the HTML tab to see a preview of the HTML output screenshot below The HTML preview shows the conte
367. onvert selected table list to elements or Convert selected table list to attributes according to whether you wish to create the contents of table cells as elements or attributes respectively Convert selection to elements Convert selection to attributes Surround selection with element Convert selected tablejlist to elements Convert selected tablejlist to attributes In the Convert List dialog that pops up screenshot below select whether the table created in the SPS should be a static table or dynamic table Converttist ne M Convert the selected list To a static list To a dynamic list s If the static list option is selected then for each list item a schema node is created In the design each node is inserted with the text of the HTML list item included as static content of the list item If the dynamic list option is selected then each list item is represented by a single list item node in the design In the design the list item element is inserted with the content placeholder After you have selected the required option click Convert to finish _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 132 High Level Procedures HTML Import Generating Output After completing the SPS you can generate the following output using the File Save Generated Files command e Generated user defined schema which is the schema you have created in the Schema Sources entry helper e
368. or M Apply same format to XSLT 1 0 output not all formatting options can be applied By default the Unformatted radio button the standard lexical format for the node s datatype is selected 2 To define an alternative format select the Formatted radio button 3 You can now select a predefined date format from the drop down list of the combo box screenshot below or define your own format in the input field of the combo box See Input Formatting Syntax for details about the syntax to use when defining your own format Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Additional Editing Procedures Working with Dates 231 M Formats for type date C Unformatted Standard format YYYY MM DD E Formatted Canca Month DD YYYY Using Input Formatting to format Auto Calculations When Auto Calculations evaluate to a value that is a lexical date format Input Formatting can be used to format the display of the result Do this as follows 1 Right click the Auto Calculation and select Input Formatting This pops up the Input Formatting dialog screenshot below Input Formatting Format for AutoCale field a a OK C Unformatted Formatted please choose data type integer for related decimal or related By default the Unformatted radio button is selected 2 To define an alternative format select the Formatted radio button 3 Inthe combo box to the ri
369. or more information about procedures used with XSLT stylesheets see the section Generated Files The SPS and output You can also use StyleVision to directly generate output HTML RTF XSL FO and PDF in Enterprise Edition HTML in Professional Edition The tabs for Output Views display the output for the active SPS document directly in the StyleVision GUI The required output can also be generated to file i from within the GUI via the File Save Generated Files command or by invoking StyleVision via the command line These procedures are described in more detail in the High Level Procedures section _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 12 Introduction What Is an SPS Authentic View in Altova Products Authentic View is a graphical XML document editor available in the following Altova products Altova XMLSpy Altova Authentic Desktop Altova Authentic Browser Altova StyleVision Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Introduction Product Features 13 3 2 Product Features The main product features of StyleVision are listed below in two groups General product features which are high level features SPS design features which are features related to the design of the SPS General product features Given below is a list of the main high level features of StyleVision Multiple SPS designs can be open simultaneously with one being active at any given time Each SPS design is shown i
370. ormats One reason to assign a predefined format is to give a component the inherent styling of that predefined format In the design select the headline element and then select Insert Format Heading 3 h3 alternatively use the Predefined Formats combo box in the toolbar The predefined format tags are created around the headline element screenshot below gt aa content C Notice that the font properties of the contents change and that vertical spacing is added above and below the predefined format These property values are inherent in the n3 predefined format Another use of predefined formats is to group design components in a block so that they can be formatted as a block or assigned inline properties as a group The most convenient predefined property for this purpose is the div predefined format which creates a block without spacing above or below In your design assign the newsitem dateline synopsis and source nodes separate div components Your design should look something like the screenshot below Note that the static text Source is also included in the div component that contains the source element and that the entire newsitem element is inside a div component _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 62 Quick Start Tutorial Formatting the Content gt aS content qE PEDE content Ce BREE WAY content GA content ESET HEE ere CH DEE content Sans CA div gt Sou
371. ou may get an error message when you try to load it In this case open the schema and try to resolve the problem in it _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 302 Reference File Menu Open Close The Open Ctrl O command allows you to open an existing SPS file The familiar Open dialog of Windows systems is opened and allows you to select a file with an extension of sps The Close command closes the currently active SPS document Note that while several files can be open only one is active The active document can also be closed by clicking the Close button at the top right of the Main Window If you have unsaved changes in the document you will be prompted to save these changes Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Reference File Menu 303 Save Design Design As All The Save Design Ctrl S command saves the currently open document as an SPS file with the file extension sps The Save Design As command shows the familiar Save As dialog of Windows systems You can enter the name with which the active SPS file should be saved and the location where you want it saved The newly saved file becomes the current file in StyleVision The Save All Ctrl Shift S command saves all the open SPS documents _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 304 Reference File Menu Save Authentic XML Data In Authentic View you can edit the Working XML File or DB related to the SPS The
372. our own entities which allows you to insert these special characters or text strings by inserting the corresponding entities See Defining Entities for details e What image formats can be displayed in Authentic View To learn how to use all the features of Authentic View please do the Authentic View Tutorial using either XMLSpy or Authentic Desktop The Authentic View Tutorial is available with these products Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Authentic View Editing in Authentic View 257 Tables in Authentic View The three table types fall into two categories SPS tables static and dynamic and XML tables SPS tables are of two types static and dynamic SPS tables are designed by the designer of the StyleVision Power Stylesheet to which your XML document is linked You yourself cannot insert an SPS table into the XML document but you can enter data into SPS table fields and add and delete the rows of dynamic SPS tables The section on SPS tables below explains the features of these tables XML tables are inserted by you the user of Authentic View Their purpose is to enable you to insert tables at any allowed location in the document hierarchy should you wish to do so The editing features of XML tables and the XML table editing icons are described below _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 258 Authentic View Editing in Authentic View SPS Tables Two types of SPS tables are used in Authe
373. ova GmbH Appendices XSLT Engine Information 387 Functions Support The table below lists in alphabetical order the implementation specific behavior of certain functions The following general points should be noted e In general when a function expects a sequence of one item as an argument and a sequence of more than one item is submitted then an error is returned e All string comparisons are done using the Unicode codepoint collation e Results that are QNames are serialized in the form prefix localname base uri e f external entities are used in the source XML document and if a node in the external entity is specified as the input node argument of the base uri function it is still the base URI of the including XML document that is used not the base URI of the external entity e The use of the xm1 base attribute in the source XML document is not supported This means that the base URI of a node in the XML document cannot be altered using the xm1 base attribute collection e The collection function is a mapping of form string nodes Currently called available collections and left empty by the external environment The function therefore returns either i the empty sequence when called with no argument or with an empty sequence or ii an error when called with a non empty argument e See note on whitespace in the General Information section contd Function name Notes current date The cu
374. ova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 106 High Level Procedures Working with Databases Select a MS Access Database l l x Click browse and select an Existing Microsoft Access Database dev37 DB altova mdb Browse omes 2 Ifthe SPS you are creating will be used by several users to access or edit a single DB then the path to the DB should be a UNC path This ensures that the SPS is correctly set up to point to the Access database via a network share Without a UNC in the SPS and a network share mechanism it will not be possible to point clients correctly to the DB For an overview of network shares and UNC paths see Network shares and UNC paths below 3 Click Next The Select Base Table Information dialog is displayed Having created the connection string to the MS Access DB you must select the DB tables you wish to create in the XML Schema How to do this is described in the section Select Base Table Information below Building an ADO connection string explicitly If you selected a DB type other than MS Access in the Select a Source DB dialog then a dialog appears prompting you to build an ADO connection string StyleVision uses only ADO connections when connecting to non MS Access DBs MS SQL Server ADO Connection String x Generate a valid connection string by clicking on the build button Once the connection string is generated click on the nest button to proceed Build e Next
375. ova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 268 Authentic View Editing in Authentic View Edit Database Query as first character in value signifies parameter Cancel 4 Enter the expression for the criterion An expression con sists of i a field name available from the associated combo box ii an operator available from the associated combo box and iii a value to be entered directly For details of how to construct expressions see the Expressions in criteria section 5 If you wish to add another criterion click the Append AND or Append OR button according to which logical operator AND or OR you wish to use to join the two criteria Then add the new criterion For details about the logical operators see the section Re ordering criteria in DB Queries Expressions in criteria Expressions in DB Query criteria consist of a field name an operator and a value The available field names are the child elements of the selected top level data table the names of these fields are listed in a combo box see screenshot above The operators you can use are listed below Equal to lt gt Not equal to lt Less than lt Less than or equal to gt Greater than gt Greater than or equal to LIKE Phonetically alike NOT LIKE Phonetically not alike IS NULL Is empty NOT NULL Is not empty If IS NULL or NOT NULL is selected the Value field is disabled Values must be entered without quotes o
376. ova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Authentic View Interface 247 Authentic View toolbar icons Icons in the Authentic View toolbar are command shortcuts Some icons will already be familiar to you from other Windows applications or Altova products others might be new to you This section describes icons unique to Authentic View In the description below related icons are grouped together Show hide XML markup Markup tags can be turned on or off in Authentic Preview X Hide markup Show all markup XML element attribute tags are shown with names Editing dynamic table structures Rows in a dynamic SPS table are repetitions of a data structure Each row represents an occurrence of a single element Each row therefore has the same XML substructure as the next The dynamic table editing commands manipulate the rows of a dynamic SPS table That is you can modify the number and order of the element occurrences You cannot however edit the columns of a dynamic SPS table since this would entail changing the substructure of individual element occurrences The icons for dynamic table editing commands appear in the toolbar and are also available in the Authentic menu See ets Append row to table Insert row in table Duplicate current table row i e cell contents are duplicated m Move current row up by one row Move current row down by one row Ej Delete the current row Please note
377. provide hands on experience of creating an SPS The Procedures sections High Level Procedures Content Editing Procedures Presentation Procedures and Additional Editing Procedures provide detailed descriptions of how to use various StyleVision features For subsequent reference the Reference section provides a concise description of all toolbar icon design symbols and menu commands organized according to toolbar and menu The Editing in Authentic View and Importing HTML sections provide respectively information about editing in Authentic View and converting HTML documents to XML and XML Schema documents Support options Should you have any question or problem related to StyleVision the following support options are available 1 Check the Help file this documentation The Help file contains a full text search feature besides being fully indexed 2 Check the FAQs and Discussion Forum at the Altova Website 3 Contact Altova s Support Center Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH About this Documentation 7 Commonly used abbreviations The following abbreviations are used frequently in this documentation SPS StyleVision Power Stylesheet DB Database CSS Cascading Style Sheets FAQ Frequently Asked Questions _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual Chapter 3 Introduction 10 Introduction 3 Introduction This section introduces you to Altova StyleVision 2006 It consist
378. pt Editor are listed in the Design Tree window under the Scripts entry screenshot below The screenshot below indicates that four JavaScript functions Average ImageOut ImageOver and Buttons are currently defined in the active SPS Design Tree C Program Files AttovalStyle Vision2006 Examples H Namespaces Gal Parameter i aga Schema sources B 8 Scripts E Javascript Average ImageOut ImageOver Buttons Has Global Templates E Page Layout The functions defined in the JavaScript Editor are available as event handler calls within the GUI When a component in the design document is selected any of the defined functions can be assigned to an event handler property in the Event property group in the Properties Entry Helper screenshot below How to assign a JavaScript function to an event handler is described in the section Assigning Function to Event Handlers _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 240 Additional Editing Procedures Using Scripts EB ks roperties For paragraph Authentic onclick common ondblclick event onkeydown HTML onkeypressed onkeyup onmousedown onmousemove onmouseout onmouseover onmouseup Note Scripts are applicable in the HTML output only They are not applicable in Authentic View Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Additional Editing Procedures Using Scripts 241 Defining JavaScript Functions To define JavaScript f
379. quired in order for you to avail of technical support If you need to manage your licenses or change licenses you can access the Registration dialog at any time with the Registration command You can register using either a free evaluation key or a permanent key code Issues relating to each type of key are described below Free evaluation key To activate the software for a 30 day evaluation click the Request FREE evaluation key button Enter your name company and e mail address in the dialog that appears and click Request Now The evaluation key is sent to the e mail address you entered and should reach you in a few minutes Now enter the key in the key code field of the registration dialog box and click OK to start working with StyleVision When you are ready to order a licensed version of StyleVision you can use the Order license key button in the registration dialog or Help Order Form to proceed to the secure Altova Online Shop License Key Code Your permanent license will be of one of two types a single user or multi user license Both types are sent by e mail A single user license contains your license data and includes your name company e mail and key code Please make sure that you enter the data required in the registration dialog exactly as given in your license e mail A multi user license contains your license data and includes your company name and key code Please make sure that you enter the data required in
380. r Defined Schema Save Generated User Defined XML Data 2 Select the file you wish to generate This pops up the Save As dialog 3 Browse for the desired folder enter the desired filename and click OK _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 124 High Level Procedures Working with Databases From the command line From the command line you can call StyleVision so that it generates and saves files associated with a DB based SPS You can save not only the XML Schema and XSLT files but also an XML file with data from the DB and HTML output files based on the design in the SPS Fora description of how to use the command line see StyleVision from the command line Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH High Level Procedures HTML Import 125 6 4 HTML Import In StyleVision you can import an HTML file and create the following documents based on it An SPS document based on the design and structure of the imported HTML file An XML Schema in which HTML document components are created as schema elements or attributes Optionally additional elements and attributes that are not related to the HTML document can be created in the user defined schema An XML document with i a structure based on the XML Schema you have created and ii content from the HTML file XSLT stylesheets based on the design in Design View HTML to XML step by step The HTML Import mechanism which enables the creation o
381. r an example of a table element having an HTML table structure see the HTML OrgChart XML Schema in the Examples folder HTML OrgChart xsd A table model corresponding to the HTML table model would have a structure as shown in the XML fragment below lt table gt lt tbody gt lt tr gt lt td gt lt tr gt lt tbody gt lt table gt The element names in the example above are the default names you will find in the SPS If the names of the table elements in your schema do not match these default names you must map the names of the table elements in your schema to the default names in the CALS HTML Table Properties dialog Authentic CALS HTML Tables You can do this when you check the Enable XML tables option in the dialog If there is more than one element in the schema that has a valid table content model then the mapping to the default names determines which element will be used as the table element Caution If an element called table exists in the schema it will be treated as the XML table element if XML tables have been enabled in the StyleVision Power Stylesheet because table is the default name for the table element in the SPS This could lead to errors if the element table is not intended to be used as a table element Enabling XML tables with StyleVision In order for the user of Authentic View to be able to create XML tables in an XML document XML tables must be enabled in the SPS To enable XML tables click Auth
382. r any other delimiter Values must also have the same formatting as that of the corresponding DB field otherwise the expression will evaluate to FALSE For example if a criterion for a field of the date datatype in an MS Access DB has an expression StartDate 25 05 2004 the expression will evaluate to FALS in an MS Access DB has a format of yyyy MM DD Using parameters with DB Queries E because the date datatype Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Authentic View Editing in Authentic View 269 You can enter the name of a parameter as the value of an expression when creating queries Parameters are variables that can be used instead of literal values in queries You first declare the parameter and its value and then use the parameter in expressions This causes the value of the parameter to be used as the value of that expression The parameters that you add in the Edit Parameters dialog can be parameters that have already been declared for the stylesheet In this case the new value overrides the value in the stylesheet Parameters are useful if you wish to use a single value in multiple expressions Declaring parameters from the Edit DB Query dialog To declare parameters 1 Click the Parameters button in the Edit Database Query dialog This opens the Edit Parameters dialog see screenshot Edit Parameters In this dialog enter parameter names without leading Parameter Name Default Value pri
383. r elements if the ancestors are not present at the insertion point In the screenshot above the Name element node is shown expanded left and collapsed right e Attribute node An attribute node is inserted together with all its ancestor elements if the ancestors are _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 294 Reference Design View not present at the insertion point Attribute names contain the prefix e In the screenshot above the href attribute node is shown expanded left and collapsed right XML document content XML document content is represented by two placeholders e contents rest of contents The contents placeholder represents the contents of a single node All the text content of the node is output If the node is an attribute node or a text only element node the value of the node is output If the node is an element node that contains mixed content or element only content the text content of all descendants is output In XSLT terms the contents placeholder is equivalent to the xsl apply templates element with its select attribute set for that node Note When applied to an element node the contents placeholder does not output the values of attributes of that element To output attribute nodes you must explicitly include the attribute in the template main or global The rest of contents placeholder applies templates to the rest of the child elements of the current node The template th
384. r example the European Union alone requires several different encodings to cover all its languages Even for a single language like English no single encoding was adequate for all the letters punctuation and technical symbols in common use These encoding systems used to conflict with one another That is two encodings used the same number for two different characters or different numbers for the same character Any given computer especially servers needs to support many different encodings yet whenever data is passed between different encodings or platforms that data always runs the risk of corruption Unicode is changing all that Unicode provides a unique number for every character no matter what the platform no matter what the program and no matter what the language The Unicode Standard has been adopted by such industry leaders as Apple HP IBM JustSystem Microsoft Oracle SAP Sun Base and many others Unicode is required by modern standards such as XML Java ECMAScript JavaScript LDAP CORBA 3 0 WML etc and is the official way to implement ISO IEC 10646 It is supported in many operating systems all modern browsers and many other products The emergence of the Unicode Standard and the availability of tools supporting it are among the most significant recent global software technology trends Incorporating Unicode into client server or multi tiered applications and web sites offers significant cost savings over t
385. r that edition that are released during your Support Period For the duration of your SMP s Support Period you will also be eligible to receive upgrades to the comparable edition of the next version of the Software that succeeds the Software edition that you have licensed for applicable upgrades released during your Support Period The specific upgrade edition that you are eligible to receive based on your Support Period is further detailed in the SMP that you have purchased Software that is introduced as separate product is not included in SMP Maintenance releases updates and upgrades may or may not include additional features In addition Altova will provide Priority Technical Support to you for the duration of the Support Period Priority Technical Support is provided via a Web based support form only and Altova will make commercially reasonable efforts to respond via e mail to all requests within forty eight 48 hours during Altova s business hours MO FR 8am UTC 10pm UTC Austrian and US holidays excluded and to make reasonable efforts to provide work arounds to errors reported in the Software During the Support Period you may also report any Software problem or error to Altova If Altova determines that a reported reproducible material error in the Software exists and significantly impairs the usability and utility of the Software Altova agrees to use reasonable commercial efforts to correct or provide a usable work around solution in an
386. ranch right click the branch of the condition you wish to copy and select Condition Copy Branch The Edit XPath Expression dialog will pop up containing the XPath expression of the branch being copied After modifying the XPath expression and clicking OK a new branch is added to the condition The new branch contains a copy of the template of the branch that was copied The new branch is indicated in the design by a new cell with a number incremented by one over the last branch prior to the addition The Otherwise branch The otherwise branch is an alternative catch all to specify a certain type of processing template in the event that none of the defined branches evaluate to true Without the Otherwise branch you would either have to create branches for all possible eventualities or be prepared for the possibility that the condition will be exited without any branch being executed To insert an otherwise branch use either the Add New Branch or Copy Branch commands as described above and in the Edit XPath dialog click the Otherwise check box screenshot below _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 192 Content Editing Procedures Condition Templates Edit XPath expression Expression Otherwise 7 m Select Schema Attribute or Element Selection OrgChart Oiffice Departm Moving branches up and down The order of the branches in the condition is important because the first branch to evaluate to t
387. rce Source gt content source lt div Assigning components class attributes A style rule can be defined for a class of components For example all headers can be defined to have the following common property values a particular font family font weight and color In the design each header must then be assigned to the class for which the style rule is defined In your design select the n3 tag and in the Styles entry helper select 1 paragraph to select the predefined format and the common group of properties Double click in the Value field of the class property and enter header bottom class common clear details direction effects display float IE left numbering position paged media right text top Ul unicode bidi z index This particular instance of the n3 format is now assigned to a class named header Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Quick Start Tutorial Formatting the Content 63 Adding an external CSS stylesheet to the style repository Style rules in an external CSS stylesheet can be applied to components in the SPS design External stylesheets must however first be added to the style repository in order for rules in them to be applied to components In the Style Repository entry helper in Design View do the following 1 Select the External item 2 Click the Add button in the toolbar This pops up the Open dialog 3 Browse for the file st yleVision2006 Example
388. re separated by a text string enclosed in single quotes e A field can have optional prefix and or suffix character s For example lt 0 00 e A field can have one or more optional field options The field option s for each field must be contained in a single set of curly braces and must follow the field without any intervening space Multiple field options for a single field are separated by comma For example in the definition DD Month uc ro YyYyy the curly brace enclosed uc and ro are field options for the field Month Examples Example of Input Formatting for an xs decimal datatype S 0 00 Examples of the output would be S 25 00 25 42 267 56 Example of Input Formatting for an xs date datatype DD Month uc ro YYYY where uc and ro are field options for making the Month field uppercase and read only respectively An example of the output would be 24 SEPTEMBER 2003 Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Additional Editing Procedures Input Formatting Formatting Numeric Datatypes 223 Field types A field type represents a component of the data and the way that component is to be formatted The formatting inherent in the field type can be modified further by prefix and suffix modifiers as well as by field options The following tables list the available field types Note that in the drop down menu of the Input Formatting dialog there are type specific and field only I
389. res Creating the SPS Structure 101 Output Structure The design document consists of one main template and optionally one or more global templates In this section we describe the role that these two kinds of templates play in the structure of the design We are not concerned here with the presentation properties in the design only the structure The main template The main template determines the structure of the output That is the sequence in which the main template is laid out in the design is the sequence in which Authentic View and the output is laid out In programming jargon this is procedural processing Processing starts at the beginning of the template and proceeds in sequence to the end Along the way nodes from the XML document are processed The templates which process these nodes are called local templates After a local template is processed the processor moves to the next component in the main template and so on Occasionally a node may reference a global template for its processing In such cases after the global template is executed for that node the processor returns to the position in the main template from which it branched out and continues in sequence from the next component onwards The entry point for the main template is the document node of the main schema The main schema is the schema designated by you as such right click the schema in the Schema Sources entry helper and select Set As Main Schema StyleV
390. ress Enter or click anywhere in the GUI e By selecting a value from the dropdown list of the combo box for that property Click the down arrow of the combo box to drop down the list of property value options e By using the Edit button at the right hand side of the Value column for that property Clicking the Edit button pops up a dialog relevant to that property For example the entry helper for the Format property in the screenshot below pops up the Input Formatting dialog while that for the xpath property pops up the Edit XPath Expression dialog _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 42 User Interface Design Entry Helpers BB le Properties For CTO Modifying or deleting a property value Authentic add children additional validation inherit editable yes mixed markup large markup Show add Name when pale yes XML Element is missing user Info Company name To modify a property value use any of the applicable methods described in the previous paragraph Setting Property Values To delete a property value select the property and click the Reset icon in the toolbar of the Properties entry helper Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH User Interface Design Entry Helpers 43 Styles The Styles window screenshot below enables CSS styles to be defined locally for SPS components selected in the Design View MEERE Styles For Value Ej
391. rmations in StyleVision are used i to generate output views in the interface and ii to generate and save output files HTML from within the interface and from the command line The XSLT engine used for transformations Altova XSLT 1 0 Engine or Altova XSLT 2 0 Engine corresponds to the XSLT version selected in the SPS XSLT functionality in GUI The functionality appropriate for each XSLT version relates mostly to the use of the correct XPath version XPath 1 0 for XSLT 1 0 and XPath 2 0 for XSLT 2 0 XPath expressions are widely used in StyleVision most commonly in features such as Auto Calculations and Conditional Templates and there are interface mechanisms that require and help you build XPath expressions The functionality of the correct XPath version is automatically made available in the interface according to the XSLT version you select _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 88 High Level Procedures General Usage Procedure Creating the Design In the SPS design you specify 1 What content from the XML document or DB should go to the output additionally content can be inserted directly in the SPS for inclusion in the output 2 How the output should be structured and 3 What presentation formattin roperties are applied to the various parts of the output Content for output The content for the output can come from 1 The XML document or DB to which the SPS is applied Content from the XML docu
392. rmats Formatting 196 overview of procedures 196 Print command 308 Print Preview command 308 Processors for download 374 Product features listing of 13 Properties and property groups 39 defining 39 entry helper window 39 for nodes in Authentic View 215 of SPS tables 290 see also Design Entry Helpers 27 Properties Entry Helper Event group 242 Properties menu 354 Bullets and Numbering 355 clear DB Filters 356 edit DB Filters 356 Q QName serialization when returned by XPath 2 0 functions 387 Queries for DB display in Authentic View 267 Query button inserting in SPS 120 Quick Start tutorial Auto Calculations 67 class attributes 61 combo boxes 70 conditions 70 contents placeholder 50 creating new SPS document 47 CSS styles 61 dynamic content 50 generating XSLT stylesheets 81 global templates 77 horizontal lines 56 images 56 introduction 46 lists 70 predefined formats 61 required files 46 rest of contents 77 setting up new SPS document 47 static content 56 static text 56 testing Authentic View 81 R Radio buttons 155 Recently used files 309 Records displayed in Authentic View setting 120 Redo command 311 Registering your Altova software 373 Replace command 312 Rest of Contents 101 147 command for inserting in design 325 in Quick Start tutorial 77 Return key see Enter key 279 Right to left writing systems 403 Root elements 30 Roo
393. rn aE E E O E OE O E 393 122 5 ODBC sinisen EE N RRA 394 1226 ADO srein o a e a E E a Ne SES 395 122 7 Sybase sonan a TE hens A EE A a 396 123 Techmical Data srresroa rein aE a E EN ERE EA R R E E 397 12 3 1 OS and Memory Requirements 0 ccccecccecceeseeeseeeneeeseeeeecseeesseceaeeeseenaeees 398 12 3 2 Altova XML Parse nenene E otsacians sha denducenctlateedeaviecese 399 12 3 3 Altova XSLT and XQuery Engines 0 0 ccccccccsceesseeseeeseeeneecseeceaeceaeeneenaeens 400 12 3 4 Unicode Support ccccesccesccssscesecsseceeecseecseeeeseeesseeeseeeseecaeecsaecaeenaeeeaeenaeees 401 Windows NT4 0 2000 XP ooccccccccccccccccsceccesecusecsesessusecseeeeeesecssecsecseeaesseseeesaeeas 402 Right to Left Writing Systems ccccccccesseececetsseeseeeecnseeseeecnseeaeeeseeteeneeenenaes 403 W2 3 5 Internet Usage roar iarri rnia nara EEE EEEE E EREE 404 12 4 License Information s 332cci c bssneecn shadbaned adeetost a A E N Man caanteebens 405 12 4 1 Electronic Software Distribution ccccecccecseesseeneeeseecseecseecseeceaeeneenaeens 406 124 2 License Metering sivessicccesscsvesccasiecnsadstebectssaevessseteeesteodaasatcadadecnacededdaleanteveectes 407 124 3 COpyrGht acccsieeceniidedsitisonaetiadcasins nasaedaud A R 408 12 4 4 Altova End User License Agreement ccccccecsseeseeseeseesecsaeenseeneenseens 409 Index 419 Altova StyleVision User Manual Chapter 1 StyleVision 2006 StyleVision 2006 1 StyleVisio
394. rocedures 84 General Usage Procedure ccccecccesscesseeeseeeseeeseeeseeesceesaecsaecaaeceaeeaecnseeeseeseeeeeneeeseennes 85 61l SPS aid SourceS vziys ceieciccsccsesdenchncddeedaewsds scdinddssicdonanscdovbessdeiedie segichacedadenien deeds 86 6 1 2 XSLT and XPath Versions c ccccccccessccssceeseeenceeseecseeceaeceaeeeseeeeeeseeeseeeseneeass 87 63 Creatine the Desin saraci arasin a r a E 88 6 1 4 SPS and Authentic View cccccccccescesseeeceeeneeeeeceeceeceseceseceseesaeeseeesereneneeaes 89 OAS Generated Files srce tics ceapesacbsecaceauesdacseaue cast eae areia aE ERE EEE ie 91 Creating the SPS Structure 0 cccccecccesscesseeseeeeeeeeeeecseeceecaeceaeceaeeeeeseeeseeeseeeeeseennes 92 6 2 1 S hema SOUrCES sii eicerssiro reiri a ERE E EEE S 93 DTDs and XML SCHEMAS cccccccecccssecccssesvte cece cscs eeseseessseseesseseeseesseseesseeeesaeens 95 DIB SCHEMAS snesena a a A Vids RAS E E ENER 96 User Defined SCHOMAS ccccccccccseesceescesetnseeeeesecaceeseesecuseeseeecnaeeaeeeeeneeneteneeaes 98 6 2 2 Output Structure 0 eee ecceceensecsecccssnecssnsecseneecesecessuecsensecseneeeesecsenseesensecsees 101 Working with Databases 0 ccccceessecsceessecssecsseceseceseceseceseceseeeeeeseneceseseaeeeseeeeecneeesaees 102 6 3 1 DBs and StyleVision ccceccesceseceseceesceeeeeeceeeceeeneeeseeeseecseecsaeeeeceseenseeeaeees 103 6 3 2 Connecting to a DB and Setting up the SPS oo ceecsseenteeeteeeteenteeneeens 105 6 3
395. rom a list of enumerations The structure of the design is specified and controlled in a single main template This structure can be modified by optional templates for individual elements known as global templates because they can be applied globally for that element A common feature of XML documents is the repeating data structure For example an office department typically has several employees The data for each employee would be stored in a data structure which is repeated for each employee In the SPS the processing for each such data structure is defined once and applied to each relevant node in turn the employee node in our example Repeating data structures can also be inserted as dynamic tables This provides looping in a structured table format with each loop through the data structure producing a row or if required a column of the table The conditional templates feature enables one of a set of templates to be processed according to what conditions in the XML document or system environment are fulfilled This enables processing that is conditional on information contained in the source document or that cannot be known to the SPS document creator at the time of creation for example the date of processing The available conditions are those that can be tested using XPath 1 0 or XPath 2 0 expressions Auto Calculations enable you to manipulate data from the source document s and to _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User
396. rrent date and time is taken from the system clock current dateT1 The timezone is taken from the implicit timezone provided by ae the evaluation context the implicit timezone is taken from the current time system clock The timezone is always specified in the result deep equal See note on whitespace in the General Information section e An error is raised only if no XML file is available at the specified location or if the file is not well formed The file is validated if a schema is available If the file is not valid the invalid file is loaded without schema information _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 388 Appendices XSLT Engine Information in scope prefi xes In a well formed but invalid document that contains two or more elements having the same ID value the first element in document order is returned Only default namespaces may be undeclared in the XML document However even when a default namespace is undeclared on an element node the prefix for the default namespace which is the zero length string is returned for that node e See note on whitespace in the General Information section e The ASCII character set only is supported normalize unic e Not supported ode e See note on whitespace in the General Information section contd Er pe resolve uri static base ur i If the second optional argument is omitted the URI to be resolved the first argument is reso
397. rsed entity is used to locate the resource image or hyperlink When the stylesheet is processed the URI associated with the entity name is substituted for the entity name Note that if the URI is a relative URI the XSLT processor expands it to an absolute URI applying the base URI of the DTD So if the unparsed entity is associated with the relative URI nanonull gif then this URI will be expanded to file c someFolder nanonull gif where the DTD is in the folder someFolder Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Additional Editing Procedures Using Scripts 239 9 7 Using Scripts In StyleVision you can define JavaScript functions for each SPS in a JavaScript editor available as a tab in the Design View The function definitions created in this way are stored in the header of the HTML document and can be called from within the body of the HTML document Such functions are useful when e You wish to achieve a complex result using multiple script statements In this case it is convenient to write all the required scripts as separate functions in one location the header and refer to the functions subsequently in the design document e You wish to use a particular script at multiple locations in the design document How to define functions in the JavaScript Editor is described in the sub section Defining JavaScript Functions In the GUI all JavaScript functions which are defined for a given SPS in the JavaScri
398. rue is executed and the condition is then exited To move branches up and down relative to each other select the branch to be moved then right click and select Condition Move Branch Up or Condition Move Branch Down Deleting a branch To delete a branch select the branch to be deleted then right click and select Condition Delete Branch Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Content Editing Procedures Condition Templates 193 Editing Conditions To edit the XPath expression of a condition branch do the following 1 Select the condition branch not the condition 2 Inthe Properties entry helper select condition branch in the Properties For column screenshot below Properties ia EB be Properties For condition branch template 3 Click the Edit button of the xPath property in the Authentic group of properties This pops up the Edit XPath Expression dialog in which you can edit the XPath expression for that branch of the condition _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 194 Content Editing Procedures Condition Templates Conditions and Auto Calculations When using Conditions and Auto Calculations together there are a few issues to bear in mind Here are a few guidelines that summarize these issues 1 Ifan Auto Calculation updates a node and if that node is involved in a Condition either by being in the XPath expression of a branch or in the content of a conditi
399. s Tutorials QuickStart css and click Open The stylesheet is added to the style repository It contains the following rules that are relevant at this stage header font family Arial sans serif font weight bold color red h3 font size 12pt The style rules for the header class and h3 element are combined and produce the following HTML output for the headline element NanoNull Inc Launches Version 2 0 of NanoPower 2006 04 01 Boston USA Nanonull Inc today launched version 2 0 of its market leading NanoPower line of hardware and software The highlights of the new version of NanoPower are improved chip design capabilities in NanoSoft the software used to design computer chips and higher precision sand filtering processes in NanoMeld the hardware in which the transformation from sand to silicon chips is executed Source NewTech Online Defining global style rules Global style rules can be defined for the entire SPS using CSS selectors The rules are defined directly in the Style Repository entry helper Create a global style rule for the header class as follows 1 With Design View active in the Style Repository entry helper select the Global item 2 Click the Add button in the toolbar This creates an empty rule for the wildcard selector which is highlighted 3 Typein header to replace the wildcard as the selector 4 Inthe color group of properties select green from the dropdown list of the
400. s considered to be a subset of all schemas lowercased URI and URL In this documentation the more general URI is used exclusively even when the identifier has only a locator aspect and even for identifiers that use the http scheme XSLT and XPath terms There have been changes in terminology from XSLT 1 0 and XPath 1 0 to XSLT 2 0 and XPath 2 0 For example what was the root node in XPath 1 0 is the document node in XPath 2 0 In this documentation we use XSLT 2 0 and XPath 2 0 terminology _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 16 Introduction Terminology absolute XPath A path expression that starts at the root node of the tree containing the context item context node current node document element document node context node In StyleVision when entering path expressions in dialogs the expression can be entered as an absolute path if you check the Absolute XPath check box in the dialog If this check box is unchecked the path is relative to the context node The context item is the item node or string value relative to which an expression is evaluated A context node is a context item that is a node The context item can change within an expression for example with each location step or within a filter expression predicate The current node is the node being currently processed The current node is the same as the context node in expressions that do not have sub expressions But w
401. s not intended for use in the operation of nuclear facilities aircraft navigation communication systems or air traffic control equipment where the failure of the Software could lead to death personal injury or severe physical or environmental damage INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS Acknowledgement of Altova s Rights You acknowledge that the Software and any copies that you are authorized by Altova to make are the intellectual property of and are owned by Altova and its suppliers The structure organization and code of the Software are the valuable trade secrets and confidential information of Altova and its suppliers The Software is protected by copyright including without limitation by United States Copyright Law international treaty provisions and applicable laws in the country in which it is being used You acknowledge that Altova retains the ownership of all patents copyrights trade secrets trademarks and other intellectual property rights pertaining to the Software and that Altova s ownership rights extend to any images photographs animations videos audio music text and applets incorporated into the Software and all accompanying printed materials You will take no actions which adversely affect Altova s intellectual property rights in the Software Trademarks shall be used in accordance with accepted trademark practice including identification of trademark owners names Trademarks may only be used to identify printed output produce
402. s of the following sub sections e What Is an SPS which explains the role of an SPS in an XML environment and with respect to StyleVision e Product Features which provides an overview of the key features of StyleVision e Terminology which lists terms used in the StyleVision user interface and in this documentation e Setting up StyleVision which describes how StyleVision is to be correctly set up Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Introduction What Is an SPS 11 3 1 What Is an SPS A StyleVision Power Stylesheet or SPS is an extended XSLT stylesheet which is used 1 to control the display and entry of data in the Authentic View of XML documents and databases DBs and 2 to specify the output design of an XML document transformation An SPS is saved with the file extension sps Design of the SPS An SPS is created graphically in StyleVision It is based on a schema DTD or XML Schema if the SPS is to be used with a DB it is based on an XML Schema generated automatically by StyleVision from the DB structure The design of the SPS is flexible It can contain dynamic and static content The dynamic content is the data in one XML document or DB The static content is content entered directly in the SPS Dynamic content can be included in the design either as straight text or within components such as input fields combo boxes and tables Additionally dynamic content can be manipulated using Auto
403. s of which are entered directly i the SPS The list structure is not dynamically derived from the structure of the XML document Dynamic lists which are lists that derive their structure and contents dynamically from the XML document These two list types are described in detail in the sub sections of this section Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Content Editing Procedures Creating Lists 157 Static Lists A static list is one in which list item contents are entered directly in the SPS To create a static list do the following 1 Place the cursor at the location in the design where you wish to create the static list 2 Click Insert Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog pops up screenshot below Bullets and Numbering x Plain Bullets Numbering 3 Select the desired list item marker and click OK An empty list item is created 4 Type in the text of the first list item 5 Press Enter to create a new list item To create a nested list place the cursor inside the list item that is to contain the nested list and click Insert Bullets and Numbering Then use the same procedure as given above from Step 3 onwards to create the nested list Changing static text to a list There are two ways to change static text to a list e Highlight the text to change click Insert Bullets and Numbering select the marker type and click OK If the text contains a CR LF carr
404. s the value of the presswatch selection byrelevance element the user selection 4 Click OK The condition is created around the contents of the newsitem element screenshot below Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Quick Start Tutorial Using Conditions 73 Prt n3 headline Atle Taye headline K h3 gt ED content Eq EED conten C country ARAGI country i fo synopsis Sey Pp div EA source AOMC source div Note that there is a single branch in this condition News items for which the condition test evaluates to true are displayed those for which the condition test does not evaluate to true are not displayed The condition in this case therefore works as a filter Later in this section you will add a second branch to this condition Inserting the relevance node as a list In order to display the relevance node of each newsitem element insert it in the design as follows 1 Create some vertical space below the div component for the source element and within the end tag of the conditional template 2 Type in the static text Relevance and create a predefined format of div around it highlight the static text and insert the predefined format 3 Drag the relevance element from the Root elements tree in the Schema Sources entry helper and drop it into the design below the static text Relevance 4 Create it as a list In the context menu that pops up when you drop the node in th
405. s well as any number of digits on both sides of the decimal point Entry lengths in Authentic View The display in Authentic View of the contents of a node is based on the Input Formatting definition for that node Therefore the Authentic View user will not be able to insert more characters than are allowed by the Input Formatting definition This is a useful way to restrict input in Authentic View Note however that if the length of a pre existing value in the XML document exceeds the length specified in the formatting definition then the entire value is displayed Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Additional Editing Procedures Input Formatting Formatting Numeric Datatypes 225 Prefix and suffix modifiers Prefix and suffix modifiers are used to modify the textual alignment and positive negative representations of fields The following table lists the available prefix and suffix modifiers lt Left aligned default for text For numbers which are aligned right by default this is significant if there are a fixed number of leading spaces gt p Right aligned default for numbers Minus symbol adjacent to number if negative nothing otherwise This is the default for numbers lt Minus symbol left aligned if negative nothing otherwise Number left aligned follows minus sign Minus symbol left aligned if negative nothing otherwise Number right aligned Minus symbol adjacent to number if negative spa
406. se uri in XPath 2 0 support in Altova Engines 387 collection in XPath 2 0 support in Altova Engines 387 count in XPath 2 0 and whitespace 385 current date in XPath 2 0 support in Altova Engines 387 current dateTime in XPath 2 0 support in Altova Engines 387 current time in XPath 2 0 support in Altova Engines 387 data in XPath 2 0 support in Altova Engines 387 deep equal in XPath 2 0 and whitespace 385 document XSLT 2 0 function 383 element available XSLT 2 0 function 383 format date XSLT 2 0 function 383 format dateTime XSLT 2 0 function 383 format time XSLT 2 0 function 383 function available XSLT 2 0 function 383 fn id in XPath 2 0 support in Altova Engines 387 idref in XPath 2 0 support in Altova Engines 387 index of in XPath 2 0 support in Altova Engines 387 in scope prefixes in XPath 2 0 support in Altova Engines 387 last in XPath 2 0 and whitespace 385 lower case in XPath 2 0 support in Altova Engines 387 normalize unicode in XPath 2 0 support in Altova Engines 387 position in XPath 2 0 and whitespace 385 resolve uri in XPath 2 0 support in Altova Engines 387 static base uri in XPath 2 0 support in Altova Engines 387 system property XSLT 2 0 function 383 unparsed text XSLT 2 0 function 383 _ 2006 Altova GmbH 424 Index fn upper case in XPath 2 0 support in Altova Engines
407. seesceeneeeseeeseceseeeeenaeens 144 TALI Resto Contents veccrorssriiceiiii en eRe EEE AEE 147 Using Data Entry Devices oeeie e E E E 148 T2A Vinput BieldS ceiscscssetcesacccevssciectesativestacssetsacsanceascsavivracnteteasstadetanseeviataa ESEE 150 Altova StyleVision User Manual 7 2 2 Combo BOXES escini taa ee EEE dese sovdecdassee debs vow edansnds dese vovdesvastec deus vovGesmnsveed 151 Pio Check BOXES iaicins io cecsseaececcecedvest vant cotaanedies snes aesenencss sash e ea E eE k 153 TZA BuUttOtS ossss ccstagesccote cd edceckes saeeends deevasenccovnadedcccudesu secon chascdunsebodiebs tencadepdebennsocere 155 Ta Creating WIStS cssciscisets settee High E A toe Nive Lagdematebioee mentee aceite 156 Tad Statie Lists enr nessen ia E E T E E R 157 T32 Dynamic Lists enore nei sikerre eae aE Eae ET dn EL EEE ANENE SEAN 158 TA Workine with Tables secan a E E E E ES E 159 KATI Creating Static Tables niisiis iii a E A E E E E EA 162 7 4 2 Creating Dynamic Tables 000 cecceecceescesseeseeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseecsaeeaeenseeeseseaeees 163 7 4 3 Formatting Static and Dynamic Tables 00 0 0 ceccceesseesceesteeseeeeeeeeneenaeens 166 TAA XML TADS acaaionss naclessoceen rrinin cask ues a E E ENESTAS 167 7 5 Using Graphics cecsciesosasesdcaiatencedaacaadeasetss ccaungead E A RS 171 Tal Mima Se URIS eeren e E E a encase 172 POD Text State LOOMS scsiscssecccsesengecoes ade chives ecevnas ia nE RTE EER REE 174 7
408. so be edited in the Style Repository window do this by clicking down arrow to the right of the item and selecting the required media from the dropdown list The rules defined in the external CSS stylesheet are displayed in the Style Repository window but cannot be edited The Stylesheet Rules and individual Selector items in the tree can be expanded and collapsed by clicking the and symbols to the left of each item see screenshot below To delete an external stylesheet select the stylesheet and click the Reset button in the Style Repository toolbar Note Style rules with certain selectors will not be applied to RTF and PDF output Such rules are commented will be discarded in PDF RTF Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Presentation Procedures Working with CSS Styles 201 Bo O Bil 1 lo B 3 External E gt Commonstyles css ae C Program FilesiAktovaStylevision2006Examples CommonStyles css media all E E gt Rules selector E 2 selector h1 Attribute Group value margin box 16pt Opt N color color blue l E gt MyExternalStyles css oel C Program Files AttovalStyleVision2006 Examples MyExternalStyles css media all E Rules selector body E O selector h1 Attribute color Global Changing the precedence of the external CSS stylesheets The external CSS stylesheets that are assigned in the Style Repository window will be imported into the HTML outpu
409. ssvossvsessuserssrsousessssusussussessussesessesvesssessesaresey it 6 Click OK to confirm _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 344 Reference Authentic Menu 7 Place the icon image file bmp file in the sps Picts folder of your application folder When you edit an XML document in Authentic View in Altova s XMLSpy Authentic Desktop and Authentic View products using this StyleVision Power Stylesheet the icon image appears in the toolbar as a Text State icon If the Authentic View user selects text and clicks the icon the element represented by that icon is created around the selected text and the formatting you defined in the global template for that element is applied to the selected text Note Text State icons are not available in Authentic Preview of StyleVision Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Reference Authentic Menu 345 CALS HTML Tables The CALS HTML Tables command pops up a dialog in which you specify e whether the Authentic View user may insert XML tables following either the CALS or the HTML table model in the XML document or not and e the XML elements that will constitute the XML table structure if XML tables are allowed When you click Authentic CALS HTML Tables the following dialog appears CALS HTML Table Properties a x J Enable XML tables in Document Editor Cancel Type HTML Description Default User Defined caption
410. structure of the XML document or iii a combination of the procedural and declarative approaches In Design View you can use a mix of main template and global templates to obtain the desired structure for the output document Presentation or formatting of the output In Design View presentation properties are applied to design components using CSS styles Styles can be defined locally on the component for HTML selectors declared at the document level and for HTML selectors declared in an external CSS stylesheet Additionally certain HTML elements can be applied to components using predefined formats Specifying presentation properties is described in detail in the section Presentation Procedures Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH High Level Procedures General Usage Procedure 89 SPS and Authentic View One of the core uses of the SPS you create with StyleVision is to control the input of data and the display of an XML document in Authentic View which is a document view available in Altova products With Authentic View users who are unfamiliar with XML can easily enter and edit XML document content correctly A document creation and editing process that involves Authentic View consists of two separate stages e Document design The Authentic View of the XML document which is graphical view is designed in StyleVision The design document is an SPS The SPS not only processes the XML document for display in Auth
411. style has been defined for that component type then this instance must either be styled separately or the style definition for the component type must be redone with the newly inserted instance included in the selection Selecting a single component for styling To define styling for a single component click the required component to select it In the case of static text placing the cursor anywhere within the text string suffices to select it _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 210 Presentation Procedures Working with CSS Styles How Styles Are Applied to Components The CSS styles that are applied via the Styles Entry Helper are applied to certain components on the block level and to other components on the inline level Knowing at which level styles are applied to a component block or inline will help you to define styles efficiently For example defining vertical margins the margin top and margin bottom properties for inline styles will have no effect on the output The table below shows how styles are applied to each SPS component type Component type Style application XML node content created as Inline contents Links Inline application to content of link Link itself has no styling Predefined formats Applied to the predefined format element which are all block elements XML nodes created as data entry Block device Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Presentation Procedur
412. style listing The font size of the n1 style will however apply to the lt h1 gt element because there is no selector with a higher precedence that matches the lt hi gt element and has a font size property Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Presentation Procedures Working with CSS Styles 205 To change the precedence of a global style select that style and use the Move Up and Move Down buttons in the Style Repository toolbar to reposition that global style relative to the other global styles in the tree For example if the main global style were moved to a position before the n1 style then the color property of the n1 style would have precedence over that of the main Style _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 206 Presentation Procedures Working with CSS Styles Defining CSS Styles Locally When styles are defined locally the style rules are defined directly on the component These local rules have precedence over both global style rules and style rules in external CSS stylesheets that select that component Locally defined styles are CSS styles and are defined in the Styles entry helper This is as opposed to global styles which are defined in the Style Repository entry helper Defining a style locally consists of two parts 1 The component or components to be styled are selected in the design Design View You can select multiple by keeping the Shift key depressed while select
413. subtype is differentiated and listed separately The conditional template and condition components are not listed because they are filters Not being present in the output they do not need to be styled Selecting the component type for styling When a component in the SPS design is selected it is listed by its type in the Styles For column of the Styles Entry Helper If multiple components are selected all instances of a single component type within that selection are listed together and can be styled in one go In the Styles For column you can select any one of the listed component types and define styling for all instances of this component type For example in the screenshot below the 51 text components have been selected You can now define styling in the Styles Entry Helper for all the selected 51 instances of static text strings This selection method is useful if a single style definition is required for all instances of a component type within a component Styles For 51 texts 10 autocales 32 contents 1 line 4 comboboxes 5 editfields 1 image 5 links 3 paragraphs 5 tables 5 bodies 15 rows 21 columns 1 footer 1 header 42 cells After selecting the required component type you can define the required style Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Presentation Procedures Working with CSS Styles 209 Note If a component type instance is inserted into the design after a
414. t Formatting definitions not all can also additionally be applied to HTML output To do this check the Apply Same Format to XSLT Output check box If this option is not checked or if it is not available then only Authentic View will display the Input Formatting while the output will display the value in the standard format for the datatype of the component _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 222 Additional Editing Procedures Input Formatting Formatting Numeric Datatypes Input Formatting Syntax The syntax for Input Formatting is prefix character s field suffix character s field optionl1 field option2 where prefix character s and suffix character s are optional specifiers used to control alignment and the display of positive negative symbols field can be any datatype specific formatting or text and field option s is an optional qualifier that enables additional formatting options Explanation of definition syntax The Input Formatting definition is constructed as follows e The definition is composed of one or more fields For example the definition DD Month yyyy has three fields e Fields can be run together or they can be separated by the following characters space hyphen comma colon period or by a text string in single or double quotes For e xample in the definition DD Month in the year yyyy the fields pp and Month are separated by a hyphen and the fields Month and yyyy a
415. t elements aka document elements and schema sources 93 selecting for schema 93 Row append to SPS table 336 delete from table in SPS 337 insert in SPS table 336 RTF output Enterprise edition 91 _ 2006 Altova GmbH 428 Index S Save Working XML File 304 Save Authentic XML Data command 304 Save Design command 303 Save Generated Files command 305 Schema editing for SPS 306 editing in mid session 306 Schema sources 86 301 and root elements document elements 93 entry helper window 30 multiple in SPS Enterprise edition 93 overview of 33 selecting for SPS 93 Schema Sources window see also Design Entry Helpers 27 Schema structure and SPS design 144 schema awareness of XPath 2 0 and XQuery Engines 385 Schemas as SPS source 95 from DB for SPS 96 user defined 98 Scripts and JavaScript functions 239 defining JavaScript functions 241 in the Design Tree 239 JavaScript functions as event handlers 242 overview of 33 using in an SPS 239 Scroll buttons in Main Window 21 Select All command 311 Setting up new SPS document in Quick Start tutorial 47 Setting up StyleVision 18 Shortcuts customizing for keyboard 364 Show large markup 247 249 Show mixed markup 247 249 Show small arkup 247 249 Software product license 409 Source files for SPS 86 Spell checker in StyleVision 360 Spell checker options for SPSs 361 Split table cell horizontally 339 vertically
416. t file using the import instruction In the HTML file this would look something like this lt html gt lt head gt lt style gt 5 import url ExternalCSS 1 css import url ExternalCSS 2 css screen import url ExternalCSS 3 css print gt lt style gt lt head gt lt body gt lt html gt The order in which the files are listed in the HTML file corresponds to the order in which they are listed in the External tree of the Style Repository To change the order of the CSS stylesheets in the External tree select the stylesheet for which the precedence has to be changed Then use the Move Up and Move Down hed buttons in the Style Repository toolbar to reposition that stylesheet relative to the other stylesheets in the tree Important What is important to note is that the lowermost stylesheet has the highest import precedence and that the import precedence decreases with each previous stylesheet in the listing order The order of import precedence in the listing shown above is i ExternalCSs 3 _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 202 Presentation Procedures Working with CSS Styles cess ii ExternalCSS 2 css iii ExternalcSS 1 css When two CSS rules each ina different stylesheet address the same node the rule in the stylesheet with the higher import precedence applies Editing the properties of external CSS stylesheets An external CSS stylesheet can be quickly replace
417. tF nodes union of nod string name of 4 cor strina name of tha Absolute XPath gt In the Edit XPath Expression dialog you can i enter an expression in the Expression text box via the keyboard or ii you can insert nodes operators and functions by double clicking them from their respective lists If the syntax of the XPath expression is correct the expression is displayed in black if incorrect it is displayed in red The lists for operators and functions automatically displays XPath 1 0 operators and functions or XPath 2 0 operators and functions according to the XSLT version selected for the SPS XPath 1 0 for XSLT 1 0 and XPath 2 0 for XSLT 2 0 _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 298 Reference Design View The Edit XPath Expression dialog helps you to build XPath expressions in the following ways Context node The node within which the Condition or Auto Calculation will be inserted is shown in the Selection text box in the Select Schema Attribute or Element pane The XPath expression is created relative to or within the context of this node The Condition or Auto Calculation is inserted at a location within this context and the XPath expression will be evaluated with this node as its context Inserting a node from the schema in the expression In the Select Schema Attribute or Element pane the entire schema is displayed You can insert a node from the schema into the XPath expression
418. table and edit the record as required If the number of displayed records is limited you may need to navigate to the required record using the navigation icons described above When you modify a record entries in all fields of the record are underlined and the AltovaRowStatus Of all primary instances of this record is set to u for Updated All secondary instances of this record have their AltovaRowStatus set to u lowercase Primary and secondary instances of a record are defined by the structure of the DB and correspondingly of the XML Schema generated from it For example if an Address table is included in a Customer table then the Address table can occur in the Design Document in two types of instantiations as the Address table itself and within instantiations of the Customer table Whichever of these two types is modified is the type that has been primarily modified Other types there may be more than one other type are secondary types Datatype errors are flagged by being displayed in red The modifications are saved to the DB by clicking File Save Authentic XML Data After a modified record is saved to the DB its AltovaRowStatus field is initialized indicated with and the record is displayed in Authentic View as a regular record Please note e f even a single field of a record is modified in Authentic View the entire record is updated when the data is saved to the DB e The date value 0001 01 01 is defined as a
419. ted or ii the name of an unparsed entity which has the required URI as its value For example in the file lt sEXAMPLES gt LinksEtc Vacations sps the website URIs of the hotel groups are taken as text strings from the Group Info Website nodes in the XML source document lt 3EXAMPLES gt LinksEtc Vacations xml e By building a URI that has both static and dynamic parts in the Static and Dynamic tab of the Insert Hyperlink dialog This can be useful for adding static prefixes e g a protocol or suffixes e g a domain name For example in the file lt sExAMPLES3 gt LinksEtc Vacations sps the email addresses have been created using a static part of mailto and a dynamic part that takes the string content of the contact email node screenshot below Edit Hyperlink x Selection Vacations HotelGroups Group Info Contact email Above field shows the current Document selection Static Dynamic Static and Dynamic Static Dynamic Static Address mailto 3 Compose Address by combining two Static Sehema and one Dynamic expression I Treat dynamic part as unparsed entity for XSLT transformation Remove Link Cancel How to use unparsed entities is described in the section Unparsed Entity URIs _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 182 Content Editing Procedures Bookmarks and Hyperlinks Editing hyperlink properties To edit a h
420. ted by Formatting design document components When records are added modified or deleted StyleVision formats the added modified deleted records in a certain way to enable users to distinguish them from other records Datatype errors are also flagged by being displayed in red If you wish to maintain this differentiation make sure that the formatting you assign to rows in a table do not have the same properties as those assigned by StyleVision The formatting assigned by StyleVision is as follows Added lA Bold underlined Modified Updated v u Underlined Deleted AEN Strikethrough Datatype error E Red text Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH High Level Procedures Working with Databases 123 Generating Output Files After you have created a DB based SPS you can generate files related to it and save them The following files can be generated and saved e The XML Schema based on the DB structure e The XML file having the structure of the generated XML Schema and content from the DB e The XSLT file for HTML output e The HTML output file The files can be generated and saved from within the GUI or from the command line From within the StyleVision GUI 1 Inthe File menu select the Save Generated Files item This pops up the following submenu Save Generated XSLT HTML File Save Generated HTML File Save Generated DB Schema Save Generated DB XML Data re Generated Use
421. term check the Regular expression check box You can create a regular expression with the help of a menu that pops out when you Click the right pointing arrowhead near the search term entry field Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Reference Edit Menu 313 CM x Find what kn Name v Any Character Character in Range Character Not in Range Beginning of Word Options F Match whole word only JV Match case End of Word V Regular expression Beginning of Line End of Line exsl for each select n1 OrgChart gt Tagged Expression 0 or More Matches 1 or More Matches i xstattripute name id gt lt xsltext disable output e i lt forinline gt e To set restrictions on what part of the document to search click the Advanced button This makes more search options available screenshot below T_T 6h Fh Find what in Names JD Find Next Options Find Previous F Match whole word only Cancel JV Match case J Regular expression Advanced lt lt Types JV Element Names T Comments I Element Contents J CData Set all IV Attribute Names T Processing Instruction ne V Attribute Contents J Rest Select the types of document content you wish to search by checking the appropriate check box Find Next command The Find Next F3 command repeats the last Find command to search for the next occurrence of the requested text See Find for a description of how to us
422. tes a new SPS document based on a XML schema Clicking the dropdown arrow enables you Schema to create the SPS from a DB or an HTML DTD document or an empty SPS pen Ctri O Opens an existing SPS document gn Ctri S Saves the active SPS document Save All Ctri Shift S Saves all open SPS documents Ctri P Alt Backspace Prints the Authentic View of the Working XML file Displays a print preview of the Authentic View of the Working XML File Undoes an editing change An unlimited number of Undo actions can be performed at a time Redoes an undo Finds text in Authentic View and Output Views Finds the next occurrence of the searched text Inserts a static or dynamic hyperlink in the SPS Inserts a static or dynamic image in the SPS Auto add Date Picker Adds a date picker control for each node that is of XML Schema datatype xsd date Or xsd dateTime Adds a DB control for every DB table element created in the SPS Sets XSLT 1 0 as the stylesheet language Sets XSLT 2 0 as the stylesheet language Runs a spelling check on the SPS document Displays a dialog that enables editing of DB Filters for filtering data imported from a DB Edit DB Filter Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Reference Toolbars 289 Clear DB Clears the DB Filter for the selected element Filter Stylesheet can edit stylesheet parameters Parameters E Edit l Displays the Edit Parameters
423. th is servername sharename path file mdb where servername is the name of the server sharename is the name of the share path is the path to the DB and file mdb is the name of an MS Access DB in the shared folder or a descendant folder of the shared folder Note Network shares and UNC paths are to be used for DBs such as MS Access which do not require any driver and are located on a server on a network Known issues with DB editing You should be aware of the following issues e If IBM DB2 table or field names contain blanks or non ASCII characters DB2 s ADO driver is known to cause an Invalid Cursor Name error to be displayed e The date value 0001 01 01 is defined as a NULL value for some DBs and could result in an error message _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 112 High Level Procedures Working with Databases The DB Schema and DB XML files The DB XML Schema When you load a database DB into StyleVision an XML Schema with a structure based on that of the DB is created and displayed in the Schema Window The XML Schema is created with a document element called DB The DB element contains child elements which correspond to the top level tables in the DB These top level table elements are also created as entries in the Global Templates list in the Schema Window The top level elements in the screenshot below are Addresses Articles and Customers they correspond to tables in the DB TER ERCI E g
424. the U S Department of Commerce s Table of Denial Orders By using the Software you represent and warrant that you are not located in under control of or a national or resident of any such country or on any such list GENERAL PROVISIONS If you are located in the European Union and are using the Software in the European Union and not in the United States then this Software License Agreement will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the Republic of Austria excluding its conflict of laws principles and the U N Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods and you expressly agree that exclusive jurisdiction for any claim or dispute with Altova or relating in any way to your use of the Software resides in the Handelsgericht Wien Commercial Court Vienna and you further agree and expressly consent to the exercise of personal jurisdiction in the Handelsgericht Wien Commercial Court Vienna in connection with any such dispute or claim If you are located in the United States or are using the Software in the United States then this Software License Agreement will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts USA excluding its conflict of laws principles and the U N Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods and you expressly agree that exclusive jurisdiction for any claim or dispute with Altova or relating in any way to your use of the Software
425. the XML file you assign to the SPS a Template XML File Assigning and changing a Template XML File To assign a Template XML File click Authentic Assign Template XML File select the required file and save the SPS To change the Template XML File click Authentic Assign Template XML File select the new Template XML File and save the SPS Note e The Template XML file must conform to the same schema as that of the SPS to which it is linked e The Template XML File can also be assigned and changed using the Template XML File entry of a schema in the Schema Sources entry helper Opening a template XML document in Authentic View An Authentic View user can open a template XML document as follows 1 In XMLSpy or Authentic Desktop select File New or Authentic New Document This pops up the Create New Document dialog The tabs in this dialog each represent a folder in the sps Template folder within the XMLSpy or Authentic Desktop application folder In each tab the SPS files for the corresponding folder are displayed These SPS files provide general use templates for popular schemas x NCAXML News P3P Patents Publishing rixml tei teilite xmlresume ma daisy dita Examples gcapaper hr xml dtb 00 k sps Browse 2 Select an Altova supplied SPS template from one of the tabs or browse for the required SPS using the Browse button 3 Click OK A template based on the SPS and carrying starting dat
426. the cursor is This command applies to both static and dynamic tables Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Reference Table Menu 337 Delete Row Column The Delete Row command ee deletes the row in which the cursor is This command applies to both static and dynamic tables The Delete Column command ee deletes the column in which the cursor is This command applies to both static and dynamic tables _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 338 Reference Table Menu Join Cell Left Right Below Above a The Join Cell Left command joins the cell in which the cursor is to the adjacent cell on the left The contents of both cells are concatenated in the new cell All property values of the cell to the left are passed to the new cell This command applies to both static and dynamic tables E The Join Cell Right command joins the cell in which the cursor is to the cell on the right The contents of both cells are concatenated in the new cell All property values of the cell to the left are passed to the new cell This command applies to both static and dynamic tables FA The Join Cell Below command joins the cell in which the cursor is to the cell below The contents of both cells are concatenated in the new cell All property values of the cell on the top are passed to the new cell This command applies to both static and dynamic tables join The Join Cell Above command joins the c
427. the end tag of that table element s child Row element To insert a DB Query button in your Design document do the following 1 Place the cursor at the allowed location see above where you wish the Query button to appear in the screenshot below the cursor is placed between the end Row tag and the end Customer tag 2 Right click and from the popup menu select Insert DB Control Query Button The Query Button is inserted at that point in the Design document When it is clicked in Authentic View the Query button will pop up the Edit Database Query dialog This dialog is described in the Authentic View documentation Controlling number of records displayed You can control the number of records displayed in Authentic View using the Maximum Number of Records setting on the top level table template Do this as follows 1 In Design View select the Row element 2 Inthe Properties entry helper select template in the Properties For column and the Element group of properties E C atinie z template Authentic add children mandatory additional validation editable yes Max records 10 mixed markup hide markup Show add Name when XML Element is missing e user Info 3 For the property Max Records enter the maximum number of records to be displayed _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 122 High Level Procedures Working with Databases Note e The number of
428. the registration dialog exactly as give in your license e mail Also enter your personal name in the name field Note that the StyleVision License Agreement does not allow you to install more than the licensed number of copies of StyleVision on the computers in your organization per seat license Order Form The Order Form command is a link to the Altova Online Shop Use this command when you wish to place an order for a licensed version of any Altova software _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 374 Reference Help Menu Other Commands The Support Center command is a link to the Altova Support Center on the Internet The Support Center provides FAQs discussion forums where problems are discussed and access to Altova s technical support staff The FAQ on the Web command is a link to Altova s FAQ database on the Internet The FAQ database is constantly updated as Altova support staff encounter new issues raised by customers The Components Download command is a link to Altova s Component Download Center on the Internet From here you will be able to download a variety of companion software to use with Altova products Such software ranges from XSLT and XSL FO processors to Application Server Platforms The software available at the Component Download Center is typically free of charge The StyleVision on the Internet command is a link to the Altova website on the Internet You can learn more about StyleVision and relat
429. thead tfoot tbody Column element Header element Cell with nested table Enabling XML Tables in Authentic View To enable XML tables in Authentic View check the box marked Enable XML tables in Document Editor Enabling XML tables allows the Authentic View user to insert tables that can be structured and formatted as required by the user This is as opposed to static and dynamic SPS tables which are structured and formatted by you the designer of the StyleVision Power Stylesheet When an XML table is inserted in Authentic View a set of XML elements conforming to either the CALS or HTML table model is inserted in the XML document Cell content in Authentic View is entered as content of the corresponding element in the XML document When the table is formatted in Authentic View the appropriate attributes and their values are added to the relevant elements in the XML document Defining schema elements for the selected table model In the combo box select the table model CALS or HTML with which you want your schema table structure to correspond This combo box is enabled only if the Enable XML tables check box has been checked Note the following points e The table elements in the schema must correspond exactly with the structure of the selected table model either CALS or HTML to ensure the correct functioning of this feature however they do not need to have the same names as those of the table model elements e ifa table element in
430. tic View can be edited in the Page Setup dialog which you access via the Print Preview window Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Reference File Menu 309 Most Recently Used Files Exit The list of most recently used files shows the file name and path information for the nine most recently used files Clicking one of these entries causes that file to be opened in a new tab in the Main Window Print Preview amp Print 1 OrgChart sps 2 1 sps 3 CBTMenu_Schema_5 sps 4 CBTMenu_Schema_4 sps 5 HTML Orachart sps 6 OrgChart sps 7 ExpReport sps 8 CBTMenu_Schema_4_soll sps 9 C workarealjayant test sps Exit To access these files using the keyboard press ALT F to open the File menu and then the number of the file you wish to open for example pressing 1 will open the first file in the list 2 the second file and so on The Exit command is used to quit StyleVision If you have an open file with unsaved changes you will be prompted to save these changes _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 310 Reference Edit Menu 11 4 Edit Menu The Edit menu contains commands that aid the editing of SPS and Authentic View documents Besides the standard editing commands such as Cut Ctrl Del Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl V and Delete Del which are not described in this section the following commands are available e Undo Redo Select All to undo or restore
431. ties in the Properties entry helper screenshot below specify the required Authentic node settings efa ES bs 32 template Authentic add children mandatory additional validation editable yes mixed markup large markup Show add Name when XML Element is missing user Info Enter your order number yes Defining Authentic Properties The following node settings can be made to control the behavior of individual nodes in the Authentic View display Add children This setting is available when the selected node is an element It allows you to define what child elements of the selected element are inserted when the selected element is added The options are all child elements mandatory child elements and no child element Content is editable Defines whether the node is editable or not By default the node is editable This setting is available when the selected node is an element attribute or contents Auto Calculation results cannot be edited because the value is computed with the XPath expression you enter for the Auto Calculation this option is therefore not available for Auto Calculations Mixed markup This setting is available when the selected node is an element or attribute and enables you to specify how individual nodes will be marked up in the mixed markup mode of Authentic View The following options exist large markup tags with node names small markup tags without node names and no markup
432. tions to connect to the Internet the application will not generate any network traffic at all Multi license If more than one instance of the application is used within the same LAN these instances will briefly communicate with each other on startup These instances exchange key codes in order to ensure that the number of concurrent licenses purchased is not accidentally violated This is the same kind of license metering technology that is common in the Unix world and with a number of database development tools It allows Altova customers to purchase reasonably priced concurrent use multi user licenses Please note that your Altova product at no time attempts to send any information out of your LAN or over the Internet We have also designed the applications so that they send few and small network packets so as to not put a burden on your network The TCP IP ports 2799 used by your Altova product are officially registered with the IANA see http www isi edu in notes iana assignments port numbers for details and our license metering module is tested and proven technology If you are using a firewall you may notice communications on port 2799 between the computers that are running Altova products You are of course free to block such traffic between different groups in your organization as long as you can ensure by other means that your license agreement is not violated You will also notice that if you are online your Altova produ
433. title of the HTML page and hyperlink properties These settings are made in the Properties entry helper when Layout is selected in the Design Tree entry helper Toolbar icons The following toolbar icons are shortcuts for common Schema Sources entry helper commands Synchronize tree toggle When toggled on icon has border selecting a node in the tree selects i the corresponding node in the design and ii the corresponding node in the Schema Sources tree if the Synchronize Tree icon in the Schema Sources tree is toggled on When toggled off the corresponding nodes in the design and Schema Sources tree are not selected Remove the selected item icon is active when item in the Global Templates or Layout sub trees is selected _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 36 User Interface Design Entry Helpers Style Repository In the Style Repository window screenshot below you can assign external CSS stylesheets and define global CSS styles for the SPS Style rules in external CSS stylesheets and globally defined CSS styles are applied to Authentic View and the HTML output document BBO ohella B 3 External E gt Commonstyles css ae C Program Files Attovalstyle vision2006 Examples iCommonstyles css media all fi Gc Rules selector selector h1 B Global selector a E 2 selector div intro ill be discarded in PDF RTF box border color border bottom common border bottom color
434. to Calculation to calculate the gross price is NetPrice VATAmount then the Auto Calculation will execute with the value of VATAmount that was read in before VATAmount was updated e f however the Auto Calculation to calculate the gross price is NetPrice NetPrice VATRate div 100 then the Auto Calculation will execute with the value of VATRate and will update the GrossPrice node The updated vatAamount node has been left out of the second Auto Calculation Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Content Editing Procedures Condition Templates 189 7 8 Condition Templates You can insert conditions anywhere in the design in both the main template and global templates A condition is an SPS component that is made up of one or more branches with each branch being defined by an XPath expression For example consider a condition composed of two branches The XPath expression of the first branch tests whether the value of the Location attribute of the context node is us The XPath expression of the second branch tests whether the value of the Location attribute is zu Each branch contains a template a conditional template When a node is processed with a condition the first branch with a test that evaluates to true is executed that is its conditional template is processed and the condition is exited no further branches of that condition are evaluated In this way you can use different templates depending on the
435. to Calculations Creating Auto Calculations To create an Auto Calculation do the following 1 Place the cursor as an insertion point at the location where the Auto Calculation result is to be displayed and click Insert Auto Calculation In the submenu that appears select Value if the result is to appear as plain text select Input Field if it is to appear within an input field i e a text box or select Multiline Input Field if it is to appear in a multiline text box The Edit XPath Expression dialog pops up screenshot below W Edit XPath expression l x Expression penne M Select Schema Attribute or ElemerSelect Operator Select Function Selection n1 OrgChart nt 0 D Description Function Retums Description equal boolean any boolean argument con a Schema sources re not equal ceiling number number smallest integ less concat string string concatenatior HG XML C Prograt greater concat string string concatenatior E Z Root elements less of equal contains strin boolean tests whether greater or eq count nodes number number of noc E OrgChart add false boolean Boolean false CompanyLoc subtract floor number number largest integer Name F multiply idfany nodes selects eleme divide lang string boolean Whether lang modulo last number context size Name logical AND local namef string local part of tr MAR Rann of logical OR local name no string local part of tr 4
436. to a tab at the edge of the GUI In the screenshot below all five Design Entry Helpers have been auto hidden two at the left edge of the GUI two at the bottom edge and one at the right edge _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 28 User Interface Design Entry Helpers Main template f salpedoig k Design v Authentic Preview HTML 4 i m 0O g a 3 ei o k D o 5 a a o 7 2 12 o ai f Style Repository Styles Placing the cursor over the tab causes that window to roll out into the GUI and over the Main Window In the screenshot below placing the cursor over the Styles tab causes the Styles Design entry helper to roll out into the Main Window Main template salpadol d s id Styles MESIE E Attribute E 1 content border color border bottom 4 324 ubiseg saunos ewayos common border bottom color details border bottom style effects border bottom wicth A Style Repository b A Styles A Done A CAP NUM SCRL A Moving the cursor out of the rolled out window and from over its tab causes the window to roll back into the tab at the edge of the GUI The Auto Hide feature is useful if you wish to move seldom used entry helpers out of the GUI while at the same time allowing you easy access to them should you need them This enables you to create more screen space for the Main Window while still allowing easy access to Desig
437. to that element as described in the next item in this list appear in the lower part of the Elements Entry Helper e The lower part containing a list of the elements that can be appended after inserted _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 252 Authentic View Interface before inserted within applied to i e replace the selected element or text range in Authentic View What you can do with an element listed in the Entry Helper is indicated by the icon to the left of the element name in the Entry Helper The icons that occur in the Elements Entry Helper are listed below together with an explanation of what they mean To use an element from the Entry Helper click its icon Append After Element The element in the Entry Helper is appended after the selected element Note that it is appended at the correct hierarchical level For example if your cursor is inside a sect1 para element and you append a sect1 element then the new sect1 element will be appended not as a following sibling of sect1 para but as a following sibling of the sect1 element that is the parent of that para element Insert Before Element The element in the Entry Helper is inserted before the selected element Note that just as with the Append After Element command the element is inserted at the correct hierarchical level Remove Element Removes the element and its content Insert Element An element from the Entry Helper can also be ins
438. tova under this Software License Agreement Altova s obligations under this Section 6 are contingent upon your proper use of the Software and your compliance with the terms and conditions of this Software License Agreement at all times Altova shall be under no obligation to provide the above technical support if in Altova s opinion the Software has failed due to the following conditions i damage caused by the relocation of the software to another location or CPU ii alterations modifications or attempts to change the Software without Altova s written approval iii causes external to the Software such as natural disasters the failure or fluctuation of electrical power or computer equipment failure iv your failure to maintain the Software at Altova s specified release level or v use of the Software with other software without Altova s prior written approval It will be your sole responsibility to 1 comply with all Altova specified operating and troubleshooting procedures and then notify Altova immediately of Software malfunction and provide Altova with complete information thereof ii provide for the security of your confidential information iii establish and maintain backup systems and procedures necessary to reconstruct lost or altered files data or programs SOFTWARE ACTIVATION UPDATES AND LICENSE METERING a License Metering Altova has a built in license metering module that helps you to avoid any unintentional violation of
439. transformations by passing the XSLT stylesheet a new global value via the command line Use of parameters User declared parameters are useful in the following situations e If you wish to use one value in multiple locations or as an input for several calculations In this case you can save the required value as a parameter value and use the parameter in the required locations and calculations e If you wish to pass a value to the stylesheet at processing time In the SPS and stylesheet you use a parameter with a default value At processing time you pass the desired value to the parameter via the command line Usage mechanism Working with user declared parameters in the SPS consists of two steps 1 Declaring the required parameters 2 Referencing the declared parameters Declaring parameters All user defined parameters are declared and edited in the Edit Parameters dialog screenshot below The Edit Parameters dialog is accessed via i the Edit Edit Stylesheet Parameters command ii the Edit button of the Parameters entry in the Design Tree entry helper and iii the Parameters button in the Edit Database Filters dialog Edit Edit DB Filter Edit Parameters i In this dialog enter parameter names without leading Default Value CA NY Cancel Declaring a parameter involves giving ita name and a string value its default value If no value is specified the default value is an empty string The de
440. try schemas Altova s Authentic View package includes SPSs for a number of standard industry schemas Users can therefore immediately create an XML document based on a standard schema in _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 90 High Level Procedures General Usage Procedure Authentic View The screenshot below shows a partial Authentic View of the NCA Invoice standard NCA XML Invoice This is a template for the NCA Invoice used to define a detailed list of goods shipped or services rendered with Invoice T P Final Debit Ni an account of costs Information created could consist woice Type Proforma Final Debit Note of parties assoicated with the transaction type of goods Credit Note shipped or method of shipment Status Draft Final Ammended Required Optional General Information References and other general information pertaining to the contract and this document Date of Issue fryyy mm dd Document Creator Identifer Contract Id add contractExtension add documentVersion add contractT yy add documentlD Docuement Number TransactionNumber add buyerContractldentifier add sellerContractldentifier add brokerContrac Number You can easily customize any of the supplied standard industry SPSs which are available in the Examples IndustryStandards folder of your application folder Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH High Level Procedures General Usage Pro
441. ts i the corresponding node in the design and ii the corresponding node in the Design Tree if the Synchronize Tree icon in the Design Tree window is toggled on Whe toggled off the corresponding node in the design is not selected Switch the toggle off if dragging a node from the tree and dropping it to the desired location in the design proves difficult Remove the selected item Browse for the Working XML File for that schema Browse for the Template XML File for that schema Context menu The context menu contains the following commands Add schema Set as main schema Add element add attribute convert to element attruibute Make Remove Global Template Expand and collapse commands These enable the tree to be expanded and collapsed Options include the entire Schema Sources tree up to the selected level and to expand from or collapse to the selected item Symbols used in schema trees Given below is a list of the symbols in schema trees Element Attribute Element with child elements Double clicking the element or the symbol to its left causes the element to expand collapse ep Addresses DB Filter applied Applies only to top level data table elements in the schema tree Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH User Interface Design Entry Helpers 33 Design Tree The Design Tree window screenshot below provides an overview of the SPS design Ey NanonullOrg sps R Namespaces
442. ty main template e Anew SPS based on an XML Schema generated from a DB you select New from DB The connection process is described in the section Connecting to a DB and Setting up the SPS The SPS is created in Design View with an empty main template e Anew SPS based on a user defined schema you create node by node from an HTML file New from HTML File The user defined schema in the Schema Sources tree will have a single document element root element and the HTML file is loaded in Design View e Anewempty SPS New empty No schema is added to the Schema Sources tree and an empty main template will be created in Design View The new SPS document is given a provisional name of spsx sps where x is an integer corresponding to the position of that SPS document in the sequence of new documents created since the application was started A schema in the Schema Sources entry helper has three immediate sub items which you select after the schema has been added to the schema sources tree These are e The Working XML File selection for Authentic View and output previews e The Template XML File selection for a starting template the Authentic View user works with when the SPS is opened e Root elements document elements to select what global elements can be used as document elements in the SPS How to make these selections is described in the section Schema Sources entry helper Note If your schema is not well formed or is invalid y
443. u can now edit the expressions in any of the listed criteria add new criteria re order criteria or delete criteria in the DB Query 2 Click OK The data from the DB is automatically re loaded into StyleVision so as to reflect the modifications to the DB Query Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Authentic View Editing in Authentic View 271 Modifying a DB Table Adding a record To add a record to a DB table 1 Place the cursor in the DB table row and click the 5 icon to append a row or the icon to insert a row This creates a new record in the temporary XML file 2 Click the File Save Authentic XML Data command to add the new record in the DB In Authentic View a row for the new record is appended to the DB table display The AltovaRowStatus for this record is set to A for Added When you enter data for the new record it is entered in bold and is underlined This enables you to differentiate added records from existing records if existing records have not been formatted with these text formatting properties Datatype errors are flagged by being displayed in red The new record is added to the DB when you click File Save Authentic XML Data After a new record is saved to the DB its AltovaRowStatus field is initialized indicated with and the record is displayed in Authentic View as a regular record Modifying a record To modify a record place the cursor at the required point in the DB
444. ual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Authentic View Editing in Authentic View 267 DB Queries A DB query enables you to query the records of a table displayed in Authentic View A query is made for an individual table and only one query can be made for each table You can make a query at any time while editing If you have unsaved changes in your Authentic View document at the time you submit the query you will be prompted about whether you wish to save all changes made in the document or discard all changes Note that even changes made in other tables will be saved discarded After you submit the query the table is reloaded using the query conditions Please note If you get a message saying that too many tables are open then you can reduce the number of tables that are open by using a query to filter out some tables To create and submit a query 1 Click the Query button Ue the required table in order to open the Edit Database Query dialog see screenshot This button typically appears at the top of each DB table or below it If a Query button is not present for any table the designer of the StyleVision Power Stylesheet has not enabled the DB Query feature for that table Edit Database Query as first character in value signifies parameter ea Append AND Append OR Delete Parameters Cancel 2 Click the Append AND or Append OR button This appends an empty criterion for the query shown below _ 2006 Alt
445. uence of zero or more items of the specified type The functions list also includes the return type of that function and a brief description of the function Select Function Function Returns Description abs numeric numeric Returns the absolute value of para adjust date to timezone date date Adjusts an xs time value to a speci adjust date to timezone date dayTime date Adjusts an xs time value to a speci adjust dateT ime to timezone dateTime 7 dateTime Adjusts an xs dateTime value to a adjust dateT ime to timezone dateTime dateTime Adjusts an xs dateTime value to a adjust time to timezone time time Adjusts an xs time value to a speci adjust time to timezoneltime dayTimeD time Adjusts an xs time value to a speci avglany tomicT ype any tomicTyp Returns the average of the values base uri nodes anyURl Returns the value of the base uri p x 2 To insert a function in the XPath expression double click the required function Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Reference Design View 299 The Otherwise check box The Otherwise check box below the input field for the XPath expression appears when a second or subsequent condition is being added to a conditional template Checking the Otherwise check box inserts the optional Otherwise condition of a conditional template For details of how to use the Otherwise condition see Conditional Templates _ 2006 Altova GmbH A
446. unctions do the following 1 In Design View switch to the JavaScript Editor by clicking the Design View tab and selecting JavaScript screenshot below mes Desiany Authentic Taherts 2 Inthe JavaScript Editor type in the function definitions see screenshot below function DisplayTime now new Date hours now getHours mins now getMinutes secs now healt lied result hours mins alert result secs function ClearStatus Ei window status The screenshot above shows the definitions of two JavaScript functions DisplayTime and ClearStatus These have been described for the active SPS They will be entered in the header of the HTML file as follows lt script language javascript gt lt function DisplayTime now new Date hours now getHours mins now getMinutes secs now getSeconds result hours mins secs alert result function ClearStatus window status gt lt script gt These functions can now be called from anywhere in the HTML document In StyleVision all the defined functions are available as options that can be assigned to an event handler property in the Event property group in the Properties Entry Helper See Assigning Function to Event Handlers for details _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 242 Additional Editing Procedures Using Scripts
447. urrent element In the figure below the current element is the para element The boldand italic elements can be inserted within the current para element Insert after Remove As can be seen below the para and Office elements can be inserted before the current para element Insert Insert before gt Insert after gt Remove gt early years This has hq Most of the commands available in the context menu are explained in Authentic View entry helpers Remove element Positioning the mouse cursor over the Remove command pops up a menu list consisting of the selected element and all its ancestors up to the document element Click the element to be removed This is a quick way to delete an element or any of its ancestors Note that clicking an ancestor element will remove all its descendants including the selected element _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 256 Authentic View Editing in Authentic View 10 2 Editing in Authentic View This section describes important features of Authentic View in detail Features have been included in this section either because they are commonly used or require an explanation of the mechanisms or concepts involved The section explains the following e The Date Picker is a graphical calendar that enters dates in the correct XML format when you click a date See Using the Date Picker e Anentity is shorthand for a special character or text string You can define y
448. user who inserts an XML table at his or her discretion e An XML table is structured and formatted in Authentic View that is by the Authentic View user The formatting of an XML table cannot be controlled through the StyleVision Power Stylesheet e Inthe CALS table model the cols attribute of the Table group element tgroup specifies the number of columns in the table This attribute value pair is entered both attribute and value into the XML document when the Authentic View user inserts an XML table This is because the user must specify the number of columns when inserting the table The value of this attribute changes automatically whenever a column is inserted appended or deleted using the Authentic View GUI tools The cols attribute is therefore not shown in the Attributes Entry Helper and its value therefore cannot be modified there _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 170 Content Editing Procedures Working with Tables e Data entered in the cells of an XML table is entered as content of the entry element in the case of a CALS table or td element HTML table or corresponding user defined element as the case may be e To obtain the content of XML tables in HTML output you must generate the XSLT File Save Generated Files and in it manually create a template for outputting the table element Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Content Editing Procedures Using Graphics 171 7
449. va for the purposes provided for in this Software License Agreement and or the Privacy Policy as revised from time to time European users understand and consent to the processing of personal information in the United States for the purposes described herein Altova has the right in its sole discretion to amend this provision of the Software License Agreement and or Privacy Policy at any time You are encouraged to review the terms of the Privacy Policy as posted on the Altova Web site from time to time TERM AND TERMINATION This Software License Agreement may be terminated a by your giving Altova written notice of termination or b by Altova at its option giving you written notice of termination if you commit a breach of this Software License Agreement and fail to cure such breach within ten 10 days after notice from Altova In addition the Software License Agreement governing your use _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 416 Appendices License Information 10 of a previous version that you have upgraded or updated of the Software is terminated upon your acceptance of the terms and conditions of the Software License Agreement accompanying such upgrade or update Upon any termination of the Software License Agreement you must cease all use of the Software that it governs destroy all copies then in your possession or control and take such other actions as Altova may reasonably request to ensure that no copies of the So
450. whether the selection is to be converted to the new node or surrounded by it The selection The selection in Design View can be any of the following A node in the HTML document A text string within a node Adjacent text strings across nodes An image A link A table A list A combination of any of the above In this section we explain the process in general for any selection The special cases of tables and lists are discussed in more detail in the section Creating Tables and Lists as Elements Attributes To make a selection click an HTML document component or highlight the required text string If multiple components are to be selected click and drag over the desired components to highlight the selection Note that StyleVision extends the selection at the beginning and end of the selection to select higher level elements till the first and last selected elements belong to the same parent The location in the schema tree On dragging the selection over the desired schema tree node one of the following symbols will appear together with the popup message create new schema item e Dropping the node when the Create as Sibling symbol appears creates the selection as a sibling node of the node on which the selection is dropped e Dropping the node when the Create as Child symbol appears creates the selection as a child node of the node on which the selection is dropped You should select the node on which the selecti
451. written and oral understandings of the parties with respect to the subject matter hereof Any notice or other communication given under this Software License Agreement shall be in writing and shall have been properly given by either of us to the other if sent by certified or registered mail return receipt requested or by overnight courier to the address shown on Altova s Web site for Altova and the address shown in Altova s records for you or such other address as the parties may designate by notice given in the manner set forth above This Software License Agreement will bind and inure to the benefit of the parties and our respective heirs personal and legal representatives affiliates successors and permitted assigns The failure of either of us at any time to require performance of any provision hereof shall in no manner affect such party s right at a later time to enforce the same or any other term of this Software License Agreement This Software License Agreement may be amended only by a document in writing signed by both of us In the event of a breach or threatened breach of this Software License Agreement by either party the other shall have all applicable equitable as well as legal remedies Each party is duly authorized and empowered to enter into and perform this Software License Agreement If for any reason any provision of this Software License Agreement is held invalid or otherwise unenforceable such invalidity or unenforceability shall
452. x below the expression text box Click OK to finish A new branch otherwise is created screenshot below Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Quick Start Tutorial Using Conditions 75 div gt Relevance lt civ metainto relevance IED conten lt 7 Notice that the contents of the otherwise branch are a copy of the first branch the contents placeholder is bold and has a yellow background Remove this formatting bold and background color from the contents placeholder You have put a condition that carries out the following test on each relevance element i if the contents of relevance match those of presswatch selection byrelevance then the contents of relevance are displayed bold and with a yellow background Otherwise the second branch they are displayed normal Check this in Authentic View Modifying the combo box and inserting a second condition branch In the combo box where the Authentic View user selects a byrelevance value there is no dropdown list option for selecting all news items To include this option do the following 1 In Design View select the combo box 2 Inthe Properties entry helper with combobox selected in the Properties For column click the Edit button of the combobox property in the Authentic group of properties 3 Inthe Edit XPath Expression dialog that pops up modify the XPath expression from distinct values relevance tO distinct values relevance
453. y Helper Entities Please note An internal entity is one that has its value defined within the DTD An external entity is one that has its value contained in an external source e g another XML file Both internal and external entities are listed in the Entities Entry Helper When you insert an entity whether internal or external the entity not its value is inserted into the XML text If the entity is an internal entity Authentic View displays the value of the entity If the entity is an external entity Authentic View displays the entity and not its value This means for example that an XML file that is an external entity will be shown in the Authentic View display as an entity its content does not replace the entity in the Authentic View display You can also define your own entities in Authentic View see Define Entities in the How To Use section Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Authentic View Interface 255 Authentic View context menus Right clicking on some selected document content or node pops up a context menu with commands relevant to the selection or cursor location The context menu is shown below The figure below shows the Insert submenu which is a list of all elements that can be inserted at that current cursor location The Insert before submenu lists all elements that can be inserted before the current element The Insert after submenu lists all elements that can be inserted after the c
454. yed for use among multiple Authentic View users 8 If XSLT files or output files are required these are generated _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 86 High Level Procedures General Usage Procedure SPS and Sources Creating a new SPS file To create a new SPS document select an option from under the File New Ctrl N command et y or click the New from Schema icon in the Standard toolbar Anew SPS document is created and is displayed in Design View The new document is given a provisional name of SPSX sps where x is an integer corresponding to the position of that SPS document in the sequence of new documents created since the application was started After a new SPS document is created the source files for the SPS must be assigned Assigning source files for the SPS There are three types of source files that can be assigned to an SPS e Schema sources e Working XML File e Template XML File All these assignments are made in the Schema Sources entry helper and how to make the assignments is described in the section Schema Sources The significant points about each type of source file are given below Schema sources A schema source file must be assigned to an SPS so that a structure for the design document can be created Schema sources are assigned in the Schema Sources entry helper A schema may be an XML Schema file xsd file an XML Schema generated from a DB file a DTD ora user defined schema
455. ylesheets for HTML output In this way the SPS can be used to enable XML document editing and to generate HTML output from the edited XML document Additionally the generated XSLT stylesheets can be used to transform other XML documents based on the same schema as the SPS Steps in creating an SPS Given below is an outline of the steps involved in creating a new SPS 1 Assign a schema to the newly created SPS The schema may be i a schema file DTD or XML Schema ii an XML Schema generated from a DB or iii a user defined schema created directly in StyleVision This is done in the Schema Sources entry helper 2 Assign a Working XML File to the SPS The Working XML File provides the XML data processed by the SPS when generating Authentic View and output previews The Working XML File is assigned in the Schema Sources entry helper The Working XML File enables you to preview output in StyleVision 3 If required assign a Template XML File The Template XML File provides the starting data for a new XML document created with the SPS 4 Select the required XSLT version 5 The SPS document is designed in Design View using the various design components available to the designer The design process consists of creating a document structure and defining presentation properties 6 The Authentic View and outputs are tested If modifications to the design are required these are made and the SPSdocument is re tested 7 The SPS is deplo
456. you will learn how to create a node as a combo box and in the section Using Global Templates and Rest of Contents how to create a node as a dynamic table Make sure to save the file before moving to the next section _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 56 Quick Start Tutorial Inserting Static Content 5 3 Inserting Static Content Static content is content you enter directly in the design as opposed to content that comes from the XML source A variety of static components can be entered in an SPS design In this part of the tutorial you will learn how to insert the following static components e Animage e A horizontal line e Text Inserting a static image The static image to insert is styleVision2006 Examples Tutorials NewsItems BMP Which will be used as the header of the document To insert this image at the head of the document do the following 1 Place the cursor between the start tags of newsitems and newsitem screenshot below Main template este content Resa Notice that the cursor is within the newsitems element but outside the newsitem element It will therefore be inserted in the output once at the start of processing of the newsitems element because there is only one newsitems element defined in the schema 2 Right click and select Insert Image The Insert Image dialog pops up screenshot below Edit Image Static Dynamic Static and Dynamic Static
457. yperlink right click either the start or end hyperlink a tag and select Hyperlink Properties from the context menu This pops up the Edit Hyperlink dialog screenshot above Removing and deleting hyperlinks A hyperlink is an SPS component for example a text string or image which links to a document fragment or other resource via a URI When the target URI is cleared the hyperlink is said to be removed the SPS component however remains in the design document On the other hand when a hyperlink is deleted the SPS component is deleted from the design document These two actions are carried out as follows e To remove a hyperlink right click the hyperlink and in the Edit Hyperlink dialog screenshot above press the Remove Link button The target URI is cleared e To delete a hyperlink select the hyperlink by clicking either the start or end hyperlink a tag and press the Delete key The hyperlink and its contents are deleted Altova StyleVision User Manual _ 2006 Altova GmbH Content Editing Procedures Auto Calculations 183 7 7 Auto Calculations The Auto Calculation feature i displays the result of an XPath evaluation at any desired location in the output document and ii optionally updates a node in the XML document with the result of the XPath evaluation The Auto Calculation feature is a useful mechanism for including e Calculations involving operations on dynamic data values For example you can count t
458. ys suggest corrections Selecting this option causes suggestions from the current dictionary main dictionary plus listed custom dictionaries to be displayed in the Suggestions list box Otherwise no suggestions will be shown Make corrections only from main dictionary Selecting this option causes only the main dictionary to be used none of the custom dictionaries is used Additionally the Custom Dictionaries button is disabled which prevents editing of the custom dictionaries Ignore words in UPPER case Selecting this option causes all upper case words to be ignored Ignore words with numbers Selecting this option causes all words containing numbers to be ignored Dictionaries Each spell checking round uses the current dictionary The current dictionary consists of one uneditable main dictionary and the listed custom dictionaries The number of available main dictionaries is fixed You select a main dictionary from the drop down menu in the Dictionary Language combo box To edit the list of custom dictionaries used in a spell check or to edit the contents of a custom dictionary click the Custom Dictionaries button and select the required custom dictionary from the list of custom dictionaries When you click the Custom Dictionaries button the following dialog appears _ 2006 Altova GmbH Altova StyleVision User Manual 362 Reference Tools Menu custom tls C app_terms tlx OJ nanonull tlx The default us

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

DR-A333  Dataram 8GB DDR3-2133  Die Bedienungsanleitung für das Soundmaster UR 2025 finden Sie  Bedienungsanleitung  CLUB3D Radeon HD 7790 royalKing AMD Radeon HD7790 1GB  1x COMBAT DOT SIGHT  KUDA 080030 holder  Télécopie pleine page  SKM 5200 FR    

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file